MUELLERIA

V *

NATIONAL HERBARIUM
LIBRARY

ROYAL BOTANIC GARDENS
STH. YARRA, S.E.1, VIC.

14 SEP 1967

VOL i, No. 3. JULY, 1967.

3198/66.

MUELLERIA

An Australian Journal

of Botany

VOL. I, No. 3 *JOLY<ma, 1967

(concluding Volume I.)

NATIONAL HERBARIUM

ROYAL BOTANIC GARDENS, MELBOURNE
VICTORIA, AUSTRALIA

R. T. M. PESCOTT, Director and Government Botanist

3198/66.

CONTENTS

Page

Systematic notes on the indigenous Australian flora — J. H. Willis
Typification of eight Victorian species names in Eucalyptus — J. H. Willis . .
New cultivar in Leptospermum — J. H. Willis

Aquatic Angiosperms (Records of four introduced species new to Victoria) —
Helen I. Aston

Correction (re Brachycome)

Australian Characeae which survived the Armidale Fire — R. D. Wood and
Mary B. Williams

Supplementary descriptions for two Victorian desert lichens — Rex B. Filson

A bibliography of “ Blackfellows’ Bread ”, Polyporus mylittce Cooke &
Massee — J. H. Willis

A bibliography of the “ Ghost Fungus ”, Pleurotus nidiformis (Berk.)
Sacc.— J. H. Willis

Notes on the development and structure of the “ Basket Fungus ”, Clathrus
gracilis (Berk.) Schlechtendal — E. J. Semmens

Further Cordyceps collections in Australia — J. H. Willis

Bibliographia Huntiana — Ann Mozley

Tortula pagorum in Australia — D. G. Catcheside

117

16 *f

16\ S

16 V?

17^

17^

19 ^

20V 3

21^

2lV?
22 V 3
22^

22\ 7

A collection of plants from the Victorian Pyrenees in 1840 — J. H. Willis . .
Tristania lactiflua or T. lactiflora ? — J. H. Willis

The late Raleigh Adelbert Black (1880-1963) and his private Herbarium—
J. H. Willis

Book reviews and notices — J. H. Willis

23<\ J

23V?

General Index

«T

•W

SYSTEMATIC NOTES ON THE INDIGENOUS AUSTRALIAN FLORA

by

J. H. Willis*

SUMMARY

In this paper: 11 species and 5 varieties are described as new,

with some discussion on their affinities and distributions; 20 new
nomenclatural combinations are effected, with appropriate comments;
6 synonymies of specific names are established; the ranges of 10
other species are extended into Victoria, and noteworthy extensions
are made to the distribution within that State of 5 very localized
taxa. Arrangement of families is according to the system of Engler
and Prantl.

Proteaceae

GREVILLEA JEPHCOTTII J. H. Willis spec. nov.

ex affinitate G. lanigerae A. Cunn. a qua praecipue differt: statura
majore (1-3 m.); ramis manifeste verticillatis; foliis suberectis
latioribus (3-6 mm.) subpungentibus, supra laete viridibus scabrisque,
subter glaucescentibus glabrisque; floribus pallide viridibus, in racemis
perbrevibus densis; stylis comparate brevibus (5-7 mm.).

HOLOTYPE : S.W. slopes of Pine Mountain (±7 miles S.E. of

Walwa) , Upper Murray region, Victoria, among granite rocks
in dryish eucalypt forest at ± 620 m. (2,000 feet) alt. —
J. H. Willis , 17 Nov. 1964 (MEL). ISOTYPES at Mel,
NSW, BRI, AD, CANB, K.

PARATYPE: Ibidem — J. H. Willis, 15 Jan. 1964 (MEL, cum fructibus).

Also examined (all in MEL): Pine Mountain, N.E. Victoria — Jeanie
H. Harvey, Aug. 1963; ibidem — Carl Walter, Nov. 1891, S. W.
Jephcott, 1878; Hume River— S. W. Jephcott, 1883 & Oct.
1887; Upper Murray — C. French Jr., Nov. 1886.

Shrub 1-3 m. (3-9 feet) high, rigidly erect, dense, leafy, low and
bushy in exposed rocky situations but tall in more shaded
forest, the branching conspicuously and often distantly verti-
cillate; branchlets (also young foliage) loosely hairy. Leaves
— erect, ovate-lanceolate to lanceolate or somewhat oblanceolate,
1*5-3 -5 cm. long, 3-6 mm. (sometimes 8 mm.) wide, bright green,
paler beneath, chiefly flat but the entire margins d= revolute,
terminating in a fine ± pungent point 1—2 mm. long; upper surfaces
somewhat shining, but scabrid and minutely tuberculate all over;
under surfaces glabrous, dull blue-green, appearing almost glaucous
in dried state, the narrow mid-rib conspicuous but other veins obscure.
Flowers 6-9 in dense, terminal, leafy clusters (very reduced racemes)
and rather inconspicuous amongst the foliage, on glabrous glaucescent
pedicels 4-6 mm. long. Perianth glabrous externally but white-villous

* National Herbarium of Victoria.

118 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

inside (toward base), pale green but assuming reddish-purple tints in
drying, d= 5 mm. high and 3-4 mm. broad at the dilated base, recurved
through a semicircle above, the cucullate antheriferous laminae
dz 2 mm. long and wide; torus straight, 1 -5 mm. wide, 0-3 mm. thick;
hypogynal gland semicircular, pale at first, contrasting with darker
torus to which it is equal in width and thickness. Ovary sessile,
purplish, 4-5 mm. long, loosely white-villous with hairs 1 -5 mm. long;
style relatively thick, 5-7 mm. long, purplish, glabrous toward apex;
stigmatic disc green, lateral, 2 mm. wide, scutelliform with short
central nipple. Anthers pale yellow, 0*7 mm. long. Follicle dull
brown, with scattered soft hairs, broadly ellipsoid, 10-15 x 4-7 mm.,
0-4 mm. thick, the style and stigma persisting. Seed resembling a
click-beetle, date brown, narrowly ellipsoid, plano-convex, 8-10 x 2-3
mm., with whitish aril 1-5 mm. long.

Affinities of the new species are with Grevillea lanigera A. Cunn.
which differs in its non-verticillate branching, more spreading
narrower leaves that are hairy on both surfaces, never becoming
glaucous beneath and lacking a ± pungent mucro, also in the longer
racemes of coloured flowers (chiefly reddish) with longer styles.

Up to the present, G. jephcottii is known only from the south-
western portion and summit area of Pine Mountain, where locally
abundant; but its occurrence on similar granitic ranges along the
Upper Murray, both in Victoria and New South Wales, may be
anticipated.

The epithet was chosen as a mark of respect to the Jephcott
family of Ournie, on the Upper Murray River above Jingellic, N.S.W.,
especially to Sydney Wheeler Jephcott who discovered the plant
when only fourteen (in 1878) and who died at the age of 86 on
3rd July 1951. His father, Edwin Jephcott, had taken up land at
Ournie during 1864. There he gradually established a magnificent
arboretum of exotic trees, and was in early contact with Baron von
Mueller who visited him in January 1874. Father and son also
maintained a lifelong interest in the native flora, delighting to ramble
over Pine Mountain on the opposite side of the Murray. They were
the first to collect specimens on this floristically rich granite range.

BANKSIA CANEI J. H. Willis spec. nov.

ad B. marginatam Cav. (cum qua olim confusus est) et B. integri
foliam L.f. evidenter proxime accedens; sed a formis omnibus prioris
differt costa folii subter ± hirsuta, valvis capsulae magmoribus
spisse tomentosis, et praecipue perianthiis stylisque post anthesm
omnino deciduis; a B. integrifolia recedit statura multo minore, foliis
angustioribus, seminibus comparate latioribus; a his speciebus duobus
foliis constanter pungentibus (in statu maturo interdum dentatis)
distinguitur.

HOLOTYPE: Mt. Seldom Seen track, Wulgulmerang, E. Victoria, in
montane forest at ± 900 m. (2,900 feet) alt. — J. H. Willis,
27 Nov. 1962 (MEL). ISOTYPES at MEL, NSW, AD, K.

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 119

Also examined (all in MEL) : Splitter’s Creek near “ Rockbank ”,

Wulgulmerang, E. Victoria — J. H. Willis, 3 Dec. 1962; Brumby
Point, Nunniong Plateau, E. Vic. at 1250 m. — J. H. Willis ,
17 Nov. 1964; Wellington River, on road to Bennison High
Plains between Mts. Wellington & Selma, E. Vic. — W. Cane,
9 Jan. 1963; “High mountains at the Mitta Mitta ” River,
N.E. Victoria — F. Mueller, Jan. 1954; Near Kybean “ on
exposed windswept sites with Casuarina nana, 1-2 feet high ”,
S.E. New South Wales — A. B. Costin, May 1949 (also in
Herb. NSW n. 77821); Kybean, near Kydra Trig. Station,
“ 2-5 feet high, on Great Dividing Range, conglomerate
formation, 3,600-4,000 feet, N.S.W.” — R. H. Camhage n.
1994, 4 Nov. 1908 (also in Herb. NSW n. 77820).

Shrub 1-2-5 m. (3-8 feet) high and wide, sometimes dwarfed to
30 cm. on exposed mountain heaths, compact, flat-crowned, branched
almost to base; young branchlets tomentose. Leaves often subverti-
cillate, 4-8 cm. long, 4-8 mm. wide, erecto-patent, rigid, slightly
revolute at margins which in seedling stage bear 4-8 spreading,
triangular, distant spiny teeth along each side, but are fewer-toothed
(mostly in upper half) to quite entire when adult; apex sometimes =t
truncate but always terminating in a pungent point =h 1 mm. long;
upper surfaces glabrous, somewhat shiny with depressed mid-vein;
under surfaces adpressedly white-cottony, except on broad bold
mid-rib which is variably hirsute with bristly, white or brownish
hairs to 1 mm. long. Inflorescence a dense, many-flowered, pallid
yellow spike 6-12 x 4-6 cm. at anthesis; subtending basal bracts
numerous, to 1 cm. long, greyish, shortly and densely villous,
contracting from a broad-lanceolate base into a long subulate apex,
floral bracts short and thick, including the dense pale-ferruginous to
silvery tomentum ±4x2- mm., the 2 hairy bracteoles similar but
smaller. Perianth ±15 mm. long, white-villous except on basal tube
which is glabrous for 2-3 mm.; antheriferous laminae ± 3-4 x 0-7 mm.,
narrowly elliptical, on slender almost filiform claws. Ovary minute
(0-5-0 -7 mm. long), entirely concealed among the bracteoles and
hair covering the woody axis, ovoid, glabrous, 4-lobed at base, with 8
bold vertical ribs; style wiry, rigid, 2 cm. long, 0-5 mm. wide at base,
straw-yellow, glabrous and shining, at first strongly arcuate, but
remaining =t indexed after anthesis, the stigmatic tip dark, cylindro-
conic, 1x0-2 mm. Anthers on short thick filaments (? or sterile
bases), elliptic, 1-5 x 0-5 mm., pale yellow with dark sterile tips.
Fruiting cone erect, conspicuous, up to 12 cm. long and 3-6 cm.
wide, its timber hard and pinkish-brown, bearing up to 100 velutinous
fertile capsules (but usually much fewer) , completely devoid of dead
floral remains. Mature capsules partly embedded in upgrowth of the
woody axis, dolabriform, 1-5-2 -5 cm long and wide, ± 1 cm. high,
the woody valves each 3-5 mm. thick, densely covered with an
indumentum of woolly-velvety hairs (to 2 mm. high) that are
ferruginous at the cone-axis but paling to greyish or creamy-white at
the semicircular and glabrous suture. Seed 12-15 x 8-10 mm., nigger-
brown to blackish, the basal embryonate portion 6-8 x 4 mm. and ±

120 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

semicircular, the broad wing rugulose and somewhat lustrous; septum
broadly cuneate, similar in size and shape to seeds, dark brown, dull,
toughly coriaceous to almost woody.

The new species is closely related to B. marginata Cav. (with
which it has been confused in the past) and to B. integrifolia L.f. It
differs from all forms of B. marginata in having the under-surfaces of
leaves with ± hairy midribs, the cones and capsules larger, the
capsular valves paler and more thickly tomentose, and especially in
the perianths and styles being completely deciduous after anthesis.
It departs from B. integrifolia in much smaller stature, more
horizontally spreading habit, manifestly narrower leaves and relatively
broader seeds (which are narrowly cuneate in B. integrifolia, with
embryonate part 10 mm. long) , and from both species in the constantly
pungent-pointed leaves which are sometimes toothed in the adult
stage. The seeds are somewhat intermediate in character between
those of B. marginata and B. integrifolia.

B. canei has a scattered, subalpine distribution in Victoria between
the watershed of the Macalister River and the Murray-Buchan R.
divide, occurring in four principal centres where locally quite abundant.
It reappears in the high rocky Kybean section of the Dividing Range
near Nimmitabel, N.S.W., and may be present in some of the
mountainous tracts lying between there and the Victorian border. A
collection in Melbourne Herbarium from Mt. Fulton at Port Davey,
far S.W. Tasmania (Apr. 1954), has somewhat pungent leaves,
strongly resembling those of B. canei; but the withered perianths and
styles are persistent on old cones, as in B. marginata of which it may
be a form. Unfortunately, no capsules or seeds are present.

The epithet canei is a tribute to Mr. William Cane, nurseryman
and apiarist of Maffra, who reported the occurrence of this Banksia
in the Wellington River region, recognized its distinctiveness from
B. marginata and supplied copious notes and specimens to the writer.
Mr. Cane is responsible for many interesting botanical discoveries in
Gippsland, extending the known range of several uncommon species.

Santalaceae

SANTALUM LANCEOLATUM R. Br. Prodr. Flor. Nov. Holl. 356 (1810)

Probably the most noteworthy botanical discovery in Victoria
during the past decade is that of Northern Sandalwood or Plum Bush
( Santalum lanceolatum ) , which was located on the eastern slopes of
the Warby Range (some 5^ miles west of Wangaratta) by Miss D.
Nason, a local resident at “ Kurring-gai ”, about 1959. The occurrence
was restricted to two very old, gracefully pendulous trees — each
about 25 feet high — growing among rocks at the foot of the waterfall
in Brien’s Gorge. No other examples are known in this State, the
nearest being about 83 miles to the north-west (2 miles N.N.E. of
Mathoura, which is by far the southernmost occurrence in New South
Wales). Unfortunately, one of the pair died during 1964, so that the

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 121

solitary survivor must now represent the rarest indigenous woody
species in Victoria. There are three collections from this Brien’s
Gorge sandalwood at Melbourne Herbarium, as follows: —

R. D. Croll, 6 Oct. 1961; Miss Jean Galbraith, 5 Mar. 1962;

A. B. Court & J. H. Willis, 2 June 1962.

Ranunculaceae

RANUNCULUS PACHYCARPUS B. G. Briggs in Proc. Linn. Soc.

N.S.W 84: 301-2, fig. 11-16 (1960).

This species, described so recently, was recorded for several
localities in New South Wales and South Australia. Its occurrence
also in Victoria was only to be anticipated and has now been
confirmed. Following are details of three Victorian collections at
Melbourne Herbarium: —

Pine Mountain, ± 6 miles S.E. of Walwa, in damp mossy places
among slabs of granite rock at about 620 m. (2,000 feet) alt. —
J. H. Willis, 17 Nov. 1964; Anderson’s Creek near Warrandyte, on
“ deserted gold diggings ” — G. Renner, 1887, (det. tentat. B. G. Briggs,
5/2/1965); “ Wimmera ” — W. E. Matthews, 1893 (det. B. G. Briggs,
5/2/1965).

Ranunculus pachycarpus is closely related to the much more
widespread R. lappaceus Sm., from which it may immediately be
distinguished in the fruiting state by its plump, turgid, almost globular
achenes with very thick pericarp and stoutish beak. The habitat
varies enormously, from rather arid tracts at Mt. Brown near
Port Augusta (TYPE) locality) to Mt. Lofty Ranges in South
Australia, through west, south-central and far north-eastern Victoria
to the Macintyre River (bordering N.E. New South Wales and
Queensland) .

Mimosacese

ACACIA PHASMOIDES J. H. Willis spec. nov. [Tab. X]

ut videtur A. diffusa Lindl. affinis, sed manifeste differt sic: ramis
tenuioribus apertisque; phyllodiis longioribus (4-7 cm.), plus minus
incurvis, flexilibus, nunquam pungentibus (tantum mucronatis),
minus conspicue articulatis; floribus 8-12 in spicis brevissimis
sessilibus geminis axillaribus hirsutis; fructu arcuato, angustiore
(2*5-4-5 mm. lato — cf. 5 mm. in A. diffusa ); seminum funiculis laxe
sigmoideis (non multo crasse plicatis).

HOLOTYPE: (cum floribus post anthesin) : Pine Mountain, far N.E.

Victoria =t 6 miles S.E. of Walwa, among granite rocks about
\ mile S.W. of highest peak and at ± 760 m. (2,500 feet)
alt. — J. H. Willis & K. C. Rogers, 17 Nov. 1964 (MEL).

PARATYPES: Ibidem— J. H. Willis & K. C. Rogers, 17 Nov. 1964

(MEL, NSW, CANB, BRI, AD, K) ; ibidem, cum fructibus —
Willis & Rogers, 15 Jan. 1964 (MEL, NSW).

Also examined (both in MEL) : Pine Mountain, far N.E. Victoria, in
a steep granitic ravine above Pine Mtn. Ck. (at ± 615 m.
alt.), about 7\ miles S.E. of Walwa — J. H. Willis , 16 Jan.
1964; “ Hume River ” (but almost certainly Pine Mountain)
— S. W. Jephcott, 1883, cum floribus.

122 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

Acacia phasmoides sp. nov.

Above: The HOLOTYPE in situ (branch with almost spent flowers)
on Pine Mountain, Vic., at ± 2,500 feet.

Below Mature shrub among granite rocks on Pine Mountain, far
N.E. Victoria (at ± 2,500 feet).

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 123

Very slenderly branched open shrub 1-2 m. (3-6 feet) or rarely
to 3 m. high; trunks smooth, silvery-grey, the branches terete to
slightly angular, grey-brown to reddish and minutely pubescent
when young. Phyllodes glabrous or sparsely sprinkled with minute
appressed hairs, widely spaced and spreading but arcuately incurved,
flexible, very narrow-linear, 5-8 cm. long, 1-2 mm. wide, slightly
flattened vertically but ± quadrangular (with cruciform section)
toward base; apex shortly mucronate and often ± hooked; marginal
gland small, axillary (at extreme base) ; petiole ± 1 mm. long;
nervation consisting of a single prominent, central, rib-like vein on
the narrow surface, with an obscure secondary vein or longitudinal
wrinkle on each side of it, both mid-veins and leaf margins appearing
asperulate (from resinous tubercles) under the microscope.
Inflorescences yellow, axillary, sessile, in pairs, each 6-10 mm. wide
at anthesis and consisting of 8-12 flowers on a very short adpressedly
hairy spike (cf. A. diffusa with capitula of ± 20 flowers on glabrous
peduncles 5-15 mm. long). Perianth 4-partite, firm, ±2-5 mm. long;
calyx i the length of corolla, dark, sprinkled with appressed white
hairs and ciliate on margins, split for about ^ its length into very
broad lobes; corolla lobes glabrous, ovate-elliptic, yellow, the apical
margins incurved and indurate; filaments extremely numerous, with
microscopic anthers (less than 0-1 mm. long); ovary densely white-
hirsute, the sty’es on very young fruits 4-5 mm. long. Pod slender,
arcuate to sigmoid, narrow-linear, 5-9 cm. long, 2 -5-4 -5 mm. wide,
at first densely white-pubescent, finally with scattered, minute and
appressed hairs. Seeds ± 3-6, longitudinal in pod, irregulary
developed, 3-4 mm. long, 1-5-2 mm. wide; aril pale, very small,
passing into a relatively broad funicle with short sigmoid fold at end
of seed.

The new species most closely approaches Acacia diffusa Lindl.
from which it differs thus: branches open and more slender;

phyllodes flexible, longer, more or less inarched, less articulate and
never pungent; flowers 8-12 in very short, sessile, hairy axillary
spikes; perianth firmer and longer; calyx hairy, with broad lobes split
less than half way to base; pods narrower; seeds smaller (4-5-6 x 3
mm. in A. diffusa ) with laxly sigmoid, not closely and much folded,
funicle.

At the present time, Acacia phasmoides is known only from a few
high rocky parts of Pine Mountain; but it should be looked for on
similar terrain adjoining both sides of the Upper Murray River. The
epithet was bestowed in order to emphasize the extremely open,
wraith-like appearance of this insubstantial shrub.

Papilionaceae

DAVIESIA MIMOSOIDES R. Br. in Ait.f.

var. LAXIFLORA (J. H. Willis) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

D. corymbosa Sm. var. laxiflora J. H. Willis in Viet. Nat. 73: 190

124 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

The original description (1957) of this montane population was
made in the belief that Daviesia mimosoides should be included under
D. corymbosa — an opinion shared by G. Bentham (1864), F. M.
Bailey (1900), Maiden and Betche (1916). In Contr. N.S.W. Herb.
Flora Series n .101 pt. 1: 33-35 (1961) Joy Thompson re-defined
D. mimosoides and D. corymbosa , retaining both species and
restricting the latter to New South Wales (between the Blue
Mountains and Sassafras) . Her chief points of difference were the
racemose, inflorescence and often rather inconspicuous venation in
leaves of D. mimosoides, contrasting with the corymbiform
inflorescence and strongly reticulate leaves of D. corymbosa. Under
this concept the Victorian D. corymbosa var. laxiflora would certainly
be referable to D. mimosoides; and, for the sake of uniformity with
present usage in New South Wales, the above new varietal combina-
tion has been effected.

DILLWYNIA CAPITATA J. H. Willis var. ULIGINOSA J. H. Willis

varietas nova a forma typica specie! differt sic: habitatione uliginosa,
caulibus filiformibus lentis procumbentibus atque foliis (4-6 mm.
longis) et bracteolis (minus quam 1 mm.) constanter brevioribus.

HOLOTYPE: Mt. Stradbroke near Black Mountain* Station,

Wulgulmerang, E. Victoria, on swampy ground with Epacris
microphylla etc., at zb 1,100 m. (or 3,600 feet) alt. — K. C.
Rogers, 9 Dec. 1962 (MEL). ISOTYPES at MEL & NSW.

Also examined: Ibidem — K. C. Rogers, 2 Dec. 1963 & 25 Nov. 1959
(both in MEL) .

The new variety differs from the typical form (known only by a
single type collection, 4 Nov. 1949, from Clover Dam near Bogong)
in its swampy habitat, tough wiry procumbent stems and consistently
shorter leaves (4-6 mm. long) and bracteoles (less than 1 mm.) . As
far as known at present, it appears to be restricted to swampy
subalpine ground flanking the granitic Mt. Stradbroke. It is remark-
able that the only occurrences of both species and its paludal variant
should be so extremely localized. The variety uliginosa bears an
astonishing superficial resemblance to a trailing form of Pultenaea
subumbellata Hook, that occurs at Digger’s Holes on the Nunniong
Plateau, only about 17 miles W.S.W. of Mt. Stradbroke. But the latter
plant has minute stipules, a longer (5 mm.) villous calyx that is not
abruptly contracted into the pedicel, and very much longer bracteoles
(2-3 mm.) .

PULTENAEA MOLLIS. Lindl. in Mitch. Three Exped. E. Aust. 2:
258 (1838).

P. angustifolia H. B. Williamson in Proc. roy. Soc. Viet, new ser. 40:
57 (1928).

Examination of a wide selection of specimens of both Pultencea
mollis and P. angustifolia has convinced the writer that these two
entities cannot be satisfactorily separated at the specific level. Typical

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 125

P. mollis (from Mt. Sturgeon area at the southern extremity of the
Grampians) certainly has coarser, broader (to 1*5 mm. wide) leaves
and larger more congested heads of almost sessile flowers than any
form of P. angustifolia, but in Portland district there appears to be a
complete gradation from one extreme to the other. As certain other
species (e.g., Pultencea scabra, Epacris impressa, Prostanthera
lasianthos, Westringia glabra ) also exhibit distinctive forms on the
Grampians, there is no reason to regard the type form of P. mollis
there as specifically different from the more usual narrow-leaved
condition (“ P. angustifolia ”) in various parts of Victoria. Consider-
able diversity exists amongst material from the four syntype localities
— Grampians, Mt. Macedon, Gembrook Ranges, Bairnsdale — cited by
Williamson in his description of P. angustifolia .

PULTEN/EA WILLIAMSONIANA J. H. Willis spec. nov.

P. angustifolia H. B. Williamson var. vis cos a H. B. Williamson in
Proc. roy. Soc . Viet, new ser: 40: 58 (1928).

Ut varietas P. angustifoliae Williamson olim publicata, sed a formis
omnibus P. mollis Lindl. (P. angustifoliam includens) differt: foliis
dispersioribus, late et rigide diffusis, glabris, subpungentibus; calyce
resinoso-nitido, subglabro, in pedicello gracili (3-4 mm. longo); atque
bracteolis brevibus subrotundis.

HOLOTYPE : Mt. Zero, northern extremity of Grampians, Victoria —
H. B. Williamson , early Oct. 1927, cum floribus (MEL).
ISOTYPE at NSW.

Also examined: Between Mts. Zero & Stapylton, where frequent on
heathland around gully-heads ± 1^ miles east of Mt. Zero
quarry — J. H. Willis, 27 July 1950, cum fructibus (MEL).
The species was observed by R. V. Smith of Melbourne
Herbarium, in Oct. 1945, growing along the track to Mt.
William (personal communication) .

Slender rigid shrub 1-2 cm. (3-6 feet) high, the young branches
beset with short pale appressed hairs. Leaves glabrous or sparsely
sprink’ed with hairs, spreading at right angles to stem or even
slightly reflexed (the petiole remaining =b erect) and never over-
lapping, 7-10 mm. long, 0-2-0 -4 mm. wide, narrow-linear, involutely
terete, rigidly acicular with short pungent mucro; stipules dark,
setaceous, decurved, 2-3 mm. long. Flowers 2-4 together at ends of
short lateral branchlets that may eventually grow out beyond flowers
into leafy shoots; bracts stipule-like and inconspicuous at base of the
hairy pedicels (3-4 mm. long) . Calyx red-brown, resinous and shiny,
campanulate, 5 mm. long, split to about £ into broad subacute lobes,
sparsely hairy to almost glabrous except for a short marginal fringe
of white cilia on the lobes; bracteoles attached at base of calyx,
2-2-5 mm. long, broadly ovate to almost orbicular, dark reddish-
brown, glabrous and highly resinous (stuck to calyx-tube) . Corolla
to 10 mm. long; standard 8-10 mm. wide, with ± rotund lamina,
clear yellow but suffused with red towards claw; wings and keel
almost as long as standard, the former yellow, the latter dark purplish

126 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

obtuse and dt dolabriform. Style filiform, ± 6 mm. long, pubescent
at base. Pod 5-6 mm. long, broadly oblong with an oblique mucro
(style-base, dt 1 mm.) , reddish, pubescent. Seeds not observed.

In Williamson’s herbarium are three other older collections that he
had labelled “ var. viscosa ”, but they are closer to his P. angustifolia
var. angustifolia (i.e., to P. mollis) and do not conform with the Mt.
Zero population now recognized as P. williams oniana. Actually the
new species would seem to have much stronger affinities with P.
vrolandii Maiden, of north-eastern granite ranges, than with any form
of P. mollis from which it is markedly distinct in the rigidly spreading
subpungent leaves, almost glabrous calyces on slender pedicels, and
especially in the shorter almost rotund bracteoles. It is apparently
endemic in the Grampians where it has quite a limited range.

The epithet honours the late Herbert Bennett Williamson (1860-
1931), a botanist in the Victorian Education Department who for
many years made the genus Pultencea his particular study, who
published many novelties (including 14 new species) thereunder and
who first discovered P. williamsoniana.

BURTONIA SCABRA R. Br. in Ait.

During 1957 Mr. W. Cane of Maffra discovered in the vicinity of
Gladstone Creek (Gippsland) five or six plants of Burtonia scabra, a
handsome mauve-flowered leguminous shrub hitherto know only from
sandy tracts in the south-west of Western Australia. The occurrence
is astonishing and probably represents an accidental or deliberate
introduction — perhaps by earlier miners from the W.A. goldfields.
Two samples are in Melbourne Herbarium, viz:

Dargo Road near Gladstone Creek, ± 7-8 miles N.N.E. of
Briagolong — W. Cane , 21 Oct. 1957 (“flowers closing up at
night-time”), also 19 Nov. 1957 (immature pods).

PLATYLOBIUM OBTUSANGULUM Hook.

var. SPINULOSUM J. H. Willis var. nov.

a forma typica speciei manifeste differt : habitu erecto, folio rotundo
eius marginibus a spinis tenuibus 3-7 munitis (spinis usitate supra
medium folii emersis).

HOLOTYPE: On Airey’s Inlet to Wensleydale road, about 2 miles

north of Forestry Tower at Peter’s Hill, northern fringe of
Otway Range, S. Victoria — Miss Marie Allender , 12 Nov.
1961 (MEL). ISOTYPES at MEL & NSW.

Also examined: Ibidem — Marie Allender, 1 Nov. 1960 (MEL) & Dec.
1961 (NSW).

Differing from the widespread typical form of the species in its
more erect habit and almost rotund leaves, the margins of which
bear 3-7 slender spine-like teeth (usually toward the distal end) .
Except for a rather deeper purplish-brown colouration in the corolla,

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 127

both flowers and fruits of the new variety are indistinguishable from
those of the normal form of the species, which grows abundantly
nearby; but no specimens intermediate in foliage have been observed.
A population somewhat similar to the var. spinulosum, yet not
identical, was collected by F. Mueller (Oct. 1851) “toward Glenelg
River ” in South Australia (specimen in MEL) . P. obtusangulum var.
spinulosum is apparently quite a rare plant, being known only by a
few bushes in the type locality; the encroachment of leases for brown
coal mining render its continued survival there uncertain.

HOVEA ROSMARINIFOLIA A. Cunn. in Field Geogr. Mem. N.S.W.
348 (1825).

H. longifolia R. Br. in Ait.f. forma aspera H. B. Williamson in Ewart
Flor. Viet. 665 (1931).

With the exception of its relatively narrower leaves, typical Hovea
rosmarinifolia , as occurring in the Dubbo-Tamworth region of New
South Wales, appears to show no significant morphological difference
from the populations in eastern Victoria referred by H. B. Williamson
( l.c .) to a form of H. longifolia. Accordingly the name H. rosmarini-
folia is now adopted for the slender Victorian mountain shrubs having
asperous revolute leaves with prominently raised reticulations.
Williamson (l.c.) ascribed the authorship of H. longifolia “ var.
aspera ” to F. M. Reader, but there is no evidence that Reader ever
published either a variety or a form under this epithet. In both
editions (1923 and 1928) of the Census of the Plants of Victoria
(Field Naturalists’ Club of Victoria) H. longifolia var. aspera is
attributed to Bentham; this also is erroneous.

HOVEA ROSMARINIFOLIA A. Cunn. in Field.

var. VILLOSA J. H. Willis var. nov.

a formis omnibus speciei recedit: calycibus, pedicellis atque folio rum
faciebus inferioribus a villis densis obscuratis.

HOLOTYPE : Mt. Kaye, 13 miles N.N.E. of Cann River, far E. Victoria,
on steep granitic slopes at ± 760 m. (2,500 feet) alt. —
J. H. Willis & N. A. Wakefield , 16 Oct. 1948 (MEL). Part
of HOLOTYPE at NSW.

Also examined: “Avon Country”, E. Victoria — W. Cane, June 1955
(MEL); Clarence River, N.S.W. — J. F. Wilcox , 1872 (MEL).

This apparently well-marked variant differs from all other
conditions of H. rosmarinifolia in the dense, =±= ferruginous, villous
hair enveloping calyces, pedicels and undersides of leaves.

HOVEA LONGIFOLIA R. Br. in Ait.f.

var. MONTANA ( Hook.f .) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

H. purpurea Sweet var. montana Hook.f. Flor. Tasm. 1: 93 (1856).
In Tasmania the distinctiveness of this variant is less marked than
on the Australian alps, where it is sharply demarcated from all other
forms of H. longifolia in its low stature (up to 30 cm.) , small broad
bluntisb leaves (10-20 x 3-6 mm.) and very deep purple flowers that

128 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

open soon after the winter snow has melted. It may form extensive
societies on open alpine or subalpine heaths and woodlands at from
4,500 to 6,500 feet alt.; a white-flowered state, growing with the
normal purple form, has been collected on Mt. Buffalo, Vic. (Nov.
1965), and Mt. Gingera, A.C.T. (Nov. 1962). F. Mueller had labelled
a collection from the summit of Mt. Wellington, Vic., “ Hovea gelida ”,
but apparently he never published this name.

GALACTIA MEGALOPHYLLA (F. Muell.) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

Lamprolobium megalophyllum F. Muell. Fragm. Phyt. Aust. 9: 67
(1875).

F. Mueller (Lc.) described his Lamprolobium megalophyllum in the
absence of pods, and cited “ Galactia megalophylla F. M. coll.” in
synonymy immediately under the name, thereby indicating some
uncertainty as to the correct generic placement of the species
concerned. The chief difference between Lamprolobium Benth.
(assigned to tribe Galegeae) and Galactia R. Br. (tribe Phaseoleae)
appears to be in the non-strophiolate seeds of the latter, chiefly
American genus, whereas the endemic Lamprolobium is defined as
having seeds with a fleshy strophiole.

The writer was recently enabled to examine excellent fruiting
material of L. megalophyllum from near Darwin, agreeing well with
the type collection (Schultz n. 527) from the same area. The former
collection had broad-linear, delicately pubescent, fawn-coloured pods
40 x 4-5 mm., sharply mucronate at apex, with thickened sutures
and 4-6 transverse seeds. There was no vestige of a strophiole on
the black flattened seeds (±2x1-5 mm.) and, despite the erect
shrubby habit of this plant (± 1-5 m. high), it ought surely be
referred to Galactia, not to Lamprolobium. Species of Galactia are
commonly scandent, with 3 leaflets, but in Brazil the sub-section
Collaearia Benth. of section Collaea DC. contains several unifoliolate
species, e.g., G. benthamiana Micheli which bears a striking resem-
blance to the Darwin population. The binary Galactia megalophylla
does not seem to have been published, except in synonymy by
Mueher and thereby illegitimate; so the transfer is now formally
made in order to validate this name.

Known collections of G. megalophylla are:

Port Darwin, North Aust. — Schultz n. 527 (TYPE, in MEL) ;
Shoal Bay Road near Darwin, N. Terr., “ in open eucalypt
forest”, flowers pink — H. S. McKee n. 8392, 11 Feb. 1961
(CANB, MEL) ; Batchelor, N. Terr. — G. Chippendale n. 7742,
Mar. 1961 (NT, CANB).

Rutaceae

BORONIA ANEMONIFOLIA A. Gunn, in Field Geogr. Mem. N.S.W.
330 (1825).

var. VARIABILIS (Hook.) Benth. Flor. aust. I: 321 (1863).

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 129

In Viet. Nat. 73: 194 (Mar. 1957) the writer recorded this taxon
for Victoria, on the basis of an old (1870) collection in Melbourne
Herbarium from Portarlington, and noted a report of its occurrence
in the vicinity of Waratah Bay and Wilson’s Promontory. This
regional extension has now been confirmed by Mr. C. N. Rossiter of
Hedley, who visited the north coast of Snake Island, Corner Inlet,
on 14 June 1965. There, in light bracken along the N.W. edge of
“ The Gulf ”, he found a dozen bushes (to 4 feet high) of Boronia
anemonifolia var. variabilis and donated specimens to Melbourne
Herbarium. A few days later (21/6/1965), in Won Wron Forest
toward Woodside on the mainland coast, he collected a curious
trailing form of B. anemonifolia with very small hairy leaves and
bright pink flowers. More recently an excellent collection of the
variety has come to light in Melbourne Herbarium, made on nearby
Sunday Island by Miss Coryl I. Skewes in Sept. 1952; duplicates of
this are available for distribution. Also at Melbourne is a broad-lobed
variant of the species from Twofold Bay, N.S.W. (leg. W. L. Morton) ;
this seems best referred to the maritime variety variabilis , described
originally from the northern coasts of Tasmania.

Rhamnacese

SPYRIDIUM SPATHULATUM (F. Muell.) F. Muell. ex Benth. Flor.
aust. 1: 430 (1863).

Until quite recently, the only record of Spyridium spathulatum for
Victoria was a collection (Herb. MEL) made by St. Eloy D’Alton in
“Shire of Lowan — from desert country” during 1889. This could
have been from fringes of either the Big or Little Desert and, as no
other Victorian occurrence had been noted throughout the past 75
years, the species was presumed to have become extinct in this State.
Then, in August 1965, Mr. A. Grove-Jones (Manager of Glenalpine
Pastoral Company) rediscovered S. spathulatum near the South
Australian border about 14 miles north of Serviceton, along
McCracken’s Road in Toonambool Parish of the Big Desert. There
were only about 20 individual plants, forming spindly bushes to
3 feet (1 m.) high, and it is much to be hoped that such an
exceedingly rare colony will be safeguarded from any possibility of
destruction or disturbance.

In the Victorian Naturalist 73: 166 (Feb. 1957) N. A. Wakefield
described a new species, S. nitidum, assigning to it D’Alton’s old
Victorian specimens from the Shire of Lowan. His holotype (Herb.
MEL) was a Kangaroo Island collection by F. G. Waterhouse, labelled
“ Sandy Scrub ”, which was also the type of S. spathulatum var.
microphyllum Benth. (l.c.) . Following are the chief points of
difference between typical S. spathulatum (identical syntypes from
“ stony ranges near Mt. Lofty, and Kangaroo Island ”) and its
variety microphyllum Benth. (also Kangaroo Id):

S. spathulatum var. spathulatum — Leaves broadly oblanceolate to ±
spathulate, 10-20 x 4-7 mm., almost glabrous above (but micros-
copically asperulate), with an indumentum of appressed, silky,

130 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

shining hairs beneath; flower-clusters pedunculate, 5-10 mm. wide,
permanently invested with dark, broad, resinous bracts that conceal
the flowers.

S. spathulatum var. microphyllum— Leaves much smaller, 5-10 x 1-5-2 -5
mm., whitish and silky-hairy on both surfaces; flower-clusters virtually
sessile, only 2-4 mm. wide, devoid of large dark bracts, and with
minute flowers freely exposed.

There may be some justification for raising this latter taxon to
specific rank (as S. nitidum) . The Victorian population, however, is
by no means identical; certainly its foliage is sericeous on both
surfaces, as in S. nitidum, but the leaves are almost intermediate in
size between those of S. nitidum and typical S. spathulatum, while
the pedunculate inflorescences bear dark, broad, resinous bracts
exactly comparable with those of S. spathulatum in the Mt. Lofty
Range. It therefore seems preferable to treat the isolated Victorian
occurence as a more hairy form of S. spathulatum (in the wider
sense) than to ally it with the quite distinctive, smaller-leaved and
-flowered taxon of Kangaroo Island (perhaps also on the Marble
Range, Eyre Peninsula) .

In Central Australia (Palm Valley and Finke River Gorge) is
another very closely related plant, at present referred to S.
spathulatum. Its leaves are finely velutinate above and strongly
sericeous-hirsute beneath, the large bracteate flower-clusters being
white-villous. Collections in Mebourne Herbarium are by E. Giles
(1872) and H. Kempe (1880.).

SPYRIDIUM TRIDENTATUM ( Steud . in Lehm .) Benth. Flor. aust.

1: 427 (1893).

This species ranges widely in Western Australia between the
Murchison and Salt Rivers, on the Darling Range and far into the
Victoria Desert (at a point about 30 miles S.S.E. of Warburton Range
Mission). The leaf, 4-7 mm. long, is hairy on both faces and
variably trifid at the apex; when flattened out, it bears some
resemblance to the claw-like sail of a New Guinea “ lakatoi ”.
Examples from the Eremaean province have much more hairy (white-
silky) and more strongly conduplicate leaves than those occurring
nearer Perth. The species was considered endemic in the West until
July 1951 when the late Mrs. E. Ramsay found it in the Hattah Lakes
National Park, far N.W. Victoria, growing among mallee sand-hills
against the old Calder Highway between mile posts 317 and 318,
i.e., slightly N.W. of Lake Hattah. Her material of this apparently
rare semishrub is now in Melbourne Herbarium, and no subsequent
collection seems to have been made.

On 8 Nov. 1960, S. tridentatum was also located for the first time
in South Australia, by Dr. R. L. Specht who found it near the centre
of Eyre Peninsula, ± 10 miles north of Lock (on a Flora and Fauna
Reserve in the Hundred of Hambidge) . His voucher specimens
(n 2405) are at State Herbaria AD and MEL, and the record was
published by Hj. Eichler in Suppl. to J. M. Black’s Flor. S. Aust. 217
(1965).

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 131

Malvaceae

SIDA AMMOPHILA F. Muell. ex J. H. Willis spec. nov.

S. trichopodam F. Muell. et S. fibuliferam Lindl. proxime appropin-
quans. A priore differt: foliis densius stellato-pilosis venas laterales
conspicuiores subter exhibentibus, pedunculis brevioribus (5-15 mm.)
calycis-lobis omnino acutis, et praecipue fructus nuculis glabris multo
minus curvatis atque in faciebus planis duabus multo profundius
faveolatis. A S. fibulifera recedit: foliis multo angustioribus

(attenuate-oblongis vel linearibus), stipulis setaceis brevioribus
(2-3 mm.), calycis-lobis acutis, pedunculis unifloris (raro bifloris)
et fructus nuculis glabris quarum faciei planae duae favellam
cristatam etiam dentatam exhibet.

HOLOTYPE: “ In arena mobili riparum fluvii Murray inter Morundam
& versuram orientalem ”, South Aust. — F. Mueller, 1 Feb.
1851 (MEL).

Also examined (all in MEL) :

S.A.: Murray River — F. Mueller; Nilpena H. S. (10 miles

W. of Warrina Ry. Stn.) — R. Helms, Elder Exped.,
3 May 1891; North of Lake Eyre — Hon. Newham,
June 1887.

VIC.: Sand-banks along S.W. side of Lake Hattah (Nat.

Park) , far N.W. Mallee — J. H. Willis & A. C.
Beauglehole, 15 Oct. 1960; ibidem — N. H. E.
McDonald, 10 Jan. 1966 (an excellent collection —
also in NSW) .

N.S.W.: Darling River — J. Dallachy & T. H. Goodwin,

Nov. 1858; Lower Darling River near Wentworth
— Mrs. Helena Forde, 1865; “ Nangavera to

Yellowinchee ” (i.e. immediately north of Mt.

Koonenberry) , far N.W. region — H. Beckler, Viet.
Explor. Exped., 29 Dec. 1860; “ Duroodoo ” (i.e.
Torowoto Swamp ± 44 miles E.S.E. of Mil-
parinka) , far N.W. region — H. Beckler, Viet.
Explor. Exped., 27 Dec. 1860.

Q’LAND: Bulloo River, S.W. Region — R. S. Moore, 1878.

CENT. AUST.: Great Stony Desert — J. M. Bechervaise, 25
Aug. 1947; Tempe Downs — R. F. Thornton, 1891.

Low but upright semishrub 15-45 cm. tall. Leaves narrowly oblong
to linear, 1-4 cm. x 2-6 mm., on petioles 3-6 mm. long, rather densely
stellate-hairy on both surfaces which are sage-grey, the lateral veins
conspicuous beneath, the almost parallel margins broken into blunt
forward-pointing teeth; stipules subulate, caducous, 2-3 mm. long,
stellate-hairy. Peduncles 5-15 mm. long, stellate-hairy throughout,
rarely ,2-flowered. Calyx 3-4 mm. long, the lobe$ ovate to broadly
lanceolate, acute, about as long as tube, densely stellate. Petals
yellow, broad and rounded, only slightly longer than calyx, villous
on margins of short claws; gynandrophore 1 -5-2 mm. long. Fruitlets

132 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

± 3 mm. long, glabrous or almost so, reticulately rugose to sub-
tuberculate on the back which is ± semicircular and deeply grooved
at apex; the 2 flat faces honey-combed, with walls of reticulum ±
cristate or broken into separate teeth.

Sida ammophila belongs to a group of narrow-leaved, closely related
species that were merged under S. corrugata Lindl. by Bentham in his
Flor. aust. 1: 192-93 (1863). In Melbourne Herbarium, some

specimens of it had also been filed under S. trichopoda, S. virgata
and even S. petrophila to which it bears little resemblance. F. Mueller
had written “ S. ammophila ” on the labels accompanying several
early collections, but apparently never legitimized this name by any
published description. As his suggested binomial (meaning “ sand-
lover ”) is apt, it has now been taken up — typified by the first known
collection, from east of the Murray River near Moorundie, S.A.

The new species has strong affinities with both S. trichopoda
(type from Kanyaka, southern Flinders Range, S.A.) and S. fibulifera
(type from central Lachlan River region, N.S.W.) . From the former
it differs in having more densely stellate-hairy leaves with lateral
veins conspicuous on the under side, shorter peduncles (5-15 mm.),
quite acute calyx-lobes, and especially in the glabrous, coarsely rugose
fruitlets which are much less curved on the back and much more
deeply honeycombed on the two flat inner faces. From S. fibulifera
it departs in the consistently narrower leaves (attenuate-oblong to
linear) , shorter setaceous stipules (2-3 mm.) , acute calyx-lobes,
usually single-flowered peduncles and glabrous fruitlets in which the
deep lateral reticulations (or favellae) are cristate or even broken
into separate teeth. S. fibulifera , with characteristic long-persistent
pin-like stipules, has fruitlets very similar to those of S. ammophila
in size, shape and sculpture; but they are minutely pubescent with
mostly simple hairs, and the favellae of the flattened faces are neither
crested nor otherwise broken.

The ten localities, represented so far by specimens in Melbourne
Herbarium, show that S. ammophila ranges widely through arid
inland Australia, occurring in at least four States and southern parts
of the Northern Territory. It is doubtless much more widespread
than these few collections would indicate, and is often co-extensive
with one or other of its congeners.

Myrtaceae

EUCALYPTUS BLAKELYI Maiden Crit. Rev. Eucal. 4: 43 (1917).

Described originally from the Pilliga Scrub near Coonabarabran,
Eucalyptus blakelyi occurs extensively, often in association with E.
meiliodora , on the Western Slopes and Plains regions of New South
Wales. Occurrences are also frequent in the A.C.T. and on the
Monaro Tableland where it reaches a southern limit near the junction
of the Snowy and Delegete Rivers, only 10-12 miles from the Victorian
border. In his Key to the Eucalypts 131 (1934) W. F. Blakely does

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 133

not list a Victorian locality for E. blakelyi; but he does cite Beech-
worth under “Forest Red Gum” (p. 130), as did A. J. Ewart in
Flor. Viet. 821 (1931). There is now no doubt that the old

Beechworth district record applies to E. blakelyi, and not to E.
tereticornis which is restricted in Victoria to the near-coastal plains
of East Gippsland, between the lower Thomson River and Orbost.
The more readily observable differences between these very closely
related taxa are dimensional, thus:

E. tereticornis — Adult leaves usually 7-12 times as long as broad;
operculum 2-3 times as long as calyx-tube; fruit usually 7-9 mm.
wide.

E. blakelyi — Adult leaves usually 5-7 times as long as broad; operculum
usually only up to one and a half times as long as calyx-tube; fruit
usually 5-7 mm. wide.

Apparently A. B. Costin, in Study of the Ecosystems of the
Monaro Region of N.S.W. 320 (1954), was the first to note the
definite extension of E. blakelyi into Victoria, by his remark
“ The E. melliodora — E. blakelyi alliance occurs on a smaller
scale on the south coast of New South Wales, and in
Victoria ”. He refers to R. G. Downes (C.S.I.R.O. Bulletin 243, p. 41.
1949), who had mentioned E. melliodora and E. tereticornis as the
principal tree species of savannah woodland between Koonda and
Upotipotpon (north of Violet Town) . Actually, E. blakelyi is very
widespread in north-eastern Victoria, over a lineal distance of at
least 120 miles — between Violet Town and the Warby Range, thence
on both sides of the Hume Highway to Chiltern and Wodonga
districts, along the Murray Valley (and ancillary valleys from the
south) to as far upstream as the Walwa district. Specimens in
Melbourne Herbarium are from on and around the Warby Range,
Killawarra, Eldorado-Springhurst Forest, Beechworth district,
Yackandandah, 10 miles west of Burrowye and the vicinity of Walwa,
with an iso ] ated collection from the Snowy River Gorge near
Butcher’s Ridge — doubtless a result of seed washed by flood from
Monaro country only a few miles across the N.S.W. border.

Mr. L. A. S. Johnson, of Sydney Herbarium, has reported to the
writer (in lit. 18/2/1965) that around the Chiltern-Wodonga region
E. blakelyi “ appears to be largely hybridised with E. camaldulensis,
so that specimens from this area do not usually show typical ‘ blakelyi ’
fruit- or bud-shapes ”. Miss P. Carolan (Geology Department,
University of Melbourne) has noted an isolated western occurrence
of E. blakelyi on granitic hills in the Inglewood district.

EUCALYPTUS OXYPOMA Blakely Key Eucal. 244 (1934).

The only localities quoted with the original diagnosis were: near
the 37-mile post on Deniliquin-Barham road, Griffith, and Nyngan,
the new taxon being allied with E. microtheca. No mention was
made of a possible hybrid origin. Buds were described as “ tip-cat-
shaped ”, 5-6 x 3 mm., the operculum acutely conical and a long as
(or sometimes longer than) the calyx-tube; while the slenderly
pedicellate fruits were thin, campanulate, 5x4 mm., with broadly
deltoid subexserted valves.

134 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

In October 1952 Mr. A. J. Gray, then in charge of Wimmera Forest
Nursery at Wail, Vic., submitted to the writer specimens from a tree
that was suspected to be a natural hybrid between E. camaldulensis
and E. largiflorens; it was growing on the Western Highway against
the Wimmera River bridge between Dimboola and Lochiel. A sample
sent to L. D. Pryor, then of the Parks and Gardens Section, Canberra,
evoked the opinion (in lit. 28/11/1952) that the material represented
E. oxypoma — apparently a “ southern extreme form of E. coolabah ”
(now generally fused with E. microtheca) . Quite recently in Leaflet
n. 92 of the Forestry and Timber Bureau, entitled “ Taxonomy and
Nomenclature of Eucalypts ”, p. 18 (1965), R. D. Johnston and
Rosemary Marryatt list E. oxypoma as a probable hybrid involving
E. camaldulensis and E. largiflorens.

In the Riverlander for July 1961 (pp. 6-7 & 27) G. B. Eggleton
discussed in detail the occurrence of a possible hybrid between the
same two species that he had found in Kulkyne National Forest
during 1954—“ on floodgum country that lies between Lake Hattah
and Mournpool ”, Seven mature trees were noted, and seedling
progeny was later raised from the largest of them. Finally, in May
1962, V. L. Lowe of Mystic Park forwarded to Melbourne Herbarium
specimens of two unusual trees located near the centre of Kerang
Marshes, about 10 miles N.W. of Kerang, Vic. His material was
identical with Gray’s Wimmera River samples, and doubtless also
referable to E. oxypoma.

Thus, this presumptive hybrid occurs in three widely separated
localities of north-western Victoria, sensibly on the points of an
equilateral triangle and each ± 120 miles apart from the other. Only
very few individual trees have been found at each place, and then
always in association with co-dominant E. camaldulensis (River Red
Gum) and E. largiflorens (Black Box). Reports are apparently
lacking for any occurrence along the Murray River in South Australia,
where both parent species are also present. Natural interbreeding
between a eucalypt of the anthereal section Macrantherce and one m
the Porantheroidece must surely be a very rare and highly interesting
occurrence.

EUCALYPTUS TENUIRAMIS Miq. in Ned. kruidk. Arch. 4: 128 (1856).

E. tasmanica Blakely Key Eucal. 214 (1934);

E. risdonii Hook. f. var. elata Benth. Flor. aust. 3: 203 (1866).

Both Bentham (l.c. p. 202) and Maiden in his Crit . Rev. Eucal
l- 151 (1905) treated Eucalyptus tenuiramis as a synonym of E.
a'mygdalina Labill. Blakely (l.c. p. 212) resurrected the name, 78
years after publication of Miquel’s original diagnosis and, apparently
without consulting the latter, applied it to a non-glaucous assemblage
extending from the extreme south of Tasmania (Recherche Bay) to
the eastern islands of Bass Strait; occurrences on Flinders and Deal
Islands doubtless influenced his choice of the vernacular “ Island
Peppermint”. In Winifred M. Curtis’s Student’s Flora of Tasmania

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 135

pt. 1: 221 (1956), E. tenuiramis is again relegated to E. amygdalina,
but as a hybrid E. amygdalina X risdonii with the comment “ A
broad-leaved non-glaucous segregate has been named E. tenuiramis
Miq.”. Johnston & Marryatt’s “ Taxonomy and Nomenclature of
Eucalypts ” in Leaflet 92 of the Forestry and Timber Bureau, p. 22
(1965) gives E. tenuiramis as a “ probable hybrid E. amygdalina X E.
risdonii ”.

Miquel (l.c.) had made his description from fragments lacking
fruit; but he did write “ Folia - - - - nunc glauco-pruinosa ” and

“ calycis tubo striolato pruinoso which hardly accords with

Curtis’s concept of a “ non-glaucous segregate ”, nor do these
characters fit Blakely’s insular tree with obscurely veined glossy
leaves and shining buds. The present writer can see no reason why
the broad-leaved peppermint so frequent on Flinders Island should not
be included under E. simmondsii Maiden (listed only for western parts
of Tasmania) — if indeed the latter is really separable from E.
amygdalina at the specific level. Miquel’s words, as far as they go,
certainly suggest something akin to E. tasmanica Blakely (l.c.) which
was based on Bentham’s variety elata of E. risdonii from Lake St.
Clair. Representative samples of the glaucous tree, currently accepted
as E. tasmanica, from southern Tasmania were therefore sent to the
Herbarium at the State University of Utrecht (Netherlands) for
careful comparison with type E. tenuiramis — labelled “ Van Diemens-
land. Stuart n. 11 & 16 ” and doubtless from the vicinity of Southport.
Dr. E. A. Mennega subsequently replied (9/7/1965):

“ As far as I can judge, the material you sent us resembles very
well the (quite fragmentary) type-material of Miquel. - - - - As for
- - - the appearance of the stem and buds, I can’t see any difference
between your material and that of E. tenuiramis

He also kindly forwarded photographs of the type, including enlarge-
ments of leaf-venation and mature buds. Subsequently, two sheets
of what is almost certainly duplicate type material of E. tenuiramis
were located in Melbourne Herbarium, viz. C. Stuart’s Nos. 11 & 16
which came through the great herbarium of Sonder; flowers are
present on each specimen which is much more adequate than the
actual type at Utrecht.

The writer entertains no doubt whatever that the taxon described
by Blakely as E. tasmanica is identical with Miquel’s E. tenuiramis,
and that the former name should be placed in synonymy. It is
possible that this variably glaucous population first arose through
hybridism between E. amygdalina and E. risdonii; but, if now accepted
as a distinct species, then the name E. tenuiramis must take
precedence.

136 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

LEPTOSPERMUM GLAUCESCENS S. Schauer in Linnaea 15: 421
(1841).

L. sericeum sensu W. M. Curtis Student's Flor. Tasm. 1: 198 (1956),
non Labiil. Nov. Holl Plant. Specim. 2: 9, t.147 (1806);

L. flavescens sensu L. Rodway Tasm. Flor. 53 (1903), non Sm. in Trans.
Linn. Soc. 3: 262 (1797);

L. myrtifolium sensu L. Rodway l.c. 53 (1903) atque Benth. pro parte
Flor. aust. 3: 108 (1866), non strict. Sieber ex DC. Prodr. 3: 228
(1828);

Eriostemon ? trinerve Hook. J. Bot. ( Lond .) 1: 254 (1834), non L.
trinerve DC. Prodr. 3: 227 (1828).

NEOTYPE (cum floribus) : Western foot of Strzelecki Peaks, S.W.

Flinders Island, Bass Strait, Tasmania, virgate shrubs to
3 m. (10 feet) high, dominating damp sandy heathland —
J. H. Willis, 10 Apr. 1954 (MEL). ISO - and PARA-

NEOTYPES at MEL, NSW, HO, K.

It is unfortunate that one of the three commonest species of
tea-tree in Tasmania should have been misidentified and erroneously
named for the past 110 years. In the latest taxonomic treatment,
by Dr. Winifred Curtis (l.c., 1956), this plant is referred to Leptos-
permum sericeum Labiil. Labillardiere ascribed his species to “ capite
Van-Diemen ”, and the printed description (l.c.) does agree tolerably
well with features of a widespread, often coastal Tasmanian shrub;
but the plate (t. 147) by Poiteau portrays an entity having much
larger flowers on distinct pedicels.

The fact is well attested that, in the two volumes of his Novce-
Hollandice Plantarum Specimen, Labillardiere sometimes made the
mistake of writing “ capite Van-Diemen ” instead of “ terra Van-
Leuwin ” and vice versa. A notable example concerns Eucalyptus
ovata (t. 153) which was attributed to “terra Van-Leuwin ”; and,
although in 1821 this error was corrected to “Terre de Diemen” by
Labillardiere himself on a sheet at the Paris Herbarium, the name
remained a stumbling block for the next century, and its application
was unknown even to G. Bentham. As long ago as 1844, doubt was
expressed by J. C. Schauer, in Plantce Preissiance I: 121, that the
locality quoted with the original description of Leptospermum
sericeum was accurate. Following is a literal translation of Schauer’s
Latin:

“ I contend [that it was] collected by Labillardiere more certainly
in Van Leuwin’s Land, and not in Van Diemen’s island.”

In Melbourne Herbarium is a probable part of the type collection
of L. sericeum (ex Herb. Mus. Brit.) ; it is unfortunately barren, but
the foliage accords with Labillardi£re’s illustration. Also in perfect
agreement is a specimen in early fruit that the present writer collected
on 10 Nov. 1950 at Sandy Hook Island, Recherche Archipelago
(W.A.) — the likely type region. In October 1962 he received
excellent flowering material of the same handsome, pink-flowered
plant from granite rocks at nearby Cape le Grand (leg. C. A. Gardner,

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 137

2/9/1962) and submitted a portion of this to Florence Herbarium
for critical comparison with Labillardiere’s actual type in “ Herb.
Webbianum Again, the identity was confirmed.

There is no doubt whatever that L. sericeum is a coastal endemic
of Western Australia, restricted to granite cliffs and islands, chiefly
in the vicinity of Esperance Bay, and that the much taller Tasmanian
plant, so-called, is quite a different species — contrary to the writer’s
misleading remark in Muelleria 1: 98 (1959). Bentham, Flor. aust.
3: 117 (1866), without having seen flowers of either, confused and
synonymized L. sericeum Labill. with Kunzea sericea Turcz. — a
divaricate, long-staminate shrub having rather similar foliage, but
not occurring within 80 miles of the sea (e.g. among granite slabs
of the Wongan Hills) . This misconception was finally rectified and
L. sericeum restored as a distinct W.A. species by C. A. Gardner
in J. roy. Soc. W. Aust. 47: 61 (1964). It is of interest to note that
Labillardiere did also collect specimens of the Tasmanian species
mistakenly referred by Curtis to L. sericeum. Three of his examples
from “ Herb. Webbianum ” are at Melbourne and were labelled
“ Leptospermum stellatum ”, but L. stellatum Cav. is now treated as
synonymous with L. attenuatum Sm. — a small paper-barked tree that
ranges up the mainland coast from far E. Victoria to S.E. Queensland.

L. Rodway’s descriptions (I.c., 1903) under Leptospermum
flavescens Sm. and L. myrtifolium Sieb. both apply to the same
misconstrued Tasmanian tea-tree and not to those two species, which
are confined to the Australian mainland. His L, flavescens var.
nitidum, however, is L. nitidum Hook.f. as now recognized. Bentham
(i.c., 1866) had included the endemic Tasmanian plant in a rather
wide circumscription of L. myrtifolium — strictly a small spindly
shrub of swampy tracts in mountainous terrain of eastern Victoria
and New South Wales.

The first published account of material actually from Tasmania
would seem to have been W. J. Hooker’s diagnosis of Eriostemon
trinerve (I.c., 1834), type of which was located in the covers of
L. myrtifolium at Kew Herbarium by Dr. R. Melville in Oct. 1962.
Two mounted sprays (about 5 ins. long) are vegetative only and
were collected by R. W. Lawrence (n. 91) in 1831, but no locality
data are provided. Hooker was uncertain of the genus, although shape
and texture of leaves and their prominent oil-glands reminded him
of Eriostemon obcordatum A. Cunn. ex Hook. [= E. verrucosus A.
Rich.]. A new combination, “ L. trinerve ”, based upon this type, is
precluded by the existence of the earlier homonym L. trinerve DC.
(I.c., 1828) which refers to a Port Jackson species — probably L.
lanigerum.

In 1841 S. Schauer (I.c.) gave a detailed description in German
of a new Leptospermum (4 feet high) growing at Breslau Botanic
Garden; the plant had been donated by Berlin Botanic Garden where
it was raised from seed obtained somewhere in Van Diemens Land.

138 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

He called it L. glaucescens, from the blue-green colour of the leaves
which were conspicuously gland-dotted, broadish and quite glabrous
at maturity. There is a note under J. D. Hooker’s original description
of L. nitidum in Flora Tasmaniae 1: 140 (1856):

“This is possibly Schauer’s L. glaucescens (see L. myrtifolium ) ,
but the leaves are not at all glaucous, and the calyx-lobes are not
persistent.”

He then synonymizes L. glaucescens Schauer — with a query — under
L. myrtifolium, quoting collections by Fraser, Lawrence and Gunn.
In Flor. aust . 3: 107 (1866) Bentham cites L. glaucescens as a
synonym of his L. lanigerum var. e — “ Flowers smaller - - - - the
commonest form in Tasmania, Victoria and South Australia It
seems obvious that neither Hooker nor Bentham had seen authen-
ticated specimens of Schauer’s L. glaucescens.

Extensive inquiries recently addressed to the principal herbaria at
Berlin, Munich, Geneva and London, have failed to discover any type
specimens of L. glaucescens. As Schauer based his description upon
a living plant under cultivation, it is possible that no herbarium sheet
was ever prepared at the time. The writer believes L. glaucescens
to be the legitimate name for this endemic Tasmanian tea-tree that
has had such a chequered nomenclatural history; it could not very
well apply to any other Leptospermum in the island State, and
Schauer’s description does not conflict at any point with the
characteristics as set out by W. M. Curtis (l.c.) under “ L. sericeum ”.
The apparent non-existence of a type specimen calls for typification
of the binomial, L. glaucescens, by means of an adequate Tasmanian
collection, and this has now been done (see above) .

MELALEUCA NEGLECTA Ewart & B. Rees in Proc. roy. Soc. Viet,
new ser. 23: 60, t. 13, fig. 1, 2, 4 (1910).

M. oraria J. M. Black in Trans, roy. Soc. S. Aust. 69: 309 (1945).

The original description of Melaleuca oraria (l.c.) was published
35 years after that of M. neglecta, and the former entity assumed to
be endemic along the southern coasts of South Australia — between
Port Lincoln and Rivoli Bay, with an inland occurrence at Yallum
near Penola (far S.E.) . No type was designated as such, and,
although comparisons were drawn with M. brevifolia Turcz. (of
West. Aust.) , no mention was made of any relationship to M.
neglecta of western Victoria. The present writer finds that the
type collection of M. neglecta (Dimboola district, leg. St. Eloy
D’Alton, Dec. 1909) is a perfect match for representative material
of Black’s M. oraria from Meningie and Robe, S. Aust., and is
therefore convinced that the name M. oraria should be reduced to
synonymy under M. neglecta.

A completely false impression emerges from the descriptions of
M. oraria and M. neglecta in J. M. Black’s Flora of South Australia
ed. 2: 611-12, fig. 814-15 (1952). For instance, the distinguishing
key character for M. neglecta on page 607 runs: “Leaves 8-10 mm.

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 139

long, slightly glandular ”, whereas its type (in MEL) consists of
prominently glandular-tuberculate leaves only 4-6 mm. long —
precisely as in M. oraria. The figures (814 and 815) on page 611
show a crenulate petal for M. oraria ( not “ denticulate ” as in the
text on p. 612, line 1), but a regularly ciliolate petal for M. neglecta.
In actual fact, the petals in both vary from almost entire to sparsely
and irregularly serrate (or erose) — never ciliolate — and they are
about 1*5 mm. long and broad. The population in Torrens Gorge
(Black’s only locality for M. neglecta in South Australia) is atypical
in having longer (5-12 mm.) leaves “ rarely dotted with glands ”,
and larger petals (2 mm.) ; it may not even be referable to M. neglecta.
It is possible that, when the closely related W. A. species M. brevifolia
Turcz. is better known, separation of M. neglecta at the specific
level may prove to be unwarranted; for the present, retention of the
latter name for eastern populations seems desirable.

BAECKEA UTILIS F. Muell ex Miq. in Ned. kruidk. Arch. 4: 150
(1856).

var. LATIFOLIA ( Benth .) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

B. gunniana Schauer var. latifolia Benth. Flor. oust. 3: 79 (1866).

Baeckea gunniana , of montane to alpine habitats in south-eastern
Australia (including Tasmania) , has been generally regarded as a
rather polymorphic species, the populations of which vary in growth-
habit, leaf-shape, size of flowers and number of stamens. It is,
however, possible to divide collections into two circumscribed
categories having the following characteristics:

1. Leaves often concave above, convex beneath but without obvious keel,

2-4 mm. long; flowers on pedicels shorter than calyx; petals less
than twice as long as calyx-lobes; stamens usually 5, sometimes up
to 7.

2. Leaves always ± flat above, with distinct keel or rib on the under

side, 4-10 mm. long; flowers on pedicels as long as or longer than
calyx; petals twice the length of calyx-lobes or longer; stamens
7-10, often 8.

The first category is undoubtedly conspecific with B. gunniana
Schauer as described originally in W. G. Walpers’ Repertorium
Botanices Systematicae 2: 921 (1843), from type material collected
on Mt. Wellington, Tas., by R. C. Gunn (n. 306, 7 Jan. 1841). A
duplicate of the type number is in Melbourne Herbarium. Plants
from Tasmanian mountain tops are commonly prostrate and differ
further from mainland examples in having the leaves flattened (not
distinctly concave) on their upper-surfaces.

The second category agrees in all essential details with the type
of B. utilis F. Muell. ex Miq. (l.c.), a duplicate of which is also in
Melbourne — from Buffalo Range, Vic. (leg. F. Mueller, Feb.-Mar. 1853).
The leaf-length of 4 lines (i.e. 2-5-3 mm.) given in the original
diagnosis may be applicable to B. gunniana, but hardly to B. utilis
where it is 2-4 lines. Present records would indicate an absence of
this taxon from Tasmania. In Fragmenta Phytographiae Australiae
4: 66 (Feb. 1864) Mueller reduced his own species to synonymy

140 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

under B. gunniana. Bentham (i.c.) did likewise, and this concept
has been maintained by all Australian botanists during the past
century. The writer is indebted to Dr. Nancy T. Burbidge, Division
of Plant Industry, C.S.I.R.O. at Canberra, for pointing out the
differences between these two distinct populations of Baeckea in the
A.C.T. and for suggesting the probability that one of them may be
referable to Mueller’s long-submerged B. utilis. He now agrees that
separation at the specific level is desirable.

Smaller-leaved and -flowered B. gunniana appears to occur only
around or within sphagnum bogs at the higher altitudes (e.g. Mts.
Baw Baw, Wellington, Buller and Buffalo, Bogong High Plains and
the Cobboras) , whereas B. utilis extends from the moss-beds into
subalpine woodlands or mountain forest, and has been found at much
lower altitudes along Maramingo Creek in far East Gippsland (less
than 400 feet above sea-level) . The two species overlap on the Baw
Baws and the Buffalo Plateau. In the Lake Mountain-Baw Baw
region is an endemic variant of B. utilis, having much larger obovate
to elliptic leaves 2-6 mm. wide (cf. 1—1 5 mm. in the typical form).
This was published by Bentham (I.c.) as B. gunniana var. latifolia ;
so the varietal epithet now needs to be associated with its correct
specific name — a transfer effected above.

Epacridacese

In the course of revisionary studies on Malesian representatives of
E pacridacece, H. Sleumer has remodelled the existing classification
of Australian genera in the tribe Stypheliece. His scheme, following
closely that proposed by F. Mueller in Fragm. Phyt. Aust. 6: 50-57
(1867), is set out convincingly in Blumea 12: 146-169 (1963), and
the relevant portions are also adopted in his monograph for Flora
Malesiana 6: 422-444 (1964). The Victorian genera M onotoca,

Brachyloma, Acrotriche, Pentachondra, Trochocarpa and Choristemon
retain their status; Leucopogon, Cyathodes and Lissanthe are reduced
to three subgenera of Styphelia, while Melichrus and Astroloma are
merged with Styphelia (sens, strict.) in the subgenus Styphelia. This
view has much to commend it, and makes for a more satisfactory
delimitation of genera. Its acceptance would involve relatively few
changes in nomenclature, since most species in the large subgenus
Leucopogon have previously had binomials under Styphelia (sens,
lat.) . As far as Victoria is concerned, the following seven new
combinations are required:

STYPHELIA CLELANDII (E. Cheel) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

Leucopogon clelandii E. Cheel in Trans, roy. Soc. S. Aust. 39: 98 (1915).

S. GELIDA (F. Muell. ex Benth.) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

Leucopogon lanceolatus (Sm.) R. Br. var. gelidus F. Muell. ex Benth.
Flor. aust. 4: 186 (1868);

L. gelidus (F. Muell. ex Benth.) N. A. Wakefield in Viet. Nat. 73: 59
(1956).

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 141

S. MUCRONATA ( Hook.f .) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

Pentachondra mucronata Hook. f. in Hook. Lond. J. Bot. 6: 270 (1847);
Leucopogon fraseri quoad Benth. Flor. aust. 4: 218 (1868) atque auctt.
var., non A. Cunn. in Ann. nat. Hist. 2: 47 (1838) — N.Z. endem.

S. NEUROPHYLLA (F. Muell.) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

Leucopogon neurophyllus F. Muell. Fragm. Phyt. Aust. 1: 37 (1858).

S. PILIBUNDA (A. Cunn ex DC) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

Leucopogon pilibundus A. Cunn. ex DC. Prodr. 7: 746 (1839).

S. PILIFERA (N. A. Wakefield) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

Leucopogon piliferus N. A. Wakefield in Viet. Nat. 73: 58 (1956).

S. RIPARIA (N. A. Wakefield) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

Leucopogon riparius N. A. Wakefield in Viet. Nat. 73: 59 (1956).

MONOTOCA ROTUNDIFOLIA J. H. Willis spec. nov.

unica ob folia rotunda (marginibus ± recurvis) atque petala intus
manifeste papillosa.

Fruticulus prostratus ramis tenuibus sparsim pubescentibus. Foliorum lamina
± rotunda (3-5 mm. longa), tamen ob margines saepe arete recurvos (paene
revolutos) ephippiformem esse videtur, petiolo manifesto purpurascenti (1-1*5 mm.
longo) praedita, supra minute scabrida, infra albida atque a venulis 15-25
flabellate-divaricatis prominenter lineata, distanter ciliolata, ad apicem obtusa aut
mucrone perbrevi indurato. Flores 5-partib, in axillis superis solitarii, pedicellis
robustis pubescentibus praediti; calyx pallide viridis, ± 1 mm. longus, eius lobi
arete imbricati perlate ovati obtusi albido-ciliati, ad basin a bracteis duabus
similibus (sed brevioribus — 0*7 mm.) subtendentes; corolla pallide ochracea, ±
2 mm. longa, eius tubus sepala non excedens, lobis 5 valvatis ovato-lanceolatis
vel fusiformibus, ± 1*5 mm. longis, extus glabris, intus breviter sed prominenter
papillosis, primum incurvatis deinde pigre expandentibus, marginibus anguste
incurvis atque apicibus obtusis induratisque. Antherce ochraceae subsessiles,
corollae tubi apicem versus affixae, late ellipsoideae, comparate magnae (0-7-1
mm. longae), per totum fertiles. Stylus glaber brevis crassusque, profunde
5-angulatus, ± 0-6 mm. longus (summitate stigmatica conica ± 0-1 mm. alta);
ovarium uniloculare, oblate-globoideum, ± 0-4 mm. altum, disci squamulis 5
(quaque 0*3 mm. longa) viridibus ovatis amplexum. Fructus ignotus.

HOLOTYPE: Brumby Point, N.E. portion of Nunniong Plateau, East
Gippsland, Victoria, in montane mallee heath overlooking
Reedy River gorge, at dz 1,250 m. (4,100 feet) alt. — K. C.
Rogers , 10 Mar. 1964 (MEL). ISOTYPES at MEL, NSW,
AD, CANB, K.

PARATYPES: Ibidem— K. C. Rogers , 30 Jan. 1964 (MEL).

Small prostrate or ascending semi-shrub with slender sparsely
pubescent branches. Leaf-blades 3-5 mm. long and broad, rotund
but often appearing saddle-shaped through the tightly recurved

142 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

(almost revolute) margins, furnished with distinct purplish petioles
1-1-5 mm. long, minutely scabrid above, white beneath where
conspicuously lined by 15-25 flabellately spreading veins, shortly
ciliate toward apex which is blunt or with very short indurated mucro.
Flowers pentamerous, solitary in upper axils, on stout pubescent
pedicels =± 0-5 mm. long; calyx pale green, ± 1 mm. long, the closely
imbricate lobes very broadly ovate, blunt and white-ciliate, subtended
at base by a pair of similar but shorter bracts (0-7 mm.); corolla
creamy yellow, ± 2 mm. long, its tube not exceeding calyx; the 5
corolla-lobes valvate, ovate-lanceolate to fusiform, ± 1*5 mm. long,
glabrous externally, shortly but prominently papillose on inner
surfaces, at first inarched and tardily spreading at anthesis, margins
narrowly incurved, apex blunt and indurated. Anthers yellow, almost
sessile toward apex of corolla-tube, broadly ellipsoid and compara-
tively very large (0-7-11 mm. long), fertile throughout; style
glabrous, short and thick, sharply 5-angled, it 0-6 mm. long (with
conical stigmatic end zh 0-1 mm. high); ovary 1-locular, depressed
globoid, ± 0*4 mm. high, embraced by 5 green ovate scales of the
disk (each 0*3 mm. long); fruit unknown.

The new species appears to have no close congeners, being unique
in its orbicular flabellately veined leaves and conspicuously papillose
inner surfaces of the petals. Its range is extremely localized, and no
occurrence is yet known beyond the type area on the Nunniong
Plateau. Until the disastrous fire in February 1965, it was locally
abundant and even a dominant ground-cover, sprawling over several
acres of open mountain heath that alternate curiously with strips
of mallee eucalypts ( Eucalyptus kybeanensis, E. glaucescens & E.
pauciflora forma) along a barren slaty ridge between the Reedy and
Little Reedy Rivers (western tributaries of the upper Buchan River) ;
associated shrubs were Banksia canei sp. nov., Oxylobium alpestre
and Bossioea foliosa. The discoverer of Monotoca rotundifolia, Mr.
Keith C. Rogers of Wulgulmerang, revisited the locality in October
and reported (in lit. 16/12/1965):

“ I noticed a few plants of the new Monotoca where the fire had
evidently burnt at night. Banksia seedlings are in abundance
everywhere.”

Apocynaceae

PARSONSIA BROWNII (J. Britten ) Pichon in Notul. syst., Paris
14: 10 (1950).

Lyonsia brownii J. Britten in J. Bot., Lond. 45: 236 (1907);

L. straminea sensu F. Muell. Plant, indig. Colon. Viet. (Lithogr.) t.58
(1864-65). Benth. Flor. aust. 4: 321 (1868) pro parte, Ewart Flor.
Viet. 953 (1931) atque auett. var., non stricte R. Br. Prodr. Flor.
Nov. Holl. 466 (1810).

The genus Lyonsia R. Br. is now generally merged with Parsonsia
R. Br., described simultaneously (1809) but with several species.
R. Brown had considered his Lyonsia to be monotypic, and in the
Prodromus (p. 466) he cites two localities — Port Jackson region and
Tasmania — for the single species L. straminea. However, in his mss.

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 143

notes at the British Museum, Brown definitely applied the name
Lyonsia straminea to specimens from the Newcastle district (“ ad
ripas fluv. Hunters Patersons et Williams Rivers, Nov. 1804”),
whereas his collection from the Tamar estuary (Tas., Jan. 1804)
bears only the label “ Lyonsia cfr. stramineam Obviously there
was some doubt concerning the identity of the latter. A crucial
character mentioned in Brown’s diagnosis ( Prodromus , p. 466) is
“ Squamae hypogynae connatae ”, which certainly accords with many
specimens collected in rain forests of eastern New South Wales and
Queensland, but every Tasmanian (and Victorian) specimen
examined by the writer has the hypogynal scales entirely free. There
are indeed two distinct specific elements — a southern and a northerly
— involved in Brown’s circumscription of Lyonsia, and it is clear that
his binomial should be attached to the northern element having,
inter alia, the hypogynal scales fused into a corona. Another striking
floral difference is that corolla-lobes of the latter have their inner
surfaces densely covered with retrorse hairs, while those in the
Tasmanian-Victorian plant are bearded only at the throat and the
fruits are very much shorter (5-8 cm.) .

Unfortunately, F. Mueller mistook the southern element for
typical L. straminea, and in his Essay Plant. Exped. Burdekin 16
(1860) he re-described the true northern L. straminea under another
name, L. reticulata. His excellent illustration of “ L. straminea ”
(l.c.) portrays the essential features of the distinct southern taxon,
for which misapplication of this name was perpetuated by Bentham
(Lc. 1868), Rodway ( Tasm . Flor., p. 129, 1903), Ewart (l.c. 1931)
and most other authors. J. Britten (l.c. 1907) put the matter right,
after due discussion, by giving a new name to southern populations,
and Mueller’s analytical plate (t. 58 of 1864-65) becomes a very
satisfactory iconotype. The differences between these related species
of Parsonsia are set out by key in Beadle, Evans and Carolin’s Handb.
vase. Plant. Sydney District 349 (1962); but one vital character was
omitted, viz:

Hypogynal scales ± fused in a corona surrounding the glabrous
ovary

— P. straminea

Hypogynal scales quite free around the finely pubescent ovary

— P. brownii

Parsonsia brownii ranges through the cooler forest gullies of
Tasmania, Victoria and eastern New South Wales (at least as far
north as the Macleay River) , with an isolated record for Mt. Perry
north of Gayndah, Queensland; while true P. straminea (R. Br.) F.
Muell. extends from the Shoalhaven River (N.S.W.) into North
Queensland — usually in rain forests. There is thus a wide overlap
of the two species in and north of the Illawarra district, N.S.W.

144 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

Labiatae

MENTHA DIEMENICA Spreng. Syst. Veg. 2: 724 (1825)

var. SERPYLLIFOLIA ( Benth .) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

Mentha serpyllifolia Benth. in DC. Prodr. 12: 174 (1848);

M. gracilis R. Br. var. serpyllifolia (Benth.) Ewart Flor. Viet. 989 (1931).

The long-applied name for Slender Mint, Mentha gracilis R. Br.
Prodr . Flor. Nov. Holl 505 (1810), is a later homonym of the validly
published M. gracilis Sole Menthae Britannicae 37, 1. 16 (1798) and
therefore illegitimate. M. diemenica Spreng. is the correct binomial
for the Australian plant, having only recently been adopted in Beadle,
Evans and Carolin’s Handb. vase. Plant. Sydney District 418 (1962)
and also in Hj. Eichler’s Suppl. J. M. Black’s Flor. S. Aust. 268 (1965).
Eichler lists M. serpyllifolia Benth. as a synonym, but this variant is
smaller in all its parts (rarely exceeding 15 cm. in height, the almost
sessile ovate leaves less than 10 mm. long and flowers up to 6 per
axil — often only 1) and is worthy of some recognition. A new
combination is required upon transfer of the varietal epithet to the
name M. diemenica.

The variety serpyllifolia is scattered on damp near-coastal heaths
in Victoria (Foster and Wilson’s Prom., Cape Nelson, but also with
inland occurrences near Mt. Disappointment and on the King River) ,
extending to South Australia (Guichen Bay and Torrens River) and
Tasmania where apparently much more frequent.

PROSTANTHERA CRUCIFLORA J. H. Willis spec. nov.

ob corollam parvam albam subrotatam cruciformemque unica.

Frutex densa, erecta, glabra, 1-5-2 m. alta. Folia sordide griseovirens, ovata,
integra, obtusa, ± 15 x 10 mm., minute papillosa. Flores in axillis superioribus,
± 8 per racemum brevissimum. Calycis labia 2 subaequalia, paene rotunda, ± 3
mm. longa. Corolla albida, tubo 4-5 mm. longo, limbo 8-10 mm. lato et subito
horizontaliter expanso; lobis 5 subaequalibus (3-5 x 2-4 mm.) perobtusis, tribus
inferioribus cruciforrmter divergentibus. Stamina ad apicem tubi affixa. Antherae
roseae, 1-1-3 mm. longae, loculi appendicibus perminutis praediti.

HOLOTYPE: Mt. Kaputar, N.E. New South Wales, on coarse

sandstone at base of mount (zb 900 m. alt.) — G. W. Althofer ,
Oct. 1962 (MEL).

Also examined: specimen cultivated at W Tree near Buchan, E.;

Victoria, by Leo Ffodge , 5 Dec. 1962 (MEL): specimen
grown by cuttings from type plant, at Dripstone, N.S.W. —
G. W. Althofer, 18th Nov. 1964 (MEL).

A rather dense, grey-green, virtually glabrous, erect shrub 1-5-2
m. (5-6 feet) high, but sometimes less than 1 m.; branchlets papillose,
and with minute hairs restricted to 2 pairs of ridges that are
decurrent from the margins of each petiole. Leaves only slightly
odorous, dull greyish-green from a fine papillose indumentum (as in

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 145

Atriplex spp.) ; blades ± coriaceous, ovate, entire, obtuse, it 15 mm.
long, 8-10 mm. wide; petioles slender, tending to reflex, =t 4 mm.
long. Flowers about 8 together in very short condensed racemes,
ebracteolate on short pedicels in the upper axils. Calyx bilabiate,
db 8 mm. long, pale green, minutely papillose; the tube regularly
infundibuliform; the subrotund lips 3 mm. long, subequal, very obtuse,
sometimes emarginate, indistinctly veined. Corolla never hooded,
almost glabrous, creamy-white except for a few minute rosy spots
toward the base of mid-lobe on lower lip; the tube 4-5 mm. long
and 1-5 mm. wide, suddenly expanding into a horizontal, viburnum-
like limb (8-10 mm. wide); lobes 5, divergent, almost equal, 3-5 x
2-4mm., oblong-elliptic and very obtuse, the 3 of the lower lip very
widely and cruciformly spreading. Functional stamens 4 or 2,
conspicuously exserted and widely diverging; filaments slender, 3-4
mm. long, attached at apex of corolla-tube; anthers deep rose, 1-1*3
mm. long, ± reniform, each loculus tipped with a very minute, white,
non-penicillate appendage. Mature style it 7 mm. long, very shortly
furcate. Fruits not seen.

The new species is apparently very localized, being known only
from the type area in north-eastern New South Wales, among
sandstone rocks at an altitude of nearly 3,000 feet. It also occupies
quite an isolated position in the genus by reason of the small white
corolla with widely expanded, almost equally lobed limb — reminiscent
of a Viburnum flower or that of Westringia rigida. The virtually
odorless Atriplex- like leaves are unusual too in a species of
Prostanthera. The epithet cruciflora, in allusion to the cross-shaped
lower lip of its corolla, was suggested by the discoverer, Mr. George
W. Althofer of Dripstone, N.S.W. — for many years a most enthusiastic
and successful grower of these native mint-bushes.

WESTRINGIA GLABRA R. Br. Prodr. Flor. Nov. Holl 501 (1810)
var. BACCHI (B. Boivin ) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

W. violacea F. Muell. var. bacchi B. Boivin in Proc. roy. Soc. Qd 60: 110
(1949).

WESTRINGIA GLABRA R. Br.

var. WILLIAMSONII ( Willis & Boivin ) J. H. Willis stat. &
comb. nov.

W. williamsonii Willis & Boivin in Proc. roy Soc. Qd 60: 110 (1949).

Until the genus Westringia was revised by Bernard Boivin (l.c.) in
1949, W. glabra R. Br. had been regarded as rather a variable species
with a scattered distribution from the Grampians in western Victoria to
Shoalwater Bay in North Queensland — the type locality. In addition
to W. glabra (sens, strict.) of New South Wales and Queensland,
Boivin resurrected the name W. violacea F. Muell. for plants in
Central Victoria and, in collaboration with the writer, described an
isolated population at Mt. Zero, northern Grampians, as the new
species W. williamsonii. It is now considered that neither of these
Victorian taxa warrants distinction at the specific level.

146 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

The type area cited by Boivin for W. violacea (i.e. “ near the
mouth of the Goulburn River ”) is erroneous; Mueller’s original label
of March 1853 is simply “near the Goulburn River” which would
be in the vicinity of the present Eildon Reservoir. The type itself
is very fragmentary; but identical, almost contemporaneous and much
better material in Melbourne Herbarium was labelled by Mueller “ In
the Dandenong Ranges”. During the past 112 years no Westringia
would seem to have been collected again, either on the Dandenongs
or neighbourhood of the Goulburn River, and it is probable that the
habitats visited by Mueller in 1853 have both been destroyed. A
third locality cited by Boivin is the Lerderderg River Gorge — he
consistently spells it “ Lerderberg ”. Except for very short floral
bracteoles in W. violacea, there is no constant morphological feature
to distinguish it from W. glabra (in which the bracteoles are almost
as long as the calyx-tube) , and Bentham was surely justified in
relegating the name W. violacea to synonymy in Flor. aust. 5: 131
(1870) . Also to be found along the Lerderderg River above Bacchus
Marsh is a variant having smaller narrower leaves that are arranged
in whorls of four. This was published by Boivin (I.c.) as “ W.
violacea var. bacchi var. n.” Since it is rather well-marked, this
variety has been retained as such, but the infraspecific epithet is now
transferred to the name W. glabra as a new combination.

As to W. williamsonii at Mt. Zero, the foliage departs from that
of typical W. glabra in being larger and consistently quaternate,
while the narrower hairy calyx-tube is always manifestly longer than
the lobes and is subtended by 2 very short bracteoles. A comparable
population was found on the Happy Valley arm of Lake Tyers (S.E.
of Nowa Nowa, Vic.) by Miss Ruth Clark in Sept. 1952. At W Tree
Creek falls (between Buchan and Gelantipy) and in the nearby
Snowy River Gorge is a tall riparian Westringia to 10 feet high,
having leaves in fours and relatively short bracteoles as in W.
williamsonii, but with calyx-lobes equalling the glabrous tube —
exactly as in typical W. glabra. It seems preferable to recognize
these large-leaved, quaternate plants as a variant of W. glabra, rather
than assign them to a separate species. Thus, the rank has been
lowered but the epithet williamsonii retained at varietal level under
W. glabra. Incidentally, the number of leaves per whorl in Westringia
can be over-rated as a character of diagnostic importance: W.

senifolia F. Muell., for instance, has usually 6 leaves per whorl on
most parts of the Buffalo Plateau, yet at Mackey’s Lookout (3,600 feet
alt.) is a local community with leaves in whorls of five.

Scrophulariaceae

EUPHRASIA GLACIALIS Wettst. Monogr. Gatt. Euphrasia 259, t. 13
(1896).

var. EGLANDULOSA J. H. Willis var. nov.

a forma typica differt sic: indumento non-glandulifero, interdum

omnino sparso (tunc planta glabra esse videtur) sed saepe conspicuo
albo-lanato caules, foliorum margines, calycis lobos atque antheras
investienti; foliis usitate 9-dentatis.

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 147

HOLOTYPE: Summit of Mt. Nelse (“ Nelson ”) , Bogong High Plains,

N.E. alps, Victoria, on stony terrain in open grassland at ±

I, 900 m. (=--6,200 feet) alt., flowers congested, white—

J. H. Willis, 12 Jan. 1946 (MEL). ISOTYPES at MEL,
NSW, K.

Also examined (all in MEL) : N.W. slopes of Mt. Nelse near head of
Big River, Bogong High Plains, N.E. alps, Vic., on grassland
at ± 1,850 m. (=- 6,000 feet) alt., form with purplish flowers
and copious wool on edges of floral leaves and calyx-lobes
J H. Willis, 12 Jan. 1946 & 15 Jan. 1947; Pretty Valley,
Bogong High Plains, N.E. Vic., on grassy slopes bordering
sphagnum bog at ± 5,500 feet — J. H. Willis, 15 Jan. 1946;
The Razor Back between Mts. Feathertop & Hotham —
A. J. Tadgell, Dec. 1914; Summit of The Twins, Vic.— C.
Walter, Jan. 1899; Mt. Buffalo National Park, N.E. Vic.,
southern foot of The Bluff at ± 5,200 feet alt., form with
elongated inflorescences — J. H. Willis, 18 Feb. 1963; Bimberi
Range ± 1 mile north of Snowy Flats, A.C.T., “ on sandstone
scree with Podocarpus alpinus, alt. ca. 5,300 feet ” — P .
Darbyshire n. 73, 20 Dec. 1960 (also in CANB) . [The writer
has seen an undoubted example of the var. eglandulosa,
collected on the Kosciusko Plateau, N.S.W., in Jan. 1966
by Mrs. Thistle Y. Stead and now in her private herbarium.]

The new variety differs from the typical form of the species (on
Kosciusko Plateau) in the complete absence of glandular hairs.
Density of its indumentum, however, varies greatly and hairs can
be very sparse as in the type from Mt. Nelse (so that plants appear
to be virtually glabrous) or copious and white-woolly, investing the
upper parts of stems, edges of leaves and calyx-lobes and even the
anthers. Flowers vary in colour from white to purple and may be
either congested at the apex of the stem or in a relatively loose
raceme, but gradations seem to connect the various forms and their
features lack correlation. It is certain that the inadequately
described E. crassiuscula Gandoger (1919) is identical.

Typical, glandular E. glacialis occurs in Victoria on the Cobboras
Mountains, at between 5,500 and 6,000 feet, but is not known from
any farther west. The variety eglandulosa is abundant on the higher
Victorian alps (Mts. Bogong, Nelse, Feathertop, Hotham &c.) , with
an outlying, more elongated form on the Buffalo Plateau.

EUPHRASIA GIBBSIAE du Rietz in Svensk bot. Tidskr. 42, Heft 4:
104 (1948).

forma SUBGLABRIFOLIA du Rietz (l.c.)
forma COMBERI du Rietz (l.c.).

In his key to the species of Euphrasia known from Tasmania,
Professor G. E. du Rietz (l.c. p. 361) established four series in this
genus: two (Hookerice and Scabrce ) for the annual and two

(Striatce and Collince) for the perennial kinds. Among the perennials

3198/66.— 2

148 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

he described three new species, E. gibbsiae (series Striatce ) showing
distinctly subdigitate leaves, but the Tasmanian endemics E. gunnii
and E. milliganii (series Collince ) having leaves that are not distinctly
subdigitate. The type form of E. gibbsiae , with subcapitate clusters
of white flowers, was from rocks on the summit plateau of Mt. Field
East, near Lake Fenton. A collection from Mt. Mueller (5,000 feet)
on the Victorian Baw Baws, by J. G. Luehmann and C. French Jnr.
in Dec. 1892, was published simultaneously as E. gibbsiae forma
subglabrifolia — the only known extension of the species to mainland
Australia. In Melbourne Herbarium is a duplicate type specimen of
this form which differs from the normal Tasmanian population in
having the leaves almost glabrous , the floral bracts and calyces
bearing predominantly eglandular hairs. What may be only a very
reduced form of E. gibbsiae , with congested leaves on branches no
more than 2 cm. high, has been collected at the Cobboras, far eastern
Victoria. E. gibbsiae seems to differ from E. striata R. Br. (type
from Mt. Wellington, Tas.) only in being glandular, while R. Brown’s
E. alpina (the name antedated by E. alpina Lam., 1788) is probably
no more than a glabrescent alpine form of E. gibbsiae.

An interesting Victorian collection of this group in Melbourne
Herbarium comes from the summit of Mt. Speculation, Barry
Mountains at 5,600 feet (leg. J. H. Willis, 2 Jan. 1945). It has a
markedly glandular indumentum; obovate-flabellate leaves to 10 mm.
long are boldly cut into 5-7 finger-like lobes in the apical half, and
the large purplish flowers are attractively veined. This conforms
fairly well to the circumscription of du Rietz’s E. gibbsiae forma
comberi and is comparable with material from K. Col. on the track
to Mt. Field West (Mt. Field National Park) , Tasmania.

EUPHRASIA SCABRA R. Br. Prodr. Flor. Nov. Holl. 437 (1810)

var. ALSA (F. Muell.) J. H. Willis comb. & stat. nov.

E. alsa F. Muell. in Trans, phil. Soc. Viet. 1: 107 (1855);

E. antarctica sens. Benth. Flor. aust. 4: 522 (1868), non Benth. in DC.

Prodr. 10: 555 (1846).

G. Bentham’s identification (l.c.) of the Australian alpine
Euphrasia alsa F. Muell. with his own E. antarctica (published 22
years previously) can hardly be justified, despite the adoption of this
view in F. Mueller’s Key Syst. Viet. Plant. 1: 392 (1888) and A. J.
Ewart’s Flor. Viet. 1024 (1931). Type material of the former name
differs from typical Magellanian E. antarctica in the following
respects:

Indumentum glandular.

Leaf-lobes pinnate (not trident-shaped).

Calyx segments not revolute.

Ovary pubescent (not glabrous).

On the other hand, E. alsa is very closely related to annual
E. scabra , from the typical form of which it diverges in its diminutive
size and congested whitish flowers with conspicuous veins. It is here

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 149

treated as an extreme variant of E. scabra. The taxon is confined to
the higher alps of New South Wales and Victoria, collections at
Melbourne Herbarium being:

Munyang Mountains, 5-6,000 feet, N.S.W. — F. Mueller, Jan.
1855 (ISOTYPES) ; ibidem, “ on wet gravelly places irrigated
by the melting snow ” — F. Mueller, Jan. 1855; Mt. Kosciusko,
N.S.W. — F. Mueller, Jan. 1855; Pretty Valley between Mt.
Jim & Rocky Knobs, Bogong High Plains, Vic., in sphagnum
bogs at d= 5,500 feet — J. H. Willis, 15 Jan. 1946; Mt. Fainter,
Vic., a dwarf annual from 5,500 to 5,900 feet — A. J. Tadgell,
Feb. 1926.

EUPHRASIA SCABRA R. Br. var. CAUDATA J. H. Willis var. nov.

a forma typica speciei recedit: indumento fortius glandulifero, foliis
superioribus atque bracteis floriferis lobum longum caudiformem
(usque ad 10 mm.) gerentibus, floribus usitate purpureis terminaliter
congestis.

HOLOTYPE : Snowy Flats (near Mt. Gingera) , Cotter River District.

A.C.T., “ on edges of swampy flat, partly under low eucalyot
forest, alt. c. 5,200 feet” — R. D. Hoogland n. 8481, 28 Feb.
1962 (MEL). ISOTYPES at MEL, CANB.

Also examined (all in MEL) : Mt. Wellington, Vic. — F. Mueller, Mar.

1861; Dargo High Plains, Vic. — A. W. Howitt, 1883 (in its
shorter-pointed leaves and striped pale flowers approaching
the var. alsa ) ; Buckety Plain, Bogong High Plains at ±

5.000 feet, Vic. — J. H. Willis, 18 Jan. 1947 (yellow-flowered
form) ; between Mack’s Creek and head of Buckwong River
near sources of Murray River, N.E. Vic. — J. H. Willis, 8 Feb.
1946 (white-flowered form) ; Cobboras Mountains at ± 5,800
feet, near western end of geodetic border, far N.E. Vic. —
J. H. Willis, 10 Feb. 1946; Native Dog Creek, on flats at

4.000 feet near Cobboras Mtns., Vic. — J. Stirling, 20 Jan.
1883; ibidem — F. Mueller, Jan. 1854; Pilot tin mine huts at
head of Ingeegoodbee River =b 4^ miles N.E. of Mt. Pilot,
far S.E. New South Wales, in sphagnum bog at ± 1,270 m.
(=4,100 feet) alt. — J. H. Willis, 3 Feb. 1946; Munyang
Mountains, 5-6,000 feet, N.S.W. — F. Mueller, Jan. 1874;
Ginini Flats (± 5,200 feet) ± 1 mile N.E. of Mt. Ginini,
A.C.T., in alpine peat bog — R. Schodde n. 1290, 8 Feb. 1961
(also in CANB) .

The outstanding feature of this new alpine and subalpine variety
is in the upper leaves and floral bracts which have a long, caudiform
and rather acute apical lobe extending (to 10 mm.) far beyond the
uppermost pair of lateral lobes. The flowers are mostly clustered
toward the apex of each inflorescence — seldom dispersed along the
axis as they frequently are in typical E. scabra — and their colour is
usually mauve to purple, although forms with white or even yellow

150 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

corollas occasionally appear in the Victorian alps. There is consider-
able variability in the occurrence of glandular hairs, but these are
generally conspicuous and more strongly developed on the foliage
than in typical E. scabra. The development of white woolly hair on
the edges of the mucronate anther-loculi is also quite variable.

Attaining sometimes a height of 30 cm. (12 ins.), the variety
caudata seems to pass gradually into var. alsa of more stunted growth
in exposed situations, and both are co-extensive on parts of the
Kosciusko Plateau and Bogong High Plains; but the latter typically
has short blunt terminal lobes to its leaves and paler flowers
conspicuously veined in purple. The former is a widespread and
often frequent plant in and around sphagnum bogs of the Australian
Alps between Mt. Wellington (Vic.) and the A.C.T.

The only notable monographs on Australian representatives of
Euphrasia have been by G. Bentham (1868), R. von Wettstein (1896)
and G. E. du Rietz (1931 & 1948). The first two authorities worked
only upon dried material, without any knowledge of the living plants,
but du Rietz spent some time in Australia between 1926 and 1927.
Satisfactory delimitation of taxa within this genus is by no means
easy, being complicated by intraspecific polymorphy and extensive
hybridism. Attention is drawn to this situation in H. H. Allan’s
Flora of New Zealand 1: 860 (1961). Until population and genetical
studies are carried out extensively in Australia, there is need for
conservatism in the recognition of distinct species. Thus the writer
currently prefers to express in terms of varietal rank the more
obvious morphological differences between highland populations in
the series Scabrae and Collinae.

Rignoniaceae

PANDOREA JASMINOIDES ( Lindl .) K. Schumann in Engler & Prantl
Naturl. PflFam. IV 3b: 230 (1894).

Late in March 1964 Mr. W. Cane submitted to the Melbourne
Herbarium a flowering sample of Par'idorea jasminoides, grown in his
nursery at Maffra, Victoria. The plant had been obtained several
years before as a seedling from Gladstone Creek, a tributary of
Freestone Creek near Culloden and about 17 miles N.N.E. of Maffra.
The rather remote situation would point to a natural occurrence
rather than an escape from cultivation of this subtropical species,
its nearest approach seeming to be in far N.E. New South Wales
(some 700 miles distant) . Widespread P. pandorana is also present
in the Avon River watershed. Great interest therefore attaches to a
spontaneous record of P. jasminoides in eastern Victoria. Unfortuna-
tely the whole area at Gladstone Creek was burnt out in a severe
bushfire during Feb.-March 1957, but a recent inspection has revealed
limited regeneration of this trumpet-flower.

j. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 151

Lentibulariaceae

UTRICULARIA VIOLACEA R. Br. Prodr. Flor. Nov. Holl. 431 (1810) .

Until quite recently, the diminutive but elegant bladder-wort
Utricularia violacea was unknown from any locality east of King
George’s Sound, West. Aust. Then, in October 1963, the writer
identified as such a collection made by Messrs. D. N. Kraehenbuehl
and A. C. Beauglehole (A.C.B. n. 5721) on the 4th of that month
at Yallum, about 9 miles west of Penola, far S.E. South Australia —
“on moist peaty sand between clumps of Melaleuca oraria [ = M.
neglecta] ”. This identification was subsequently confirmed by Mrs.
Rica Erickson of Bolgart, W.A. (a specialist in the group) , and the
record was published by Dr. Hj. Eichler in his Supplement to J. M.
Black’s Flora of South Australia 284 (1965). Early in November
1964 Beauglehole succeeded in locating U. violacea at five places
along the Dergholm-Penola road in far western Victoria — first records
for this State. His numbers 6,516, 6,504 and 6,517 are now
represented in Melbourne Herbarium, being respectively from against
the South Australian border, from 3 miles east, and 6 miles east of it.
All were collected on 9 Nov. 1964, in shallow temporary swamps
where associated on wet sand with minute species of Stylidium and
other ephemerals.

The solitary flowers terminate filiform scapes about 3-5 cm. long,
are most attractive and violet-like: each vividly purple corolla is

4-7 mm. long and wide, its very broad, 3-lobed and veined lower lip
with yellow throat and a prominent yellowish spur 3-5 mm. long.

Goodeniacese

GOODENIA LINEATA J. H. Willis spec. nov.

Herba perennis rosulata. Folia numerosa, paene giabra, anguste
oblanceolata vel subspathulata, sat crassa, 3-8 ( — 15) cm. longa, ad
partem latiorem 3-9 mm. lata, integra vel obscure et remote denticulata,
marginibus paulum revolutis. Caules floriferi graciles, erecti, 10-30 ( — 50)
cm. longi, bracteis tribus (vel pluribus) parvis erectis praediti. Flores
± 4 (raro ad 6), erecti, cymam laxam paniculatam glandulosam
formantes; pedicelli nudi, 1-4 cm. longi. Calyx breviter sed dense
glanduloso-hirsutus, tubo obconico (2-4 mm. longo) et lobo 5 erecto
lanceolato (4-7 mm. longo). Corolla ± 20 mm. longa, aureo-flava, ad
dimidium inferiorem lineis verticalibus conspicuis atro-purpureis ornata,
eius lobis 5-7 mm. latis (petali medium viride, herbaceum, glanduloso-
pilosum ut in calyce). Antherae ellipticae 2-2-5 mm. longae. Stylus
validus 8-10 mm. longus, a pilis longis albis varie obtectus; indusium
cyathiforme, ± 3 mm. latum, aliquid cinereum, in margine a ciliis albis
(±0-5 mm. longis) dense fimbriatum. Fructus immaturus obconicus 3-5
mm. longus, dissepimento sublunato 2-3 mm. longo. Ovula circiter 12-18,
in quoque loculo ut series duae instructa, pallida, plana, anguste
limbata, rotunda, 0-3-0 -5 mm. lata. Semina ignota.

HOLOTYPE: Grampians, W. Victoria, at summit of Mt. William

(1,180 m. or 3,800 feet alt.) where locally frequent among
sandstone rocks — J. H. Willis , 3 Jan. 1964 (MEL). ISOTYPES
at MEL, NSW, K.

152 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

PARATYPES: Grampians, between Mt. Thackeray and Chimney Pot
Gap in Victoria Range, Vic. — P. E. Finch & A. C. Beauglehole ,
24 Feb. 1957 (A.C.B. n. 4,059, MEL & NSW); Grampians,
east of Chimney Pot Gap in Victoria Range — P. E. Finck &
A. C. Beauglehole, 15 Apr. 1957 (A.C.B. n. 4,097, MEL).

Also examined: Grampians, Kalimna Falls at eastern foot of Mt.

William — Miss D. Dawson, 29 Oct. 1961 (MEL); Old
Mafeking goldfield 5^ miles S.S.W. of Mt. William — Ellis
M. Tucker, 18 Dec. 1965 (MEL).

Perennial herb with radical foliage. Leaves numerous, virtually
glabrous, narrowly oblanceolate to almost spathulate, rather thick,
3-8 ( — 15) cm. long, 3-9 mm. broad at the widest upper part, entire
to obscurely and distantly denticulate, the margins slightly revolute.
Flowering stems erect, slender, 10-30 (— 50) cm. long, with 3 or more
small, erect, remote bracts; inflorescence a loose, terminal, glandular,
paniculate cyme of about 4 (rarely 6) erect flowers on naked pedicels
1-4 cm. long. Calyx often dark, shortly but densely glandular-hairy,
the obconic tube 2-4 mm. long and 5 erect lanceolate lobes 4-7 mm.
long. Corolla =b 2 cm. long, golden yellow, but with prominent
vertical stripes (and smaller netted veins) of deep purple in lower
half, the lobes 5-7 mm. wide; green herbaceous centre of petals
glandular-hairy as in calyx. Anthers elliptic, 2-2-5 mm. long. Style
stout, 8-10 mm. long, with scattered to moderately dense, long
spreading, white hairs; indusium cup-shaped, ± 3 mm. wide, greyish,
densely fringed along margin with white cilia it 0-5 mm. long, but
dorsally with more scattered, longer hairs. Immature fruit obconic,
3-5 mm. long, the lunate dissepiment 2-3 mm. long. Ovules ± 12-18,
arranged in 2 rows in each loculus, pale, flat, narrowly bordered,
zb rotund, 0-3-0 -5 mm. wide. Ripe seeds not yet examined.

The new species is of uncertain affinity; but, except for its several-
flowered peduncles, is apparently close to the series Pedicellosae
(including G. pinnatifida, G. glauca and G. havilandii ) . It would
seem to be endemic in the Victorian Grampians, where of scattered
and discontinuous occurrence. The colonies on Mt. William, however,
are conspicuous, and it is rather surprising that earlier botanists
(Mueller, Wilhelmi, Sullivan, Williamson &c.) failed to collect
Goodenia lineata on this eminence. The specific epithet is in allusion
to the boldly striped lower half of the corolla.

GOODENIA AFFINIS de Vriese in Natuurk, Verh. holland. Maatsch.

Wet. 2s., 10: 137 (1854).

Described originally from Western Australia, Goodenia affinis was
reduced in Bentham’s Flora australiensis 4: 63 (1868) to varietal
status as G. geniculata R. Br. var. eriophylla Benth., with the
comment: “ To this belong the W. Australian and some of the S.

Australian specimens ”. Its rank was restored by K. Krause who
monographed Goodeniacece in Pflanzenreich IV 211 (Heft 54) : 54

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 153

(1912), five West Australian localities being cited — from Swan River
to Cape Riche — but none from elsewhere. J. M. Black, Flor. S. Aust.
554 (1929), retained this taxon at specific level and accorded it a
wide distribution in South Australia (Eyre and Yorke Peninsulas,
Murray lands and northward to the Flinders Range), remarking:
“ The leaves of the West Australian specimens are usually broader,
more obtuse, and more regularly crenate than ours

Black correctly emphasized the distinctive indumentum of G.
affinis — both surfaces of the leaves being more or less silky-woolly
with long, white, appressing simple hairs that mask a close mat of
smaller stellate hairs beneath. In this character, which Krause (I.c.)
failed to mention, G. affinis differs manifestly from the related taxa
G. geniculata and G. primulacea , leaves of which are much less hairy
(usually appearing green on the upper surfaces) and without any
stellate vestiture. A largely co-extensive range in South Australia is
given to all three species by Black. It is questionable whether G.
primulacea Schlechtendal should be maintained as a species distinct
from G. geniculata, and Bentham (I.c.) had reduced it to a variety
of the latter; the principal difference lies in the w hite-tomentose under
surfaces of its leaves — in typical G. geniculata these are uniformly
pubescent and greenish on both faces.

Throughout sand-hill country of the Victorian Mallee, from the
Little Desert to extreme north-western parts of Millewa County, is a
silvery-leaved rosulate Goodenia that has been consistently identified
either with G. geniculata or its variety primulacea. Leaves of this
frequent Mallee plant do often exhibit a greenish upper surface that
is less hairy than the underside; but they are also felted with
abundant stellate hairs. Desert material from N.W. Victoria was
forwarded to Dr. H. Werner in Halle, East Germany, for careful
comparison with Schlechtendal’s type of G. primulacea (“ in sandigem
Boden bei Bethanien ”, S. Aust.); he pronounced (11/5/1955) the
former as quite distinct in its patently hairier foliage with a basic
stellate indumentum. For the present, it is considered that this
population would be much better referred to a form of G. affinis than
to G. geniculata or G. primulacea — J. Ros Garnet’s reference in The
Vegetation of Wyperfeld National Park 83 (1965) would seem to be
the first published record of G. affinis for Victoria. Revisional studies
in the series Rosulatae Krause (of Goodenia ) , involving re-assessment
of the importance of diagnostic criteria in current use and realignment
of some taxa, are certainly a desideratum.

Stylidiaceae

STYLIDIUM BEAUGLEHOLEI J. H. Willis spec. nov.

ob staturam, habitum. calycem et verticillum foliorum radicalium S.
brachyphyllum Sond. [ = S. inundatum R. Br.] accedit, sed sic differt:
corolla plus minus flabellata (ut in S. rhipidio Erickson & Willis), eius
segmentis non lateraliter geminatis intus pallide roseis quoque extrinsecus
a linea lata saturate rosea notato: petalis 2 posterioribus quam paribus
anterioribus paene duplo longioribus ( cf . par posterius brevius in S.
brachyphyllo ); gibbulis 6 minutis (aut appendiculis inchoatis) in fauce
faciliter distinguendis.

154 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

HOLOTYPE: Southern Victoria Range, Grampians, W. Victoria, wide-
spread on moist heath ± 4 miles north from Victoria Point —
A. C. Beauglehole no. 6506, 21 Nov. 1964 (MEL). ISOTYPE
at NSW.

PARATYPES: Ibidem — A. C. Beauglehole n. 6507, 21 Nov. 1964,

(MEL, AD, K).

Also examined (all collected by A. C. Beauglehole and all in MEL) :
Far W. & S.W. Vic.: Penola road ±11^ miles W. of Dergholm —
A. C. B. n. 6500, 5 Nov. 1964; \ mile N. of Penola road
at South Aust. border & ± 13 miles W. of Dergholm. —
A. C. B. n. 6501, 9 Nov. 1964; Penola road 6 miles W. of
Dergholm— A. C. B. n. 6503, 9 Nov. 1964; 4 miles S.
of Crawford River near Hotspur — A. C. B. n. 6505, 20 Nov.
1964; 1^ miles N. E. of “ Ink Pot ”, Lower Glenelg R. area —
A. C. B. n. 6508, 29 Nov. 1964; 3 miles N. of “ Ink Pot ”
Lower Glenelg R. area — A. C. B. n. 6509, 29 Nov. 1964; 1
mile W. of Greenwald, Lower Glenelg R. area — A. C. B. n.
6518, 7 Dec. 1964; 2 miles N. of Dergholm-Penola road &
6 miles E. of South Aust. border — A. C. B. n. 6515, 9 Nov.
1964. Noted by A. C. B. at Port Campbell. Nat. Park, and
on Pomonal road near Hall’s Gap — both Nov. 1966.

Far S.E. South Aust. (in collab. D. N. Kraehenbuehl ) : Northern
side of Penola-Dergholm road & \ mile W. of Victorian
border — A. C. B. n. 6514, 8 Nov. 1964; 3 miles N.N.W. of
Bullock Swamp & ± 10 miles N.E. of Penola — A. C. B.
n. 6528, 8 Jan. 1965 (Dupl. in AD, K) ; Yallum, 9 miles W. of
Penola — A. C. B. n. 6527 & 6529, 5 Jan. 1965 (Dupl. in AD) .

Ephemeral herb 2-4 ( — 5) cm. high, on moist heath and in
shallow seasonal swamps. Leaves radical, ligulate, obtuse, 3-5 mm.
long, ± 0-7 mm. wide. Scape glabrous, swollen and fleshy below
insertion of leaf-rosette, usually simple but sometimes a small
secondary one from same rosette, bearing 1-10 erect flowers (usually
3-5) in an open panicle; each branch subtended by a small elliptic
bract. Calyx glabrous except for a few very scattered minute
glandular hairs, green to purplish, the linear tube 4-7 mm. long and
obtuse lobes 1—1*5 mm. (2 of them =h united to apex). Corolla very
delicate, pale pink on inner face, but with a deeper coloured stripe
and rosy suffusion on under side of each petal, =h fan-shaped;
posterior pair of petals obovate-spathulate, 1*5-2 mm. long, 0-8-1
mm. wide at rounded tips, almost twice the length of the similar
anterior petals which flank them; labellum minute, ovate; throat with
6 minute but discernible humps or rudimentary appendages; column
short and stout (1-1*5 mm. long), with greenish anthers. Capsule
oblong-linear, often becoming reddish, 6-8 mm. long. Seeds not seen.

Stylidium beaugleholei, which is widespread in far south-western
Victoria (extending into South Australia) , belongs to the group of
small, ephemeral triggerplants having linear calyx-tubes, e.g. S.
brachyphyllum Sond. Throughout its range the new species was

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 155

found to accompany but to remain perfectly distinct from S.
brachyphyllum [= S. inundatum R. Br.], differing constantly thus:

Corolla ± fan-shaped, its segments not laterally paired, pale
pink with deep rose stripe along under-surface of each lobe;
2 posterior petals almost twice as long as anterior flanking
pair (c/. shorter posterior pair in S. brachyphyllum ) ; 6
minute humps or rudimentary appendages easily discernible
in throat.

In the fan-like orientation of corolla-lobes it recalls the West
Australian S. rhipidium , but that rare plant differs in having a rather
wiry glandular-hairy scape, much longer white posterior petals
(5-6 mm.) and well-developed capitate throat-appendages. Other
associated pygmy plants at various places are Isoetes drummondii,
Scirpus 8c Schoenus spp., Trithuria submersa, Mitrasacme distylis,
Utricularia violacea and Stylidium perpusillum.

The specific epithet is bestowed as a token of honour to Mr. A.
Cliff. Beauglehole, of Gorae West near Portland, an assiduous observer
of pygmy plants (including cryptogams), who discovered the present
species, recognized its distinctiveness and made the only collections
known to date. Mr. Beauglehole has built up a large, valuable private
herbarium and possesses an unrivalled knowledge of the floristics of
far south-western Victoria.

STYLIDIUM INUNDATUM R. Br. Prodr. Flor. Nov. Holl. 571 (1810).

S. brachyphyllum Sond. in Lehmann Plant. Preiss 1 : 386 (1845).

Stylidium brachyphyllum , described originally from Western
Australia and restricted to that State by Bentham in his Flor. aust.
4: 25 (1868), was recorded by the present writer in Viet. Nat. 73:
44 (1956) as having also a wide distribution over south-eastern
Australia. In her monograph, Triggerplants 54 (1958), Mrs. Rica
Erickson cites a number of localities in S. Aust., N.S.W., Vic. and
Tas. The only locality given by her for the closely related but
imperfectly known S. inundatum R. Br. is that of its type collection
— the vague “ South Coast ” which doubtless refers to some part of
South Australia.

Apart from the concentration of leaves into a basal rosette in
S. brachyphyllum and their dispersal along the base of the scape in S.
inundatum, the circumscriptions of these two taxa are virtually
identical and there seems to be no other constant feature to
distinguish them. The laterally-paired orientation of delicate,
glistening, very pale pink to white corolla-lobes (the upper posterior
pair being shorter than the curved anterior) is precisely the same in
both, as is the bare throat. After examining hundreds of specimens
throughout Victoria, the writer is now convinced that the criterion
of the basal rosette is an unstable one; presence or absence of a
rosette depends on the speed of elongation of the swollen stem-base.
He therefore advocates the reduction to synonymy of S. brachyphyllum
under S. inundatum — the older-published name.

156 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

Composite

OLEARIA ALLENDERAE J. H. Willis spec. nov.

ex affinitate O. stellulatae (Labill.) DC. et O. rugosae (F. Muell. ex
Archer) Hutchinson, sed a priore differt foliis comparate latioribus,
ad apicem obtusis, irregularius dentatis, eius marginibus anguste
revolutis, in superficie sine pilis stellatis atque subter manifeste
reticulatis; a his speciebus duabus recedit habitu gracili, foliis multo
parvioribus (1-3 cm. longis) auriculatisque, inflorescentiis non
paniculatis, pedunculis brevioribus (5-10 mm.) atque acheniis omnino
glabris.

HOLOTYPE : Wilson’s Promontory, S. Victoria, in swampy depression
± 2 miles north of Darby River crossing — Marie Allender,
27 Oct. 1964 (MEL). ISOTYPES at MEL, NSW, AD, K.

PARATYPE : Ibidem — Marie Allender , 24 Oct. 1961 (MEL).

Shrub slender, sparingly branched, 1-2 m. (= 3-6 feet) high, with
elongated, leafy, purplish, costate branches that push up through
dense paludal shrubberies. Leaves rigidly coriaceous, ovate-lanceolate
to oblong, 1-3 cm. long, 5-12 mm. wide, obtuse at apex, auriculate
at base, with petiole only 1-2 mm. long; margins narrowly revolute,
crenate to coarsely and bluntly toothed; upper-surfaces shining,
deeply wrinkled with small bullate sections, asperate or almost
smooth; under-surfaces reticulate, whitish from a fine mat of minute
stellate hairs. Inflorescence 3-8 cm. long, leafy throughout, consisting
of mostly solitary capitula in the upper axils. Capitula on short
peduncles 5-10 mm. long (rarely exceeding the floral leaves),
broadly funnel-shaped, 6-8 mm. wide at anthesis; phyllaries 2- to
3-seriate, zb 20 (dz 8 outer bracts being shorter) , lanceolate to
oblanceolate and broadly acute, the innermost 4-5 mm. long, purplish
but colour at first masked by a woolly-white stellate indumentum
that persists at base and on the apical dorsum. Ray-florets dz 10-12,
female, with white ligules 6-9 mm. long and 1-2 mm. wide. Disk-
florets 13-17, bisexual, purplish at first then yellow, with narrowly
funnel-shaped corolla 4-5 mm. long; anthers pale, 2 mm. long; style-
arms narrowly elliptic, purple, pruinose, dz 1 mm. long. Achene
elliptic, flattened, glabrous, with zb 5 prominent vertical ribs, 2-2-5
mm. long, =b 0-8 mm. wide; pappus-bristles 30-40, zb 5 mm. long,
white-silky, minutely scabrid and slightly thicker at acuminate tips,
fused into a short corona at base.

The affinities of the new species are closest to O. stellulata
(Labill.) DC. and O. rugosa (E. Muell. ex Archer) Hutchinson; it
differs from the former in having no stellate hairs on the upper-
surfaces of leaves (which are relatively narrower, more regularly
toothed, acute at apices, without revolute margins and less reticulate
in O. stellulata) , and from both these species it departs in its slender
habit, much smaller auriculate leaves, non-paniculate inflorescences,
shorter peduncles and quite glabrous achenes.

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 157

The apparent restriction of Olearia allenderae to a small tract of
marshy land on Wilson’s Promontory is remarkable. Since a few
higher plants, that are found in Victoria only at Wilson’s Promontory
(e.g. Lepidium praetervisum and Pimelea drupacea) , occur also in
Tasmania, it seemed appropriate to submit the original collection of
O. allenderae to Hobart Herbarium for examination. Dr. Winifred
Curtis replied (24/5/1962): “I cannot match your specimen of

Olearia with any from Tasmania

The author has pleasure in naming this graceful plant after its
discoverer, Miss Marie Allender (of the Melbourne Herbarium staff) ,
who has advanced our knowledge of the Victorian flora by several
other noteworthy discoveries.

OLEARIA RAMULOSA (Lab ill.) Benth.

var. RIGIDA J. H. Willis in Muelleria 1: 28 (1956).

This very distinctive daisy-bush attains a height of 3-6 feet, has
rigidly erect branches, relatively long scabrid leaves (to \ inch),
white flower-heads massed attractively in elongated spike-like
racemes, and it is undoubtedly rare. At the time of description it
was known only from on and slightly north of the Strathbogie Range,
N.E. Victoria — rocky granitic terrain. Subsequently an un-named
specimen was located in Melbourne Herbarium from Mt. Korong —
also of granite — more than 100 miles westward (collected by Dr. H.
Beckler on 14 Oct. 1861). The author failed to re-discover this
variety while botanizing on Mt. Korong a century later (31 Oct.
1964); but he had the great satisfaction, on 16 January 1966, to
find a single old, yet vigorous shrub of it on the westernmost
declivities of Mt. Beckworth, ± 4\ miles S.W. of Clunes. The
occurrence, again among granite rocks, extends the known range to
57 miles south of Mt. Korong and no interim collection would seem
to have been made since that of the type (at Lima East) in
November 1917.

HELICHRYSUM ACUMINATUM DC. Prodr. 6\ 188 (1838)

Dr. Winifred Curtis, Student’s Flor. Tasm . 2: 331 (1963), furnishes
an adequate account of Helichrysum acuminatum , with the note:
“ widespread and locally frequent in montane grassland and on
mountain plateaux, reaching the exposed summits but no indication
is given that this species extends to mainland Australia. Actually,
it is also quite abundant on the alpine peaks and high plains of
eastern Victoria, southern New South Wales and the A.C.T., where

it has long been confused with H. bracteatum (Vent.) Andr. a

much more variable, taller, branching plant of montane forests,
coastal tracts and the Mallee. Bentham had synonymized H.
acuminatum under H. bracteatum in his Flor. aust. 3: 620 (1866),
and apparently Dr. Curtis is the only author during the past century
to resurrect the former name. De Candolle’s H. acuminatum may
be recognized at once by its simple, erect, leafy flowering stem

158 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

(10-25 cm.), its large solitary golden to orange flower-heads (3-5
cm. wide when expanded) and especially by the long acuminate-
lanceolate intermediate bracts (always ± obtuse in the case of
H. bracteatum ) . No previous record for Victoria would seem to
have been published.

HELICHRYSUM DEALBATUM Labill. Nov. Holl. Plant. Specim. 2:
45, t. 190 (1806).

This rhizomatous herb is widespread and often abundant in
Tasmania, but of very limited and scattered distribution on the
northern side of Bass Strait. The only mainland localities known,
until quite recently, were Wilson’s Promontory, Foster, Nine Mile
Creek near Hedley, Bruthen and Bennison High Plains. Then, on
29 Nov. 1964, Mr. A. C. Beauglehole found a small, very isolated
colony on wet heathland of the Lower Glenelg watershed, about
6 miles north of Mt. Kincaid in far S.W. Victoria — a noteworthy
extension of range and the most westerly locality to be recorded.
Specimens from his collection, n. 6511, have been lodged at Melbourne
Herbarium; they have comparatively large flower-heads (±3 cm. wide,
with intermediate bracts of the involucre beautifully crimson-tinted
and plicate when dry.

HELICHRYSUM ROGERSIANUM J. H. Willis spec. nov.

ad H. ledifolium (DC.) Benth. atque H. ericetum W. M. Curtis
Tasmaniae proxime accedit; a priore differt habitu virgato, statura
altiore (1 -5-2-5 m.), foliis angustioribus (0-5-2 mm.), capitulis
angustioribus flosculos pauciores (3-7) continentibus; a secundo
foliis multo longioribus angustioribusque inflorescentiis majoribus et
involucri squamis nunquam purpureis distinguitur.

HOLOTYPE & ISOTYPE (with mature achenes) : Brumby Point,

N.E. sector of Nunniong Plateau, E. Victoria, at ± 1,080 m.
(=3,500 feet) alt. in montane forest on shaded southerly
slopes above Little Reedy River — K. C. Rogers , 10 Mar. 1964
(MEL) .

PARATYPES: Ibidem— K. C. Rogers , 18 Apr. 1964 (MEL, NSW);

Laver’s Hill road 2 -5-3 -5 miles S. of Chappie Vale, Otway
Ranges, S. Vic., at ± 155 m. (= 500 ft.) alt. — Helen I.
Aston n. 813, 16 Nov. 1960 (MEL, CANB, NSW, BRI, AD,
HO, K, BM, L, G).

Also examined (all in MEL) : Ibidem (viz Laver’s Hill road, &c.)

— Mrs. Winifred Denny, 19 Nov. 1960 (duplicates to be
distributed to other herbaria) ; Chappie Vale road 4-5 miles
N.W. of Laver’s Hill, Otway Ranges, S. Vic. — J. H. Willis,
26 Nov. 1961 (also NSW); Gable End Track ± 0-5 miles S.
of Miller’s Hut, in Mt. Wellington region at ± 1,400 m.
(= 4,600 ft.) alt., only a single bush noted — J. H. Willis,
12 Mar. 1966.

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 159

Shrub 1-5-2 -5 m. (=5-7 feet) high, with strong sweetly spicy
aroma; branches rigidly erect, minutely cottony, resinous, bearing
prominent scars of the fallen foliage. Leaves spreading widely
(almost perpendicular to axis), linear, 1-2 cm. long, 0-5-2 mm.
wide, the entire margins closely revolute to mid-rib and apices
blunt or slightly acute; upper surfaces transversely rugulose, rather
cottony-hairy at first, finally almost glabrous; under surfaces (where
visible) cottony-white, but often stained yellow by a copious
exudation of resin. Inflorescence a dense corymbiform panicle of
capitula, 2-4 cm. wide and 1-2 cm. high, terminating each branchlet.
Capitula up to 50 per panicle, each on a short yellowish peduncle
1-2 mm. long, broadly cylindrical, 4-5 mm. long and 1-5-2 mm. wide
at anthesis; phyllaries about 4-seriate, relatively few (up to 18),
the 7-9 outer ones yellowish, scarious but diaphanous, obtuse,
resinous and ± fringed with loose cottony hairs, the 7-10 inner
ones 3-4 mm. long, with narrow claws and obovate, white, opaque,
crenulate radiating tips 1-2 mm. long. Florets 3-7, hermaphrodite,
but not all fertile, narrowly funnel-shaped, 3-4 mm. long, creamy white;
anthers pale, ± 1-2 mm. long; style-arms 0-5 mm. long, yellow,
truncate at apex. Achene shortly cylindrical, plump, ± 1 -5 mm. long,
0-5 mm. wide, dark, papillose-pubescent all over and only faintly
ribbed at maturity; pappus-bristles 20-30, free, 2-3 mm. long, finely
barbellate.

Affinities of the new species are closest to the endemic Tasmanian
H. ledifolium (DC.) Benth. and H. ericetum W. M. Curtis; it differs
from the former in being much taller, of virgate habit, with narrower
leaves and capitula and fewer florets (8-15 per capitulum in H.
ledifolium ), and from the latter in having much longer narrower
leaves, larger inflorescences and the phyllaries never purplish. The
extremely localized occurrence (at most only a few acres) in each of
three quite disjunct areas in Victoria is astonishing, especially as one
habitat is almost subalpine and the other adjacent to near-coastal
heathland; but an even more dramatic discontinuity obtains with
Bertya findlayi — viz sources of the Murray River and western slopes
of the Grampians (Victoria Range) , 340 miles apart. It might be
expected that Helichrysum rogersianum will eventually appear also
in some mountainous tract of S.E. New South Wales.

The specific epithet is a tribute to the author’s friend, Mr. Keith
C. Rogers of “ Rockbank”, Wulgulmerang, who discovered this shrub
at Brumby Point (where he also found the remarkable new and
endemic Monotoca rotundifolia and, for the first time, a Victorian
colony of exceedingly rare Acacia lucasii ) , who has made numerous
noteworthy extensions to the distribution of plant species in far
north-east Gippsland, and has made it possible for the writer to
accompany him on many enjoyable, productive botanical excursions
into remote mountain regions.

160 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

CASSINIA UNCATA A. Cunn. ex DC. Prodr. 6: 156 (1838)

C. complanata J. M. Black in Trans, roy. Soc. S. Aust. 52: 230 (1928)

Duplicates of type Cassinia uncata (Liverpool Plains, N.S.W.)
and of C. complanata (Murray Scrub, S. Aust.) are in Melbourne
Herbarium, and the differences purporting to separate them are a
matter of degree alone. In general, the former has more strongly
uncate scabrid leaves that may attain lengths up to 5 cm., while
those of the latter are often smooth, wrinkled and less than 3 cm.
long; but these features are no more than might be expected to occur
with a change of habitat — rocky montane tracts in the case of
C. uncata, and mallee sand-hills frequently in C. complanata. Both
extremes occur in Victoria, also intermediate populations, and neither
involucres nor florets display any reliable distinguishing character.
If, as now considered, the taxa are conspecific, then the first-
published name C. uncata must take precedence.

APALOCHLAMYS SPECTABILIS ( Labill .) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

Calea spectabilis Labill. Nov. Holl. Plant. Specim. 2: 42, t. 186 (1806);

Cassinia spectabilis (Labill.) R. Br. in Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. 12: 128
(1817);

A. Billardierii DC. Prodr. 6: 157 (1838).

This tall, tobacco-like and highly aromatic biennial of sandy,
near-coastal habitats in south-eastern Australia holds quite an isolated
position, if included in the genus Cassinia to which it has generally
been referred by all Australian systematists during the past century
and a half. A. H. G. Cassini in Diet. Sci. nat. 56: 223 (1828) had
proposed for it a distinct genus, and following is a translation of his
reasons for erecting Apalochlamys :

“ This genus or sub-genus, founded on Cassinia spectabilis of Mr.
Brown, is distinguished by 3 characters: 1. by its involucre formed
of very slender, soft, diaphanous, almost colourless scales, a little
coriaceous at base; 2. by its pappus of entirely filiform scalelets, very
fine and very barbellate; 3. by its herbaceous stem with decurrent
leaves ”,

The name signifies “ soft envelope ” and was chosen in allusion
to the texture of the involucre. Cassini did not use the binomial
A. spectabilis nor make it clear that he was publishing a combined
generic-specific description to cover a single species, Labillardiere’s
Calea spectabilis. Thus, according to Article 33 (Montreal revision
of International Code) , it would appear that a formal new combination
is obligatory with acceptance of Cassini’s genus. De Candolle (I.c.)
did accept Apalochlamys and described three species thereunder,
citing Calea spectabilis as a synonym of the first one, A. billardierii.
However, he should have retained for it the validly published epithet
spectabilis, and his binomial is illegitimate. Bentham subsequently
(1866) reduced all three Candollean names to synonymy under
Cassinia spectabilis. Believing that C. spectabilis is worthy of
distinction at generic level from other members of Cassinia, and
constitutes a natural monotypic genus, the writer has established
(above) the required nomenclatural combination under Apalochlamys ,

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 161

CALOMERIA AMARANTHOIDES Vent . Jardin Malmaison 2: t. 73
(Oct. 1804).

Humea elegans Sm. Exotic Botany 1 : t. 1 (Dec. 1804).

The genera Calomeria and Humea were described independently,
at about the same time, and believed by their respective authors to
be monotypic. Both descriptions (with plates) refer undoubtedly to
one and the same species. De Candolle in his Prodr. Syst. nat. Regn.
veg. 6: 157 (1838) synonymized Calomeria under Humea , and has
been followed by all succeeding authors — F. Mueller (1858), G.
Bentham (1866) &c. A careful investigation of the dates of

publication during recent years, however, has revealed that Ventenat’s
name Calomeria was effectively published in Oct. 1804, two months
ahead of Smith’s Humea (Dec. 1804) and, according to the present
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, it must be re-
established. Considering long usage in Australia of the name Humea
(for a conspicuous and decorative herb, sometimes grown in gardens
as “ incense plant ”) , a case for its conservation might well be
submitted to the Bureau of Nomenclature. At present there is an
obligation to adopt Calomeria and, even if Humea were eventually
conserved, a new combination “ H. amaranthoides ” would become
necessary. Incidentally, E. P. Ventenat dedicated his genus to
Napoleon Bonaparte, likened the odour of C. amaranthoides to sage
and mentioned that the original seeds had been sent by M. Dumont
Courset — “ a first-class correspondent ” of the Institute of France.

In his Fragmenta Phyt. Aust. 1 : 17 (1858) F. Mueller widened
the original circumscription of Humea Sm. and established two
sections: Sect. I Calomeria , containing only the herbaceous type

species H. elegans, and Sect. II Haeckeria with a pair of shrubby
species, H. ozothamnoides and H. cassiniacea [= H. cassiniiformis ]
that he had previously referred to his own new genus Haeckeria
(1852). Two additional taxa have subsequently been added to the
latter section, so that five species of Humea are now being recognized
for Australia. Spencer le M. Moore (1911) admitted three other
Humea species as endemics in South Africa, but these have since
been disposed of — presumably as aberrant members of Helichrysum,
lacking a pappus. Bentham (1866) had upheld this wider concept
adopted by Mueller who later contributed “ Notes on the limits of
the genus Humea ” to Viet. Nat. 9: 143-44 (Jan. 1893), wherein he
enlarged Humea even further so as to include the epappose genera
Pithocarpa and Acomis as well.

Calomeria is quite isolated and bears exactly the same relationship
to Haeckeria as Apalochlamys does to Cassinia. It is a tall, glandular,
highly aromatic biennial herb (resembling a tobacco plant) , with
large broad wrinkled stem-clasping leaves and a very large, loose,
gracefully pendulous, terminal panicle of thinly-textured reddish
capitula, the achenes also glandular. The writer believes that
Calomeria should remain monotypic, and that the four other
Australian taxa currently placed under Humea should be referred to

162 J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora

Haeckeria F. Muell. — woody perennials having stiff, linear, rather
ericoid leaves (clustered or even imbricate) and the white or yellow
heads forming compact corymbs. In habit, species of Haeckeria
strongly resemble those of Cassinia, but differ in the total absence
of both pappus and receptacular scales. H. cassiniiformis F. Muell.
(the type species, endemic on Eyre Peninsuala, S.A.) and H.
ozothamnoides F. Muell. (Vic. & N.S.W) need no change of name;
but new combinations under Haeckeria are required for Humea
punctulata F. Muell. (S.A. only) and H. pholidota (F. Muell.) J. M.
Black of mallee tracts in S.A., Vic. and N.S.W. These transfers are
effected hereunder:

HAECKERIA PHOLIDOTA (F. Muell.) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

Ozothamnus pholidotus F. Muell. Fragm. Phyt. Aust. 2: 131 (1861);
Humea pholidota (F. Muell.) J. M. Black in Trans, roy Soc. S. Aust.
43: 43 (1919).

HAECKERIA PUNCTULATA (F. Muell.) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

Humea punctulata F. Muell. Fragm. Phyt. Aust. 3: 137 (1863);

Cassinia punctulata (F. Muell.) F. Muell. & R. Tate ex R. Tate Handb.

Flor. extratrop. S. Aust. 241 (1890).

In Hj. Eichler’s Suppl. J. M. Black’s Flor. S. Aust. 316 & 323
(1965), both Humea punctulata F. Muell. and Cassinia complanata
J. M. Black are synonymized under the name C. punctulata ( J.c .) —
a procedure with which the present writer cannot agree. The type
of H. punctulata (MEL) from Flinders and Elders Ranges supports its
complete separation from C. complanata [= C. uncata A. Cunn. ex
DC.], as set out by Black in his Flor. S. Aust. ed 2: 919 (1957): the
former is totally glabrous, but has prominent resin-glands in the
trigonal straight-pointed leaves, and extremely narrow, single-flowered
capitula; the latter is more or less scabrid-hairy (especially on axes
of the inflorescence) , with flattened but revolute leaves that are
uncate at their tips and with broader capitula each bearing several
florets. Certainly, capitula on the type of H. punctulata are very
immature, but their minute florets fail to show any vestige of a
pappus, the bristles of which are always discernible on Cassinia at
comparable stages of development. Reasons have been advanced
elsewhere in this paper for the writer’s action in relegating Cassinia
complanata to synonymy under C. uncata A. Cunn. ex DC.

SENECIO BRUNONIS (Hook, f.) J. H. Willis comb. nov.

Centropappus Brunonis Hook. f. in Lond. J. Bot. 6: 124 (1847);

Senecio centropappus F. Muell. Annu. Rev. Govt. Bot. 1858: 26 (1858)
atque in Benth. Flor. aust. 3: 666 (1866) — nom. illegit.

In transferring the only known species of Centropappus Hook. f.
to Senecio L., F. Mueller (l.c.) should have retained its specific
epithet “ brunonis ”. He may have been dissuaded from so doing
by pre-existence of the similar name S. brunonianus Hook. & Arn.

J. H. Willis: Systematic Notes on the Indigenous Australian Flora 163

(1841), based upon a Chilean type. Brunonis and brunonianus,
however, are not etymological variants but different epithets, and
they may be used simultaneously for two species in the same genus.
Under the existing International Code it becomes obligatory to adopt
the name S. brunonis, for which the above new combination was
required.

Senecio brunonis is at once the largest, most interesting and
one of the most localized groundsels in Australia, being endemic on
Mts. Wellington and Dromedary in southern Tasmania at altitudes
between 2,500 and 3,800 feet. There it forms a small pyramidal tree
6-12 feet high, with spreading, linear, aromatic, rather viscid leaves
(2-4 inches long) and laminating papery bark. In far southern New
Zealand, S. reinoldii and S. stewartiae also attain tree size (to 19 feet
or more) , as does the related S. huntii on Chatham Islands.

BEDFORDIA SALICINA ( Labill. ) DC. Prodr. 6: 441 (1838).

G. Bentham’s observations on thousands of species of Australian
plants are amazing for their meticulous attention to detail and general
accuracy, especially when one bears in mind that this savant worked
almost solely from limited amounts of dry herbarium material. It is
the more curious, therefore, that in Flor. aust . 3: 673 (1866) he
should have initiated a major error of description, blindly perpetuated
by succeeding authors to the present day. Bentham states that the
genus Bedfordia comprises “ shrubs more or less stellate-tomentose ”,
commenting also: “ F. Mueller has proposed to unite it with Senecio,
but the stellate tomentum and axillary inflorescence are quite
unknown in that extensive genus. In Mueller’s Key Syst. Viet. Plant.
1: 340 (1888), Senecio Bedfordi [= Bedfordia salicina ] is said to be
“ invested with whitish or greyish stellular hairlets ”. Similar state-
ments occur in C. Moore’s Handb. Flor. N.S.W. 298 (1893) and
A. J. Ewart’s Flor. Viet. 1178 (1931). As recently as 1963, Dr.
Winifred Curtis (Student’s Flor. Tasm. 2: 287) has made its “ stellate
indumentum ” the main key character separating Bedfordia from
Senecio.

Examination of a wide range of Bedfordia specimens in Melbourne
Herbarium has failed to reveal a single stellate hair, either on the
branchlets, foliage or inflorescences, and this criterion is now
considered to be no more than an illusion. The whitish, thickly woolly
vestiture in Bedfordia consists entirely of simple, but highly cirriform
hairs; sometimes, as on the upper surfaces of young leaves, these
hairs may arise and intricately intertwine in little groups, and such a
characteristic could perhaps have misled Bentham into interpreting
them as true stellulae. In general, mainland examples of B. salicina
have rather longer looser hairs than their Tasmanian counterparts.

Another inexplicable feature is Labillardiere’s choice of epithet,
when describing his Cacalia salicina — surely few plants could be less
like a willow than the Australian “ blanket-leaf ”!

TYPIFICATION OF EIGHT VICTORIAN SPECIES NAMES IN

EUCALYPTUS

by

J. H. Willis*

The names for at least eight Victorian eucalypts have never been
typified by a specimen and/or illustration. No type collection was
cited with the original diagnoses (seven by F. Mueller and one by
A. W. Howitt) , under which were given merely the known habitats
and distributional ranges of these species. It is desirable that, for
each entity, a specimen as representative as possible be designated
LECTOTYPE from amongst the material examined by the author,
used in drawing up his original description and still housed at the
National Herbarium of Victoria. A particular desideratum is typifica-
tion of the name Eucalyptus regnans (Mountain Ash) , referring to
the tallest and largest flowering plant in the world. Unfortunately,
many of the collections eligible and available for selection as type
are in a rather fragmentary and unsatisfactory state; no juvenile
foliage accompanies any of them. In some instances, two or more
loose labels accompany several unmounted specimens, and it is not
now possible to say which element rightly belongs to any label. The
writer has made what he believes to be the best possible choice of
type specimens, details of which are set out hereunder. Binomials
are arranged alphabetically as to epithet, and explanatory notes are
given in each instance.

1. Eucalyptus behriana F. Muell. in Trans. Viet. Inst. 34 (1855).

LECTOTYPE: Near Bacchus Marsh, Victoria — “ In montibus petraeis

sterilibus tractus Bacchus Marsh ”. F. Mueller, Jan. 1853 (MEL
n. 10388).

Geographical data cited with original description : “In arid plains and

on stony bare hills near the Avoca, Murray, Gawler River and in
Bacchus Marsh ”

Of existing material from these four regions, that of the last and
easternmost locality is in reasonable condition, consisting of an ample
spray of adult leaves with buds and flowers; a few detached fruits are
in an accompanying envelope. This collection, now chosen as lectotype,
most probably came from the high ridge between Djerriwarrh Creek
and Anthony’s Cutting (about 3 miles east of Bacchus Marsh) where
the species continues to grow in fair quantity.

2. Eucalyptus bosistoana F. Muell. in Aust. J. Pharm. 10: 293 (Oct.

1895).

LECTOTYPE: Between the Nicholson and Tambo Rivers, Victoria.

Schlipalius (MEL n. 10389).

Geographical data cited with original description : Following his diagnosis,

Mueller lists no less than nine collections from between Port Jackson
(N.S.W.) and Wilson’s Promontory (Vic.), viz — Cabramatta (Rev.
Dr. W. Woolls), County of Camden (Rev. Dr. W. Woods), near Mt.
Dromedary (Miss M. Bate), near Twofold Bay (L. Morton), near

* National Herbarium of Victoria.

165

166 J. H. Willis: Typification of Eight Victorian Species names in Eucalyptus

the Genoa (Barnard), on the summit of Tantowango Mountains
[ = Tantawanglo Mtn. between Bega and Bombala] (A. W. Howitt),
near the Mitchell River (A. W. Howitt), between the Tambo and
Nicholson Rivers (Schlipalius) , near the Strezlecki Ranges
[= Strzelecki] (Olsen) .

Although the specimen chosen (a flowering spray collected by one
Schlipalius , without date) is not accompanied by the name E.
hosistoana in Mueller’s hand, the folder does contain a slip of paper
on which he has made pencil drawings of longitudinal flower-sections
and anther details. Unfortunately no fruits are present.

3. Eucalyptus fasciculosa F. Muell. in Trans. Viet. Inst. 34 (1855).

LECTOTYPE: Bugle Range (between Mount Barker and Strathalbyn) ,

South Australia — “ Locis lapidosis sterilioribus montium Bugle range ”.
F. Mueller , Aug. 1850 (MEL n. 10390).

Geographical data cited with original description : “ On barren ridges along
St. Vincent’s Gulf, on the Gawler River, in the Mount Lofty Ranges
and Bugle Ranges, and on Encounter Bay ”.

The sheet selected for type bears Mueller’s early handwriting
under the name E. fasciculosa, and contains a leafy branch with
relatively large fruits (8x6 mm.), but neither flowers nor buds.

4. Eucalyptus gracilis F. Muell. in Trans. Viet. Inst. 35 (1855).

LECTOTYPE: Murray Scrub, South Australia. F. Mueller, Dec. 1848

(MEL n. 10391).

Geographical data cited with original description: “In the desert on the
Murray River ”.

There is but a single collection in Melbourne Herbarium, coming
from this region and labelled (as above) by its discoverer. Inevitably
it must be denominated type, although it consists of only a small
broken branchlet bearing leaves, buds and flowers, but no capsules.
The material from which mature fruits were described seems to have
disappeared. Why Dr. Behr’s name should also have been written
by Mueller against this specimen is rather puzzling, for Herman Behr
left South Australia and returned to Germany in 1847 — before
Mueller’s arrival in Adelaide.

5. Eucalyptus largiflorens F. Muell. in Trans. Viet. Inst. 34 (1855).

LECTOTYPE: Murray River above Moorundie, South Australia —

“ Murray Scrub supera Morunde ”. F. Mueller, 1 Feb. 1851 (MEL
n. 10392).

Geographical data cited with original description : “In bushy barren

localities on the Murray, Avoca, Wimmera, and on St. Vincent’s
Gulf ”.

The Murray River specimen (from near Moorundie) has leaves,
buds and flowers but no fruits; it is the best of the four possible type
collections examined by Mueller and has been chosen as lectotype.
This name replaces E. bicolor A. Cunn. ex Hook. (1848) which, until
recent years, was universally applied to the B)ack Box tree through-
out eastern Australia. A. K. Cameron, in Viet. Nat. 63: 42 (June

J. H. Willis: Typification of Eight Victorian Species names in Eucalyptus 167

1946), again drew attention to the opinion of Dr. T. A. Sprague that
the original description of E. bicolor was too vague, brief and
insufficient to legitimize the name — it was a nomen subnudum.

6. Eucalyptus leucoxylon F. Mueil. in Trans. Viet. Inst. 33 (1855).

LECTOTYPE: “Towards the apex of St. Vincent’s Gulf”, South

Australia. F. Mueller, 7 Nov. 1851 (MEL n. 10393).

Geographical data cited with original description: “In grassy plains

from the Avoca to St. Vincent’s and Spencer’s Gulf ”.

There is abundant early and reasonably good material in Melbourne
Herbarium from which to select a type; 12 sheets from the herbarium
of O. Sonder (all labelled by Mueller) are included. The writer has
fixed upon a well-preserved collection from near the head of St.
Vincent’s Gulf, showing glaucescent branchlets, adult foliage, mature
buds and flowers, and smallish almost semi-globoid capsules.

7. Eucalyptus muelleriana A. W. Howitt in Trans, roy. Soc. Viet.

2: 89, tt. 12 & 13 (1891).

LECTOTYPE: “Nine Mile Creek, South Gippsland ” [near Hedley],

Victoria. A. W. Howitt, n. 6 (MEL n. 10394).

Geographical data cited with original description: Howitt (l.c.) remarks
as follows concerning his newly described eucalypt — “ It is a littoral
species, and is principally found between the Hoddle Ranges and
the sea coast. There it forms the bulk of the forest, growing upon
sands and sandy clays, from Monkey Creek (20 miles from Sale) to
Shady Creek (west of Alberton), in an east and west direction, and
from Carrajung southwards to the coast. The area thus covered by
this tree is about 300 square miles ”.

In Melbourne Herbarium there are five possible sheets of type,
bearing Howitt’s undated locality labels, but most of these are
miserable fragments. Only one collection (from Nine Mile Creek)
carries the name Eucalyptus muelleriana in Howitt’s handwriting, and
this is now chosen as lectotype; it consists of several small branch-
tips of adult leaves and unopened flower-buds, with two detached
fruits in an envelope. Apart from occurrences now known at nearby
Wilson’s Promontory, Nine Mile Creek approaches the most westerly
point (Hoddle Creek area) attained by Yellow Stringybark. Records
for the Grampians and Mt. Lofty Range are the result of mis-
identified E. baxteri , and Howitt was apparently unaware in 1891
that the species also extended well into south-eastern New South
Wales.

8. Eucalyptus regnans F. Mueil. Key. Syst . Viet. Plants 1: 236 (1888).

LECTOTYPE: Dandenong [i.e. Dandenong Ranges], Victoria — “ Eucalyptus

of the tall trees measured by Mr. D. Boyle in March 1867 ”

(MEL n. 10168).

Geographical data cited with original description: Nil.

Until making his entry in the Systematic Census of Australian
Plants 57 (1882), F. Mueller consistently referred this taxon to the
name Eucalyptus amygdalina Labill. for which he allowed an
extremely wide circumscription. The first appearance of the name

168

New Cultivar in Leptospermum

E. regnans (but as a nomen subnudum) is in Annu. Rep. Acclim.
Soc. Viet. 7: 48 (1871) where Mueller commented:

“ This species or variety, which might be called Eucalyptus regnans,
represents the loftiest tree in British territory/'

The same statement is repeated word-for-word in Mueller’s Select
Plants readily eligible for Industrial Culture or Naturalization in
Victoria 76 (1876), also in Ellwood Cooper’s Forest Culture and
Eucalyptus Trees 31 (1876) . The first formal diagnosis of E. regnans,
thus legitimizing the name, was in Key to the System of Victorian
Plants 1: 236 (1888); but there is no reference to any locality or
collection. Furthermore, Mueller never wrote the epithet “ regnans ”
on any label in the Melbourne Herbarium.

For typification of this name, it is necessary to select a specimen
from among the large series of collections of ‘ White Mountain Ash ’
examined by F. Mueller prior to 1888. As lectotype, I have chosen
and denominated the example cited above; it is labelled in Mueller’s
hand, and, in foliar, bud, flower and fruiting characteristics, it most
closely approximates to the original description of 1888. The
collector’s name is not given, but was probably David Boyle of
Nunawading.

NEW CULTIVAR IN LEPTOSPERMUM

Leptospermum nitidum ‘ Copper Sheen ’

The tea-tree, Leptospermum nitidum Hook.f., indigenous to the
Victorian Grampians also central and western Tasmania, is note-
worthy for its large, white, attractive blooms (to 1 inch wide) and
lustrous foliage. A form of uncertain origin, and now propagated
vegetatively, is becoming popular in Australian gardens. The latter
differs from typical L. nitidum in the bronzy-purplish colouration of
the young flat leaves which are consistently more spreading, in the
smaller creamy to even greenish-yellow petals and reddish, much
more shortly hairy calyx-lobes.

In E. E. Lord’s Shrubs and Trees for Australian Gardens p. 214
(Revised edition, 1964) , a description of this colourful variant appears
under the cultivar name L. nitidum ‘ Macrocarpum ’. The Inter-
national Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants p. 14 (1961),
in Articles 15 & 16, requires that a cultivar name with epithet of
Latin form must, if published after 1 January 1959, be accompanied
by a description in Latin — precisely as with new botanical taxa — ,
otherwise it will be illegitimate. One could legitimize ‘ Macro-
carpum ’; but the epithet was most unfortunately chosen, in that
fruits of this cultivar are no larger than in typical L. nitidum. It
seems much better to adopt a purely fanciful name, as proposed
above.

Voucher flowering material of L. nitidum ‘ Copper Sheen ’ has
been collected at Maranoa Gardens, Balwyn, Vic. (3/5/1966) and
lodged for permanent record in the National Herbarium of Victoria,
Melbourne.

J. H. Willis.

AQUATIC ANGIOSPERMS
Records of four introduced species new to Victoria

by

Helen I. Aston.*

In recent years the author has been working on the distribution
of aquatic species within Victoria, and the upgrowth of interest in this
field has led to the discovery of naturalized occurrences of four
species of aquatic angiosperms previously unrecorded for this State.
These are: Lilaea scilloides (Poir.) Haum., Ludwigia palustris (L.)
Ell., Myriophyllum brasiliense Cambess., and Sagittaria graminea
Michx. var. weatherbiana (Fernald) Bogin. With the exception of
Myriophyllum brasiliense all these discoveries also constitute new
records of these species for Australia.

Details of the finding and distribution of these species, and various
salient notes on each, are now given.

Lilaea scilloides (Poir.) Haum.

On 12 October 1961, Mr. Fred Swindley, then an officer of the
Fisheries and Wildlife Department, Melbourne, located this species at
a point approximately \ mile N.E. of Laverton, Victoria, which is
about 13 miles W.S.W. of Melbourne. Here a small creek flows
intermittently across the basalt plain, emptying eventually into
temporary swamps at Altona, and the species concerned was found
present at one of the few pools of permanent water along the creek.
Plants were in about 1 foot of water, with the top few inches
emergent, and lined the edges of the pool but did not extend into
deeper water. All floral and fruiting stages were present, both with
the bisexual flower-spikes and the sessile female organs. As far as
can be ascertained, this is the first known Australian occurrence of
this North and South American species, and it is regarded as a recent
accidental introduction to this State. Portion of Swindley’s collection
is housed at the National Herbarium of Victoria.

On 16 October 1962, the author visited the Laverton site and
found the species still prevalent at the original precise location.
Further material (Aston No. 839) was collected from a depth of
9 inches of water at the pool-edge, and again it was noticed that the
plant did not extend into deeper waters. Flowering and fruiting
were well evident. On 28 September 1964, I again visited the site
and found the situation much as in the previous instance. In
addition, plants were located 100 yards downstream, on damp mud
left above the receding water-level, and specimens of these were
taken (Aston No. 1223). Plants in this situation were thriving well,
with all floral and fruiting stages present.

* National Herbarium of Victoria.

169

170

H. I. Aston: Aquatic Angiosperms

The above observations are in agreement with Mason (1957) who
describes the species as an annual, either terrestrial on wet soil or
aquatic. Subject to man’s non-interference (the main pool is directly
alongside the Melbourne-Geelong Highway) the colony at Laverton
shows every sign of persisting. Downstream spread will probably be
limited as the creek waters soon become saline, but dispersal to other
areas may be effected by such agents as waterfowl, for fruits are
produced in considerable quantity. At present the species shows no
sign of being a pernicious spreader.

A botanical description and illustration is available in Mason
(1957, p. 101 and fig. 42).

Ludwigia palustris (L.) Ell.

On 2 June 1964, the author collected flowering and fruiting
material (Aston No. 1202) of this species from a lagoon of the Ovens
River, about 1^ miles N.E. of Wangaratta, in north-eastern Victoria.
This seems to be the first record of this species occurring naturalized
within Australia.

Since this date I have carried out extensive sampling along rivers,
creeks, lakes, lagoons, swamps, and farm stock-tanks throughout the
north-east of the State, from the Corryong district west to Barmah
Forest (north-west of Nathalia) and south to Nagambie and Eildon.
During this searching, L. palustris has been located in ten areas, all
restricted to the valleys of the Ovens and the Kiewa Rivers. No. trace
of it has yet been found in any other area visited, including the nearby
Mitta Mitta River which was sampled along its lower reaches from
Tallandoon to Tallangatta. Along the Ovens River the species occurs
either frequently or abundantly from Myrtleford to the Murray Valley
Highway (about 2 miles short of the confluence of the Ovens and
Murray Rivers) , a direct distance of some 49 miles. Along the Kiewa
River it occurs similarly from Upper Gundowring north to the Murray
Valley Highway, about 5 miles east of Wodonga, and again only
2 miles short of the confluence of the Kiewa with the Murray River.
This is a distance of approximately 26 miles. At present, therefore,
the species is known to extend along approximately 75 miles (direct
line) of river valley, and probably extends still farther as the rivers
upstream from Myrtleford and Upper Gundowring have not yet been
searched.

In an endeavour to locate the origin of the occurrences, an
approach was made to the State Electricity Commission of Victoria,
as it was thought that the plant might have deliberately been
introduced as a mud-binder around pondages of the Kiewa Hydro-
electric Scheme. However, the Commission has informed us that
they have not used this species, so that its origin in the area is still
unknown.

L. palustris grows as a non-flowering aquatic in water up to 1 foot
deep, but is at its best as a terrestrial on wet or saturated mud
beside water. Here the plant spreads by rooting stolons to form a

H. I. Aston: Aquatic Angiosperms

171

prostrate mat, and becomes an excellent mud-binder. Flowers and
fruits are produced abundantly, and would presumably be easily
transported by water. Once established beside a river system, it
would spread rapidly, and this seems to have been the case along the
Ovens and Kiewa Rivers. It will be surprising if the species does not
extend down the Murray River within a short number of years, and
it can also be expected that it will establish itself in adjacent areas.
Dr. Barbara Briggs (pers. comm.) has informed me that it is not yet
recorded for New South Wales.

The ability of the species to spread rapidly is well-recorded for
New Zealand. Raven (1963, p. 403) writes “ The earliest record for
New Zealand seems to be from about 1929 (Allan, N.Z. J. Agr. 47:
311-313, 1933), when it was recorded from a few stations on the
North Island; it has spread explosively and now is found over the
entire North Island and locally on the South Island as well (Miss
Ruth Mason, pers. comm.) . Probably it was introduced into New
Zealand from Europe ”.

L. palustris is a native of North and Central America, Colombia,
and of much of Eurasia east to the Caspian Sea and northern Iran
and south through Spain, Italy, and Greece to northern Africa. As
well as Australia and New Zealand, it is also introduced in Hawaii
and southern Africa. See Raven (1963, p. 400).

A botanical description and illustration is available in Mason
(1957, p. 611 and fig. 279).

Myriophyllum brasiliense Cambess.

This South American species has now become naturally established
in Victoria in four areas within the vicinity of Melbourne, and has not
previously been recorded for the State. All four occurrences have
been located and kept under observation by Mr. Ian Tankard, a
teacher at Albion State School, who brought specimens to the
National Herbarium for identification and who has supplied full
information concerning them. These occurrences are:

(a) Studley Park, Kew, approx. 3 miles E.N.E. of Melbourne
G.P.O. — in the Yarra River just upstream from its junction with
the Merri Creek. In 1961 three large clumps each approximately
30 x 10 feet in area, plus minor areas of growth, were located
growing luxuriantly in water from 1 to 5 feet deep. Visits
during the summer months of January and February 1963 and
1964, showed the clumps to be persisting. Winter visits during
1964 showed marked alteration in growth, the emergent foliage
vanishing between March and September visits, leaving only bare
submerged stems. A further November visitation showed new
growth emergent, and re-covering of the original areas.

(b) Royal Park, approximately 2\ miles N. of Melbourne G.P.O.
— immediately west of the Zoological Gardens. In March 1963,
many small, dense patches were located along a small tributary
of the Moonee Ponds Creek. In March 1964 this luxuriant
growth was again present, but between then and September the

172

H. I. Aston: Aquatic Angiosperms

emergent foliage died back completely as in the case of the
Studley Park colonies. During May 1965 similar die-back was
observed again.

(c) Carrum, approximately 20 miles S.E. of Melbourne G.P.O.
— in the vicinity of the Wells Road Bridge over the Patterson
River. In May 1964 many clumps, the largest about 30 x 12 feet
in area, were located in and along the river both up and
downstream from the bridge, occurring on damp ground or in
shallow waters up to 2 feet deep. Emergent growth was quite
luxuriant, and the plants were in flower (female flowers only) .
The same situation existed in September, with plants still
flowering, and November also showed luxuriant growth. Further
searching in May 1965 has shown that occurrences may be more
extensive than at first observed. The colonies are scattered over
at least 500 yards of the river’s length.

(d) Mordialloc, approximately 15^ miles S.S.E. of Melbourne
G.p.O. — in Mordialloc Creek and an adjoining drain at a position
half a mile upstream from the Creek mouth, and less than half a
mile from Mordialloc railway station. In January 1966 four small
clumps, each about 3 to 5 feet in width, were found over a
space of 50 yards. Growth was quite luxuriant and some female
flowers were present. The water at this point is still subject to
tidal influence and was somewhat brackish, while surrounding
ground supported salt-loving species such as Salicornia australis,
Cotula coronopifolia, Triglochin striata, and Selliera radicans.
This area is approximately miles from the Carrum occurrence.

In view of the above observations it would seem that M. brasiliense
has been naturalized around Melbourne for some years, but over-
looked, and it is likely that more occurrences will eventually be
located. The species is known in the aquarium trade and cultivated
in ornamental pools, and it is not surprising to find it as a naturalized
escape. Spread within Australia must be by vegetative means, for
male flowers are unknown in this country and hence fruits are non-
existent. The winter die-back shown by the Royal and Studley Parks
colonies is interesting, and could assist in preventing rapid and
troublesome spreading in the colder climates of south-east Australia.
It is possible however, that these die-backs were only co-incidental
with the season, and that other factors such as stream pollution
could be responsible. The Carrum colonies have shown over-winter
luxuriance. Further observations are necessary to clarify this point.

Australian occurrences of M. brasiliense are confined to the Eastern
States. Curtis (1956, p. 190) records it as local in fresh-water ditches
at Bellerive, Tasmania, but in 1964 (pers. comm.) indicated that it
may soon be eliminated from that locality by building programmes.
It has been recorded in several New South Wales localities, the
N.S.W. National Herbarium having specimens from Centennial Park,
Sydney, 1908; Murwillumbah, 7.1910, Tweed Shire Council Clerk,
“ Sent as a dangerous weed threatening to become a pest like the
water hyacinth”; Tweed River, 5.1911, “Said to be plentiful but it

H. I. Aston: Aquatic Angiosperms

173

may become a trouble to navigation”; Byron Bay, 11.1940; Gosford,
5.1941; Hannam Vale via Taree, 10.1951, “Blocking up a creek”;
Armidale, 4.1964, “Growing on edge of dam,” and also cultivated
specimens from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. These localities cover
the eastern near-coastal areas of the State from Sydney northwards
to the Queensland border, and from the comments quoted from the
herbarium labels there is an indication that in warmer waters the
species can become troublesome. This is supported by information
forwarded by Mr. S. L. Everist, Government Botanist at the Brisbane
Herbarium, regarding occurrences in Queensland. Mr. Everist advises
in correspondence that it is known to occur in Currumbin Creek and
Upper Tallebudgera Creek in the extreme south-eastern corner of
Queensland, and in a couple of places in the Mooleolah River west of
Caloundra, i.e., 40-50 miles north of Brisbane. It is quite an
agressive plant at these localities.

A botanical description and illustration is available in Mason (1957,
p. 615 and fig. 280) .

Sagittaria graminea Michx. var. weatherbiana (Fernald) Bogin.

During 1964 almost simultaneous collections of a species of
Sagittaria were made in Victoria and in New South Wales. As
material within Australian herbaria is inadequate for the determination
of members of such a difficult genus, identifications were made by
reference to Bogin (1955), who published a complete revision of the
genus. New South Wales collections were determined by Dr. Barbara
Briggs of the N.S.W. National Herbarium, and the Victorian collection
by myself. In each case the collection proved to be North American
S. graminea var. weatherbiana, both the species and variety previously
being unrecorded for Australia. Details of occurrence are:

Aston No. 1215, collected by the author on 5 June 1964, in Nine
Mile Creek at Wunghnu (5 miles south of Numurkah) in north-
central Victoria. Here the species was growing, flowering and
fruiting abundantly, for 50 yards both up and downstream from the
road bridge at Wunghnu. A search was made for any further
colonies along the stream, and sampling done in nearby areas along
creeks which form an interconnecting system with the Nine Mile
Creek. The species was not located elsewhere and would seem to
be well-established but localized at Wunghnu. However, further
searching may produce fresh colonies.

N.S.W. No. 65392, collected B. Briggs, 20 July 1964, at Casula,
on the banks of the Georges River and near the railwav station,
i.e., ca. 20 miles W.S.W. of Sydney. It occurs also at Liverpool,
about 3-4 miles N.E. of Casula, and further searching may lead to its
location in other areas along the river.

Acknowledgements

Those people who have helped in the gathering of material or of
data necessary for the completion of this account are mentioned
where appropriate in the text, and I would like to extend my gratitude

174

H. I. Aston: Aquatic Angiosperms

to them for their ready assistance. In addition my thanks are
extended to Mr. K. Mair, Director of the New South Wales National
Herbarium, for forwarding on request material of Myriophyllum
brasiliense for examination, and to both the State Electricity
Commission of Victoria and Mr. Zallar of the Soil Conservation
Authority for pursuing the question of the origin of Ludwigia
palustris.

References

Bogin, C. (1955)— Revision of the genus Sagittaria (Alismataceae ) .

Mem. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 9 2 : 179-233.

Curtis, W. M. (1956) — The Student’s Flora of Tasmania. Pt. 1.
Mason, H. L. (1957) — A Flora of the Marshes of California.

Raven, P. H. (1963) — The Old World species of Ludwigia (including
Jussiaea ) , with a synopsis of the genus ( Onagraceae ) . Rein -
wardtia 6 4 : 327-427.

In Muelleria I 2 : 111-112 (1959), paratypes of Brachycome

tetrapterocarpa and B. dimorphocarpa were ascribed to the herbarium
of Waite Agricultural Research Institute (Adelaide) . These specimens
were destroyed by fire at Armidale, N.S.W., before the author of the
two species (Dr. Gwenda L. Davis) distributed them, as intended.
Fortunately, other paratypes had already been lodged at the National
Herbaria of both Melbourne and Sydney, and they remain intact.

AUSTRALIAN CHARACE/E WHICH SURVIVED THE
ARMIDALE FIRE

by

R. D. WOOD* and MARY B. WILLIAMS!-

Introduction

On 23rd February, 1958, a fire swept through the botanical
laboratories of the University of New England, Armidale, New South
Wales, Australia, destroying the valuable herbarium. Among the
collections were the assembled specimens of Characece from Australian
herbaria on loan to the junior author (nee Mary Beth Macdonald)
then engaged in monographic work for her dissertation. Of greatest
value was the group from the Royal Botanic Gardens and National
Herbarium, Melbourne, which included the collections of Ferdinand
von Mueller and other early botanists; while a number of important
sheets, especially Gunn’s specimens, were from the Royal Botanic
Gardens and National Herbarium, Sydney. The collection from the
Botanic Museum and Herbarium of Queensland, Brisbane, on which
J. Groves and Allen’s (1935) report was based, was not in Armidale
at the time, and is completely intact. By a strange coincidence, the
fire burnt away the floor, and the cabinet on which the entire pile
of Characece had been lying was tipped over into water accumulating
from the fire hoses. A colleague entered the gutted building shortly
after the blaze was controlled, and, finding the pile of Characece only
moderately disassembled, brought the wet heap out en masse. The
junior author separated and dried the papers and specimens to prevent
ungal damage, and assembled parts of specimens to avoid further
loss by misplacement. The pile of folders had been seriously burnt
on the outside, but the centre portions of many sheets were untouched
so that a considerable portion of the specimens survived. The labels
remained intact in many cases, but some had become unpasted and
were misplaced or lost, while others were more or less completely
burnt. Annotations which had been done with the ballpoint pen
frequently had run, become bleached, or had even become transferred
to adjacent paper, revealing apparently serious defects of this type of
ink. Pencil-written labels and those done with India ink were, on the
other hand, quite legible. The junior author undertook to reunite
labels and specimens and to record as much of the data as could be
gleaned from the more severely burnt labels. Unfortunately her
records and study notes, which would have been invaluable in this
effort, were also lost in the fire. The senior writer visited Armidale
m November, 1960, and the entire collection was gone over coopera-
tively^ All^ available data were typed in duplicate, and all clues used

SchoUr^^eO-M 1 ; 1 Department R ' [ - U S Albright

of NS W - AUStra ' ia <Madeay Fellow

175

176 R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived

the Armidale Fire

to ensure accuracy in reuniting labels and specimens. The data were
then assembled into the following list which was subsequently checked
by both authors.

A rough check on the nature of the loss as a result of the fire can
be made by comparing this list of surviving specimens with a list of
specimens expected to be present on the basis of the literature.
Among the missing items are the specimens of Chara submollusca,
Nitella myriotricha, N. pseudo flab ellata and N. hookeri, collections
of Tepper (Adelaide area), Robertson (Wimmera area), and most of
those by Drummond and by Preiss (Western Australia). It would
appear that somewhat more than two-thirds of the records may have
survived. In addition, the junior author’s entire personal collection
was destroyed; whereas, the Queensland specimens, as mentioned
above, were not in Armidale, and thus were untouched.

The assembled Australian collections of Characece have become
of potential critical taxonomic importance. The majority of new
species from Australia were described by Alexander Braun in 1849
and 1852 from the early collections of Ferdinand Mueller, Stuart,
Preiss, Gunn, and Drummond; but his entire collection, which included
the original specimens of these species, was destroyed at Berlin-
Dahlem in World War II. The senior writer sought original material
in European herbaria in 1956; and, although able to locate some
isotypes at Kew, Lund, and Stockholm, no duplicates of a number of
the original specimens could be found. He undertook to check the
Australian herbaria in the hope of locating some originals, but was
informed that most collections and all of the Melbourne specimens
were lost in the Armidale fire. On visiting Australia, however, it was
learned that the junior writer was engaged in the chore of salvaging
some specimens which had survived. It was at this time that the
writers pooled their efforts and knowledge to complete the labels,
prepare this report, and facilitate the return of the specimens. Some
of the specimens are doubtless isotypes, and some may prove to be
the only examples extant.

The specimens are listed serially by number and grouped alpha-
betically according to the name which appeared on the label, and do
not necessarily agree with current usage. Unnamed plants are listed
after the named collections in each genus. For each collection, the
data, where available, include the collector’s name and number, date
of collection, locality, a statement on condition of specimen, notes on
the labels and annotations, and occasional remarks. Varieties and
forms are not listed as main headings, but rather are included with
notes on the specimens. Such infraspecific taxa are grouped alpha-
betically toward the end of the series of named specimens within
each species. Original collection data are quoted verbatim, and the
liberty was taken of translating certain passages which were in foreign
languages. Information missing from the surviving label is reinserted,
where obtainable; but such inserted data are set off by brackets to
indicate they are the authors opinions. Many gaps were easily

R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived 177

the Armidale Fire

reconstructed from data on labels of other duplicates or of collections
made at about the same time. For revisions in nomenclature, the
reader is referred to Wood (1952). Cross references are made by
the number assigned to each entry. Abbreviations used include
“ c.” = approximately (circa) ; “ Coll.? ” <= collector when the name
is unknown; “ spec.” = specimen; “ No.” - number; “ (MEL) ” =
National Herbarium of Victoria, Melbourne; “ (NSW) ” = National
Herbarium of New South Wales, Sydney; compass points are used
without punctuation (e.g., N, S, E, and W) unless quoted; mbw =
Mary B. Williams and rdw =- R. D. Wood. Abbreviations for the
labels used by the Melbourne herbarium include Ferdinand Mueller’s
“ Phyt. Mus. Melb.” for Phytological Museum of Melbourne, “ Bot.
Mus. Melb.” for Botanical Museum, Melbourne, and “ Nat. Herb.
Viet.” for National Herbarium of Victoria, all of which are now re-
ferable to the National Herbarium of Victoria (MEL) . The term
“ unicum ” seems to have been used to indicate cases where only one
sheet was thought to exist, although a number of exceptions were
found. Mueller’s name was abbreviated in numerous ways, such as
“ ferdmull.,” “ Dr. M.,” “ Mil.,” “ Ferd. Mull.,” “ F. v. M.,” “F. v.
Mull.,” “ F. Mueller,” and “ F. v. Muller ”; and in the present list the
name of Mueller has been spelled out by insertion of the necessary
letters enclosed in brackets. Most of the specimens on loan from the
Sydney Herbarium were labelled “ W. H. Archer’s Herbarium of
Tasmanian Plants,” were collected by R. C. Gunn, and were marked
“ Ex HERB. HOOK.” Reference is occasionally made to the junior
author’s annotations, mostly dated 1955 and signed as “ M. B.
Macdonald.”

The writers are indebted to many associates who have helped in
locating collection sites from the brief available data, especially to the
following: J. H. Willis, Assistant Government Botanist, National
Herbarium, Melbourne; S. L. Everist, Government Botanist, Botanic
Museum and Herbarium, Brisbane; Miss C. M. Eardley and Dr. H. B. S.
Womersley, Department of Botany, University of Adelaide.

Enumeration

CHARA AUSTRALIS R. Br.

(1) Coll.? Feb. 1853. In lagoons on the Honeysuckle Creek.

[Doubtless Ferdinand Mueller, in Broken River, Benalla,
Victoria (see Zaneveld, 1940:125, footnote 3)] (MEL) —
spec.: singed, but intact; annotated by Macdonald, 1955,
as “ var. nobilis.”

(2) Coll.? Jan. 1853. In lacunis ad Yarra flumen [doubtless

Ferdinand Mueller, in Yarra R„ Melbourne, Victoria]
(MEL) — spec.: intact; annotated by Macdonald, 1955, as
“ var. nobilis." Note: mixed with Nitella sp.

(3) Mrs. Martha Heal. 1890. Interior of West Australia (MEL)

— spec.: intact; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb. as “ a nobilis ,”
and annotated by Macdonald as “ very like the type
for P. [ rotochara ] australis, and seems likewise to lack
bracts ”.

178 R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived

the Armidale Fire

(4) J. Cameron. 1891. Snowy River, [at or near Orbost,

Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb.
as “ a nobilis.”

CHARA BATRACHIOIDES F. Muell.— (see No. 29, 32, 34)

CHARA BEHRIANA F. Muell.— (see No. 7)

CHARA CONTRARIA A. Br. ex Kutz.

(5) Phillip Bracebridge Wilson. Oct. 13, 1883. Gannon

[doubtless Yarram] Creek [vicinity of Queenscliff, Victoria]
(MEL) — spec.: intact, with Tolypella glomerata; annotated
as “ C. contraria, verisimili v. australis, sporis immaturis ”
by Nordstedt. See also No. 31.

(6) Ferd. Mueller 5. Oct. [18] 51 . — >■ Cudnaka [now Kanyaka,

between Wiliochra and Hawker, South Australia] (MEL)
— spec.: only fragments in cellophane packet; annotated
“ var. australis ” by Mueller.

(7) Dr. Mueller, date ? In fonte vallis subsalsi, Salts gully

with [?], prope Bethanien [Bethany near Tanunda, South
Australia] (MEL) — spec.: intact; annotated as “var.

Behriana Ferd. Mueller; unicum ”, and also as “ Chara
Behriana Ferd. Mueller.”

CHARA DICHOPITYS A. Br. — (see also C. preissii, C. hookeri and
C. microphylla)

(8) Dr. M [ueller]. Jan. 1853. Darebin Creek, west Port Phillip

[vicinity of Melbourne, Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: intact.
Note: with C. fragilis.

(9) Coll. ? 4. date? Portland [doubtless Ch. Stuart, 1848, Portland,

in the Georgetown region, near mouth of Tamar River,
Tasmania; see spec. No. 38 and 44] (MEL) — spec.: tiny
fragment; labelled Bot. Mus. Melb. as “ C. Hookeri,
unicum.” See also No. 38 and 44.

(10) W. Fitzgerald. 1893. Tasmania (MEL) — spec.: intact;

labelled as “a Preissii. ”

(11) Coll? date ? Murray River [SE Australia, but where on the

river?] (MEL) — spec.: tiny piece; label missing, only

Nordstedt’s annotation as “a Preissii .”

(12) Coll.? 1875. Mount Emu Creek. [Ferdinand Mueller, Mar.-

Apr. 1875, Western Volcanic Plains, Victoria] (MEL) —
spec.: 2 small scraps; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb., label half
burnt.

CHARA FRAGILIS Desv.

(13) Coll? Jan. 1853. In the Darebin Creek [doubtless Ferdinand

Mueller, vicinity of Melbourne, Victoria] (MEL) — spec.:
intact; label singed.

R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived 179

the Armidale Fire

(14) Coll? Jan. 1853. In the Darebin Creek [doubtless duplicate

of No. 13; Ferdinand Mueller , vicinity of Melbourne,
Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: intact. Note: mixture of two
species, probably C. gymnopitys and C. fragilis — mbw.

(15) Coll? date? Near Station Peak [doubtless J. P. Fullagar ,

1865-68. You Yangs N from Geelong, Victoria] (MEL) —
spec.: intact; label singed. Note: mixed with Nitella
Ihotzkyi; possibly 1854 — see No. 59 and 65.

(16) Coll? [ Ferdinand Mueller?] 51. Jan. 28, 1848. locality? [in

German script, not yet translated, but near Adelaide,
South Australia, since Mueller was at Holdfast Bay on
Jan. 31, 1848] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled as “ var.
laxa ” apparently by Mueller.

(17) W. Woolls. date? Nepean River [vicinity of Sydney, New

South Wales] (MEL) — spec.: 2 tiny scraps; labelled Bot.
Mus. Melb., as “ unicum.”

(18) F. M. Reader, date? locality? (MEL) — spec.: partly burnt;

label half burnt. Note: mixture of 2 Charas and a Nitella
— rdw.

CHARA GYMNOPITYS A. Br.

(19) Leary. 1892. Port Jackson [vicinity of Sydney, New South

Wales] (MEL) — spec.: intact; annotated as “junior” by
Nordstedt.

(20) W. H. Cusack 18 [18]95. Harding River, N. W. Australia

[At Port Walcott, Western Australia] (MEL) — spec.: one
small plant; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb. as “ Chara
gymnopitys a f. aequistriata micracantha microteles
microptila laxa inferne . . .” doubtless from Nordstedt’s
information.

(21) El Leary 2. 1892. Port Jackson [vicinity of Sydney, New

South Wales] (MEL) — spec.: one plant in packet.

(22) Coll? date? locality? (MEL) — spec.: intact; label uncertain,

two are available and it is uncertain which belongs to the
specimen. It might be No. 585.

(23) Rev. Dr. Woods, date ? Par[r]amatta [vicinity of Sydney,

New South Wales] (MEL) —spec.: lost; labelled Phyt.
Mus. Melb. as “ unicum.”

(24) Nyulasy. 1888. Ord River [NE Western Australia] (MEL) —

spec.: intact; packet half burnt; annotated “ sporis

immaturens.”

(25) Th. Weir. 1888. Shoalhaven River [SE New South Wales]

(MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb.;

annotated “ 3. Chara gymnopitys. I have only met with
3198/66.— 3

180 R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived

the Armidale Fire

one little clump of this plant, it is submerged, growing in
rapid running water . . . Ch. gymnopitys sterilis,” and on
the packet is annotated “ Die grossere Chara = Ch.
gymnopitys, die verworrene = Nitella interrupta. Wohl
auch aus Schoalhaven River ?”

(26) Coll. ? 562 [572 ?]. date ? [probably Ch. Stuart at South Esk

R., Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled Phyt. Mus.
Melb. as “ Chara macropogon probably from Stuart or
Oldfield ” [in light ink] and “ probably Tasmania, Ch.
Stuart ” in Mueller’s heavy ink. Nordstedt annotated
“ Chara gymnopithys A. Br., major caudata sporis imma-
turis, sed verisimiliter ad var. acanthopithys persitenens
[spelling?]. Unicum.”

(27) C. Weldon Birch. 1892. Tate River, N.E. Australia [WNW

of Cairns, Queensland, see No. 143] (MEL) — spec.: intact;
labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb. as “ f. aequistriata laxior
gracilor . ...”

(28) Ch. Stuart 219. date ? Moreton Bay [vicinity of Brisbane,

Queensland, probably Feb. 1858, see No. 35] (MEL) —
spec.: one plant; labelled with two distinct scripts, and a
German annotation not legible to me — rdw.

(29) Coll. ? 583. April [year?, probably 1849]. Stagnant water

in South Esk River [Tasmania, probably by Stuart ] (MEL)
— spec.: intact; annotated “ Ch. batrachioides Ferd.

Mueller ” probably by Mueller.

(30) D. Boyle, date ? [between 1865 and 1872]. Blackburn

Creek near Port Phillip [vicinity of Blackburn, an eastern
suburb of Melbourne, Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: intact,
huge material with branchlets to 2 cm. long; labelled Phyt.
Mus. Melb. with text in pencil overwritten with ink, and
not clear, also as “ unicum ”.

(31) Coll. ? Oct., 3, [18] 83. Lass[o?]m Creek [doubtless Yarram

Creek, vicinity of Queenscliff, Victoria] [probably by
Bracebridge Wilson, who collected C. contraria (No. 5)
and T. glomerata (No. 5) in the same vicinity] (MEL) —
spec.: intact; annotated “ sterilis (spor junior) f. aquis-
triata valde crassa ” by Nordstedt, as “ unicum ”.

(32) Dr. M[ueller]. April, 1848. Haud procul a lacu Victoriae

in aquis pigris [i.e., not far from Lake Victoria in sluggish
water, near mouth of Murray River, South Australia]
(MEL) — spec.: a few small examples; labelled “ Ch.

batrachioides Ferd. Muell.” by Muellerf?]. Note: A

number of specimens and papers labelled “ C. batra-
chioides ” assembled, and marked “ A rdw; for date,
see No. 55.

R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived 181

the Armidale Fire

(33) A. Oldfield 9. date ? [March, 1859]. In the South Hutt

River, [Western Australia] (MEL) — spec.: 2 fairly large
pieces; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb. as “ unicum
annotated “ f. aquistriata micracantha precaudata 1
cetera [?] macroptila vel microptila 1. meioptila ” by
Nordstedt.

(34) C. Wilhelmi. Dec., [18]57 [possibly 51?]. In aquis

stagnantibus plagai Devils Country [?] N. Holl. austr.
[South Australia] (MEL) — spec.: intact; annotated “ Chara
batrachioides Ferd. Muell.” by Mueller.

(35) Ch. Stuart 220. Feb., 1858. Stagnant water. Enoggera,

Moreton Bay [vicinity of Brisbane, Queensland] (MEL) —
spec.: intact.

(36) Ferd. Muell[er]. Feb., [18]50. locality? [probably near

Adelaide, South Australia] (MEL) — spec.: not definite (2
questionable specimens and 3 labels) ; labelled “ f. brachy-
phylla ”, and as “ Chara subtilis Ferd. Mull.” by Mueller.

(37) Stuart, date ? Tasmania (MEL) — spec.: not definite (2

questionable specimens and labels) ; labelled “ f. major ”

CHARA GYMNOPUS* A. Br.

(37a) W. H. Cusack. 1895. Harding River, N.W. Australia [at
Port Walcott, Western Australia] (MEL) — spec.: small

fragment enclosed in folded label, intact; labelled Phyt.
Mus. Melb. as “ C. gymnopus* A. Br. (fortasse nov. var.) .”

CHARA HOOKERI A. Br. — (see also C. dichopitys)

(38) Coll. ? 4. date ? Tasmania [doubtless Ch. Stuart, 1848. Portland

in the Georgetown region near mouth of the Tamar R.]
(MEL) — spec.: intact; see also No. 9, which gives
“ Portland ”, and No. 44.

CHARA INCONSPICUA F. Muell.— (see No. 55).

CHARA LEPTOPITYS A. Br.

(39) F. Mueller. April, 1875. Mount Emu Creek [Western

Volcanic Plains, Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled
Phyt. Mus. Melb. as “ unicum ”. Note: not typical

material — rdw.

(40) C. Walter. Oct., 1888. Tattiara country [near Bordertown,

South Australia] (MEL) — spec.: intact tiny plants;

determined by Nordstedt.

CHARA LEPTOSPERMA A. Br.

Possibly written “ Gymnopitys ”, not clearly legible — rdw.

182 R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived

the Armidale Fire

(41) E. Palmer 152. date ? [probably c. 1882]. Mitchell River

[N Queensland] (MEL — spec.: intact; labelled Phyt.

Mus. Melb. as “ grows in still fresh water, floating under-
neath surface in shallow pools, very common in all Mitchell
waters ” by Palmer; annotated as “ doubtful ” by
Nordstedt.

(42) Coll ? [doubtless C. W. Nyulasy]. 1888. Ord River [NE

Western Australia] (MEL) — spec.: badly burnt; label half
burnt.

CHARA MACROPOGON A. Br. — (see Lamprothamnium macropogon )

CHARA MICROPHYLLA F., Muell. ex Kutz. — (see also C. dichopitys
and C. hookeri )

(43) St[uart ] 558. Feb., 1849. In fluvio South Esk. Tasmfania]

(MEL) — spec.: parts are intact; annotated as “ Chara

Hookeri A. Braun ”.

(44) Ch. Stuart 4. 1848. Tasmania (MEL) — spec.: intact; label

burnt (see No. 9 which indicates “ Portland ”, also No. 38).

CHARA MUELLERI A. Br. — (See also C. scoparia )

(45) F. M. Reader, date ? locality ? [possibly New South Wales]

(MEL) — spec.: intact; label burnt. Note: mixture of two
Charas — mbw.

CHARA MYRIOPHYLLA F. Muell. ex A. Br.

(46) C. Stuart 581 [587?]. April, 1849. South Esk River

[Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: 2 fragments mixed with

another species of Chara; labelled “ This Chara is a very
rare one unlike [others of its] family it does not appear
in masses, but singly and at a distance — not from the
bottom of the river, but from the banks at the side ” by
Stuart.

(47) Coll ? 562. Feb. [1849]. In South Esk River [Tasmania]

[doubtless C. Stuart, Feb., 1849, see No. 46 and 62] (MEL)
— spec.: one small piece; label consists merely of notes

on card. Note: for date, see No. 62.

(48) Coll ? date ? Tasmania [doubtless C. Stuart, see No. 44]

(MEL) — spec.: 4 pieces of which one is a large, fine

example.

CHARA PREISSII A. Br. — (see also C. dichopitys)

(49) F. M. Reader. Jan., 12, 1902. In “ Whitton Swamp ”

[Lake near Warracknabeal, Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: intact,
large and fine specimen; label half burnt.

R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived 183

the Armidale Fire

(50) L. Preiss. Feb., 1839. In alveo coenosat fluminis

“ Avon ” terrae superioris, ab aboriginibus “ Berrelangin ”
dictae [i.e., a boggy shallow place on high ground of the
River Avon at the place called “ Berrelangin ” by the
aborigines] Western Australia (MEL) — spec.: 3-4 small
pieces.

(51) Ferd. Mueller. 1853. Darebin Creek [vicinity of Melbourne,

Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: 2 rather dissimilar pieces, one

of which more closely resembles No. 50, and might
have been mixed during reassembly after the fire.

(52) Dr. Ferd. Mueller. [18]59 [probably 1853]. Golgol, Austr.

felix [Gol Gol, near Mildura, SW New South Wales]
(MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled as “ f. major polyphylla ”

presumably by Mueller.

CHARA PSILOPITYS A. Br. ex Nordst.

(53) A. T. Vogan. 1889. Mulligan River [near border of SW

Queensland] (MEL) — spec.: several pieces; labelled

“ p Drummondii. Spores matura non visa ” possibly by
Nordstedt.

CE1ARA SCOPARIA Chev. — (see also C. muelleri)

(54) El. Leary. 1892. Port Jackson [vicinity of Sydney, New

South Wales] (MEL) — spec.: only a few scorched

fragments survived; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb. and
annotated “ p Muelleri ” by Nordstedt.

(55) Dr. F. M u[eller]. April 28, 1848. In aquis quiet non finoral

a lacu Victorian [not legible] [near mouth of Murray
River, South Australia] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled

“ var. Muelleri ”, annotated “ C. inconspicua Ferd. Mull.”
by Mueller.

CHARA SUBTILIS F. Muell.— (see No. 36)

CHARA SUCCINCTA A. Br. in Asch.

(56) R. Helms. May 5, 1891. Kootanoorinna, South Austra.

[ = Cootanoorina Station (fide Burbidge, 1950: 11), north
central South Australia, c. 28° S. lat., c. 136° E. long.]
(MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb.

CHARA sp.

(57) Coll. ? Summer, 1865. Bason of the Cataract at.... [rest

obscure] (MEL) — spec.: intact. Note: is C. australis,

and possibly 1st Basin, Launceston, Tasmania — rdw.

t Not clearly written; possibly “ Aqua subsalsa ” — rdw.

184 R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived

the Armidale Fire

(58) Coll.? date ? Golgol [Gol Gol, near Mildura, SW New

South Wales; probably Ferdinand Mueller, Dec. 1853]
(MEL) — spec.: intact, excellent; annotated as “monoe-

cious ” by ?.

(59) Coll. ? 52. 1854. Near Station Peak [vicinity of Geelong,

Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: lost; label half missing. See

No. 65 for locality, and possible duplicate.

(60) Coll. ? date ? locality ? (MEL) — spec.: intact; label singed

and Macdonald’s annotation destroyed. Note: apparently
mixture of C. globularis and C. gymnopitys — rdw.

(61) Coll? 50. date? Murray River, Swan Hill [NW Victoria]

(MEL) — spec.: lost; label half burnt.

(62) Ch. Stuart 562. Feb., [18]49. In fluvio South Esk River

[Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: intact; label partly burnt. See
No. 47 for duplicate.

(63) Miss Warburton. 1896. Gordon River, W.A. [Western

Australia] (MEL) — spec.: one scorched plant; label half
destroyed.

(64) [J.] Bracebridge [Wilson]. Oct. 10, [18]8[3]. Coryule [?]

[doubtless Corio Bay, vicinity of Geelong, Victoria] (MEL)
— spec.: intact; label destroyed. See No. 5 for missing

data. Note: C. globularis? — rdw.

LAMPROTHAMNIUM MACROPOGON (A. Br.) Ophel (commonly
treated as Chara macropogon)

(65) Dr. M[ueller] 52. date ? In aquis subsalsis prope Station-

Peak, near Port Phillip [vicinity of Geelong, Victoria]
(MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled as Chara macropogon.

Note: No. 59 suggests this was collected in 1854; possibly
a duplicate.

(66) J. Drummond, date ? W.A. [Western Australia] (MEL) —

spec.: intact; labelled Bot. Mus. Melb. as “ unicum.”

Note: rather stout, perhaps mixed.

LAMPROTHANIUM sp.

(67) Coll? 148. 1854. In Sermvion Vellijoule. Ves . . . Cove

[not legible] [locality?] (MEL) — spec.: badly scorched;

label badly bleached and burnt.

NITELLA ACUMINATA A. Br. ex Klitz.

(68) Ch. W. Birch. 1892. White Water, near Mt. Albion, N.E.

Austr. [N Queensland, see No. 143] (MEL) — spec.: one

tiny specimen in small pack.

(69) W. Persieh 5. 1887. Endeavour River [near Cooktown,

Queensland] (MEL) — spec.: small wad; labelled Phyt.

Mus. Melb. as “ f} subglomerata ”.

R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived 185

the Armidale Fire

NITELLA AEMULA A. Br.

(70) Dr. F. M[ueller] 2. April 28, 1848. In aquis stagnantibus in

vicinis montis Barkeri [i.e., in stagnant water in vicinity
of Mount Barker, South Australia] (MEL) — spec.: intact.
Note: bicellulate.

NITELLA BIFORMIS A. Br.

(71) Coll ? 426. date ? Yantara Lake [doubtless by W. Bauerlen,

Oct.-Nov., 1887. Far NW New South Wales] (MEL) —
spec.: tiny scraps; labelled “ Nitella conglobata [3 biformis,
female sporis immatures Note: resembles N. tenuis-

sima in appearance.

NITELLA CONGESTA (R. Br.) A. Br.

(72) Coll. ? date ? Lake Leven [locality?] [possibly on Leven R.

in N Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: lost, of the two found in

the folder after the fire one was C. australis from Cataract,
1865 (see No. 57) and the other Leichhardt’s Nitella of
Nov. 25, 1843 (see No. 149).

NITELLA CONGLOBATA A. Br.— (see also N. Ihotzkyi )

(73) Lewis, date ? Goulbourne River [apparently Victoria rather

than New South Wales, based on No. 136] (MEL) — spec.:
intact; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb.

(74) F. v. M[ueller]. 1853. Lake Colac [Victoria] (MEL) — spec.:

fair, wadded; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb. as “ Chara —
Nitella conglobata oc Lhotzkii ( = Ihotzkyi ) female ” as
“ unicum ”; annotated “ Nitella conglobata ” in different
script. Ref.: Nordstedt, 1888: 12.

(75) Oldfield, date ? [March, 1859]. Moore’s River [ = Moore

River] West[ern] Australia [c. 50 miles north of Perth]
(MEL) — spec.: only a few fragments; label largely lost,
a remaining bit shows “....ae Dr. M. 502 ” but also
labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb. as “ unicum ” and as “ var.
Lhotzkyi ” probably by Mueller.

(76) W. D. Cusack. 1895. Harding River, N.W. Australia [at

Port Walcott, Western Australia] (MEL) — spec.: lost;

labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb. as “ var. Lhotzkyi ” in small
script in black ink.

(77) Dn. Sullivan 37. 1893. Lake Buningong, Kira [?, doubtless =

River] Hopkins [possibly L. Bunijong, c. 20 miles SW of
Ararat, Victoria, near Hopkins River] (MEL) — spec.: a

few fragments; labelled with 3 different scripts, as
“ oc Lhotzkyi ”.

NITELLA CRISTATA A. Br. — (see Williams, 1959)

(78) Rev. J. Bufton. date ? [c. 1893]. Port Arthur, Tasmania]

(MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb.

R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived

the Armidale Fire

(79) Rev. Dr. Woolls. date ? Par[r]amatta [suburb of Sydney,

New South Wales] (MEL) — spec.: lost; labelled Phyt.

Mus. Melb.; annotated by Macdonald, 1955, as “ branchlets
2-furcate, dactyls mostly 3-celled. 3 unripe oogonia which
are clustered at both branchlet furcations, fertile whorls
somewhat contracted ”. Also sketches are included.

(80) C. T. Musson 579 [575?]. date ? Swamp Creek, Hanging

Rock Ninole [spelling?] N[ew] S[outh] W[ales] (about
3,500 feet above sea) (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled in
script unknown to writers, probably Musson’s.

(81) Ch. Stuart 5. [1848]. Tasmania (MEL) — spec.: intact,

sterile; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb.

(82) Coll ? [ Stuart ] 219. Dec. 25, 1848. Stagnant water, near

South Esk River [Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: intact.

(83) Coll ? [Stuart]. Dec., [18]48. South Esk [River] at Perth,

[Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: one intact, plus scorched

fragments, label is torn; annotated by Macdonald, 1955, as
“ male and female, fertile. Fertile whorls contracted, no
mucus, oospore 320-330 ^ [long], 5 prominent spirals,
membrane granulate and warty (not clear)”.

(84) Coll ? [Stuart] 217 [214?]. Dec. 25 [23?], [1848]. Running

stream, South Esk River [Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: poor
material, intact; annotated by Macdonald as “ looks like a
C. australis, sterile ”.

(85) Coll ? [Stuart] 788. [1848]. South Esk River [Tasmania]

(MEL) — spec.: intact; annotated by Macdonald as “ N.

breviteles ? ”.

(86) Wilcox. Nov., 1878. Clarence River, NE coast N.S.W.

[New South Wales] (MEL) — spec.: destroyed; labelled
“ Schlechter ex [ample] vielleicht Nitella cristata male Oder
eine nahe stehende species ” [i.e., poor example, perhaps
male N. cristata or a similar species — Nordstedt].

(87) Coll. ? date ? locality ? (MEL) — spec.: some parts not

destroyed; label largely burnt, the legible parts appearing
to read “ [Ch]ara australis .... out mis jud .... cristata
Al. Br

(88) Ch. Stuart, date? Tasmaniae (MEL) — spec.: lost; labelled

Phyt. Mus. Melb. as “ unicum. . . . stagnant water.
Note: both fit Stuart 219, except that it was not a

solitary specimen (unicum) .

(89) Miss W. J. Smith. 1892. Murray River [where along river?]

(MEL) — spec.: scorched badly.

R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived 187

the Armidale Fire

(90) Leary. 1892. Port Jackson [vicinity of Sydney, New South

Wales] (MEL) — spec.: intact, includes four, three of

which Macdonald numbered 2, 3, and 4; labelled by
Nordstedt; annotated “ brachyteles ” on some labels, and
includes Macdonald’s study data.

(91) Ch. Stuart, date ? Moreton Bay [vicinity of Brisbane,

Queensland] (MEL) — spec.: a few fragments; labelled

Phyt. Mus. Melb. as “ verisimiliter (sterilis!)” by
Nordstedt (?) .

(92) R. Helms. Nov. 17, 1891. In dam. Karoling, Western

Australia [now Karalee, c. 119° E. long., 31° S. lat. — fide
Burbidge, 1950: 137] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled with
field notes, and Phyt. Mus. Melb. label.

(93) F. v. M[ueller]. Oct, 1875. Edwards River [near Deniliquin,

SW New South Wales] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled

Phyt. Mus. Melb., marked “ unicum ”, torn.

(94) Ch. Stuart 751. date ? [Nov., 1848]. St. Paul’s River,

Tasmfania] (MEL) — spec.: intact; annotated with

Macdonald’s study data.

NITELLA DIFFUSA A. Br.— (see Williams, 1959)

(95) Ch. Stuart, date ? New England [NE New South Wales]

(MEL) — spec.: badly scorched, but fertile parts intact;

annotated with Macdonald’s study data.

(96) Coll. ? date ? locality ? (MEL) — spec.: intact: labelled

as “ Nitella sp. ad N. diffusa accedens ” by Nordstedt,
and as “ unicum ”; annotated with Macdonald’s study data.

(97) Coll.? date ? N[ew] S[outh] Wales. (MEL) — spec.: one

suitable specimen survived; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb. as
“ unicum ”; annotated with Macdonald’s study data.

(98) Leary 5. 1892. Port Jackson [vicinity of Sydney, New

South Wales] (MEL) — spec.: a few parts survived,

enough for study; annotated with Macdonald’s data and
sketches.

(99) Coll.? date ? locality ? (MEL) — spec.: a few fragments

suitable for study, with two slides of the granulate oospore
membrane; labelled by Nordstedt; annotated with
Macdonald’s study data.

(100) Reader, date ? Near Dimboola [, Victoria] (MEL) — spec.:

intact; label badly burnt; annotated “ looks like N.
ge'atinosa ” by Macdonald.

(101) Reader, date ? locality ? (MEL)— spec.: intact; label

burnt.

188 R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived

the Armidale Fire

NITELLA GELATINOSA A. Br.

(102) Stuart 560. Jan., [18]49. Charae . . . boggy water near

Mersey River [N central Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: intact.
Ref.: Nordstedt, 1889; 13, as “ ad podostachyam

accedens ”.

(103) Coll. ? [ Stuart ] 1027. date ? locality ? [South Esk River,

Launceston, Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labels

uncertain. Note: of the two labels, neither seems to fit,
one states “ South Esk River, Jan., 49 ” (date as in No. 102)
and the other states “ var. cryptostachya. Mersey.
Tasmania. C. Stuart 559 ” (as in No. 111). For data
for 1027, see No. 113.

(104) Ch. Stuart 582. date ? Aquis fluentibus ad FI. South Esk

River [Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: lower parts survived;

labelled with some German script not yet translated.

(105) Dr. Mueller. Oct., [18]52. In fossis ad flumen Yarra [in

ditch near the Yarra River, vicinity of Melbourne, Victoria]
(MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled on sheet, and accompanied
by letter from A. Braun, 1853, which is half burnt.

(106) Dr. Mueller. date? Capaspe River [Campaspe R., W

Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: several loose, stringy plants.

(107) Coll. ? date ? locality ? (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled

with two labels, one with “ 21. Is that in fruit, or is it the
ova of frogs? Fruit! Nitella gelatinosa ”, while the other
is Nordstedt’s annotation.

(108) F. M. Reader. Nov. 7, 1893. In a pool W. of river [Wimmera

R.] near Dimboola [Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: intact.

(109) F. M. Reader. Nov. 11, 1900. In a spring, Lochiel [near

Dimboola, W Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: intact.

(110) Ferd. Mueller. Jan., [18]47 [must be 48]. In fluvis

Torrens, Nov. Holl Austr. [vicinity of Adelaide, South
Australia] (MEL) — spec.: intact, small; labelled as “var.
cladostachya ” [by whom ?]. Note: this may actually be
specimen Dr. F. Mueller 501.

(111) C. Stuart 559. date ? [Jan., 1849, see No. 102]. Boggy

waters, Mersey River, Tasmania (MEL) — spec.: intact;

labelled as “ var. cryptostachya A. Br.” [by whom ?], and
Phvt. Mus. Melb. as “ Chara gelatinosa var.

cryptostachya ”.

(112) Coll.? [C. Stuart ] 752. Nov., 1848. Brookshead [ = at head

of brook?] St. Paul’s River, [Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.:
intact with two duplicates; labelled as “ var. microce-
phala ” [by whom?].

R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived 189

the Armidale Fire

(113) Stuart 1027. date ? South Esk River, Launceston,

Tasmaniae (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled “ f. opaca”

[by whom?]. Note: two specimens marked 1027, the one
as “ unicum ” provides the data.

(114) Coll.? [Ch. Stuart ]. Jan., [18]49. Mersey River [Tasmania]

(MEL) — spec.: two unburnt; labelled “ var. podostachya ”.
Note: other specimens collected about same time are No.
102 and 111.

NITELLA GLOEOSTACHYS A. Br.

(115) F. M. Reader. Nov. 28, 1894. In a spring, Lochiel [near

Dimboola, W Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: intact.

NITELLA GUNNII A. Br. ex Nordst.

(116) Coll.? [Ch. Stuart] 1025. Dec., [18]49. Stagnant water, W.

[of?] Deloraine, [Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled
merely as “ Nitella Gunnii ”, but Braun (1852: 704) treats
as var. fastigiata.

(117) Coll? [doubtless Stuart], date ? South Esk River,

Launceston [Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: intact, plus four

parts in a scorched cellophane packet.

(118) D. Sullivan. Feb., 1881. Moyston near the Grampians, [W

central Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: intact, but incomplete;

labelled as “ ft fastigiata ” in script presumably Nordstedt’s
while two other scripts state “ Moyston. ...” (Sullivan’s?)
and “near the Grampians....” (Mueller’s). Note:
specimen is large and coarse, quite unlike No. 116 and
117, and mixed with Chara.

NITELLA HYALINA (DC.) Ag.

(119) E. Palmer 54. date ? [1882], Found in shallow water near

Mount Bromsprings [ = Goodsprings ?], Flinders River
[N central Queensland, near Gulf of Carpentaria] (MEL)
— spec.: three pieces; label seems to refer to a phanerogam
rather than to a Charad.

(120) E. Leary 10. 1892. Port Jackson [vicinity of Sydney, New

South Wales] (MEL)— spec.: intact; labelled only with

Nordstedt’s annotation “ spor. junior ”.

(121) Coll? [C. W. Nyulasy], 1888. Ord River [NE Western

Australia] (MEL)— spec.: intact, small; labelled as

“ Nyulasy, comm. F. v. Muller ”.

NITELLA INTERRUPTA A. Br. ex Leonh. — (now treated as N
leonhardii) .

(122) J. B. Wilson. Sept. 22, [18]83. Near Port Phillip [vicinity

of Geelong, Victoria] (MEL)— spec.: includes three of
which the one marked “ I ” seems correct while “ II ” and
“ 111 ” appear to be different species; labelled Phyt Mus
Melb. J

190 R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived

the Armidale Fire

(123) L. Rodway. Nov. 1895. Pond at Sorell Creek, South Eastern

Tasmania (MEL) — spec.: two fair but fragmentary;

labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb.; annotated by Macdonald as
“ very large heads. Apparently male, very large
antheridia

(124) Ch. Stuart [4?]. 1850. South Port, Tasm[ania] (MEL) —

spec.: two intact, fair; labelled as “ unicum. ... 4 ”, but
includes two sheets; annotated by Nordstedt.

NITELLA LEPTOSTACHYS A. Br.

(125) Rudder. Aug., 1895. Manning River [E New South Wales]

(MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb. as

“ perhaps with Diatomeae ”; annotated by Macdonald as
“ oospore 288 fx long ”.

NITELLA LHOTZKYI (A. Br.) A. Br. — (see also N. conglobata var.
Ihotzkyi )

(126) F. M. Reader. Jan. 12, 1902. In “ Whitton ” Swamp [lake

near Warracknabeal, Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: excellent.

(127) Dr. M [ueller] 52. Jan. 13, 1848. In Torrens [River] bei Nord

[spelling?] [vicinity of Adelaide, South Australia] (MEL)
— spec.: two pieces, one a good mount; labelled with

German script not yet translated.

(128) Coll.? date ? locality ? (MEL) — spec.: intact, excellent;

labelled Nat. Herb. Viet, but entirely burnt except for
identification; annotation by Dolsky [ = Lhotzky ?], burnt
except the words “ Bicellulatae female, ripe oog. probably
heteroclemae ”.

NITELLA MICROPHYLLA A. Br.

(129) Oldf[ield] 560. date [1859?] Blackwood [River] W. Aust.

[Western Australia] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled as

“unicum”. Ref.: Nordstedt (1888: 182) cites specimen
as “ comm. F. Mueller 1867 ”, so date must be prior to 1868.

NITELLA POLYCEPHALA (A. Br.) Kutz.

(130) Dr. Mueller 3 [?]. Oct., 1852. In flumine Yarra [River in

vicinity of Melbourne, Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: intact;

labelled as “ Chara ” and “ unicum ”; annotated by Nord-
stedt as “ Wahrscheinlich Nitella polycephala ”.

(131) Dr. Mueller. Oct., 1852. In flumine Yarra [River in vicinity

of Melbourne, Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: two intact;

annotation, partly burnt, states “ Nitella gelatinosa var.
polycephala A. Braun 1853 ”.

R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived 191
the Armidale Fire

NITELLA POLYGYRA A. Br. ex Kutz.

(132) Dr. L. Preiss. date ? Nov. Holland, austro-occid [SW

Australia] (MEL) — spec.: intact, though sheet is burnt
on left side and packet of fragments is scorched; labelled
“ Nitella polygyra n. sp. affinis Nitellae syncarpa ” in
Braun’s script.

(133) G. French. Sept., 1887. Port Phillip [vicinity of Melbourne,

Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: six sheets slightly burnt;

annotated by Macdonald, 1955, with numbers including
variously one or more each of N. polygyra, N. penicillata,
and N. cristata.

NITELLA REMOTA A. Br.

(134) G. French 1. date ? Growing in fresh water at Box Hill

[vicinity of Melbourne, Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: intact;

labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb. as “ near Port Phillip ”
annotated by Macdonald as “ spores like [N.] cristata.
Dactyls pluricellulate ”.

NITELLA SONDERI A. Br.

(135) Rev. Dr. Woolls. 1880. Hawksbury River [vicinity of

Sydney, New South Wales] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled
Phyt. Mus. Melb. as “ unicum

(136) Lewis 6. date ? Avenal [ = Avenel]. Goulbourne River

[Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb.
as “ Chara ” and as “ N. sonderi ”; annotated by Macdonald
as “spore 200-230 /x long”. Ref.: Nordstedt (1889: 24).

NITELLA STUARTII A. Br.

(137) Coll? [Stuart]. Nov., [18]48. Nile Rivulet [E central

Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: lost ?, two packets with label
having only a Chara near C. gymnopitys — rdw.

(138) C. Stuart, date? Tasmania (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled

as “ 13 ” by Mueller.

NITELLA SUBTILISSIMA A. Br.

(139) Drummond, date? W.A. [ = Western Australia] (MEL) —

spec.: intact; labelled Bot. Mus. Melb. Note: mixed with
Lamprothamnium — rdw.

NITELLA TASMANICA F. Muell. ex A. Br.

(140) Ch. Stuart 218. Dec., 1848. In aquis fluentis ... ad

fluvium ... South Esk River [vicinity of Launceston,
Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled in small script
(Stuart’s) and annotated in bold script (Nordstedt’s) .

192 R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived

the Armidale Fire

(141) P. Eckert. [18]83. Wimmera [region of Wimmera R., W

Victoria] (MEL) — spec.: intact.

(142) [Ch. Stuart]. [18]49. South Esk River w. [ = west of ?]

Perth, [Tasmania] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled “ Ferd.
v. Muller ”. Note: a number 218 has been inserted in

this folder. It is conceivable that this is a duplicate of
that collection.

NITELLA TRICUSPIS A. Br. (now treated as N. dregeana )

(143) Ch. W. Birch. 1892. White Water, near Mount Albion.

N. Austr. [at head af Tate River, c. 65 miles E

of Cairns, Queensland] (MEL) — spec.: a tiny scrap on
mica slide; labelled by Nordstedt. Note: writing looks

like “ Bird ”, but collector was certainly Birch.

NITELLA TUMIDA Nordst.

(144) A. T. Vogan. date ? In heissen* Salzquellen am Mulligan

River [i.e., in a hot saltwater spring bore on the Mulligan
River, SW Queensland] (MEL) — spec.: intact; labelled
Phyt. Mus. Melb. det. O. Nordstedt.

NITELLA sp.

(145) Miss Landsborough. date ? Towomba [ = Toowoomba, SE

Queensland] (MEL) — spec.: intact, and includes a No. 6
and a No. 11 (fair condition); labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb.;
annotated by Macdonald, 1955, as “ pluricellulate, perhaps
N. cristata ”.

(146) Oldf[ield] 7. date ? [March, 1859]. Wet places near the

Moore River [Western Australia, c. 50 miles N of Perth]
(MEL) — spec.: fragments; labelled in pencil notes, also a
“ unicum ” and “ 7 ” in ink; annotated by Macdonald as
“ bicellulate? ”.

(147) Persieh 535. 1882. Endeavour River [near Cooktown,

Queensland] (MEL) — spec.: two wads, labelled as

“ Nitella sp., sp. nov. ad N. tenuissima accedens ”; annota-
tion by Nordstedt is scorched, but states “ Nitella fortasse
nov. sp. ad N. tenuissima accedens ”.

(148) Mrs. Gribble. Oct [Nov.?] 10, 1895. Mount Bellenden Ker

[c. 40 miles S of Cairns, Queensland] (MEL) — spec.:
intact, but mere scrap; labelled Phyt. Mus. Melb. as
“ Nitella nov. sp.” [by whom?]; annotated by Nordstedt as
“ diarthrodactyla, homoeophylla, dioica, gymnocarpa?,
fructificatione nulla in dionera [?] foliis femina, gracilis ”.

Not clearly written; possibly “ kleinen ” — rdw. Nordstedt read it as “ hot

R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived 193

the Armidale Fire

(149) Leichhardt. Nov. 25, [18]43. In the creek, running water,

near Archers [i.e., Mr. Archer’s Creek, at Durundur (fide
Blake, 1955: 18) now the vicinity of Woolooga, c. 3 miles
NW of Gympie, Queensland] (MEL) — spec.: intact, fair
wad.

TOLYPELLA GLOMERATA (Desv. in Lois.) Leonh. — (see No. 5)

After the manuscript was completed, the junior author located a
number of additional specimens which had also survived the fire.
These were from the National Herbarium of New South Wales,
Sydney. The data were transmitted to the senior writer, edited, and
are added below without his further verification. They are to be
returned to the Sydney herbarium.

CHARA FRAGILIS Desv.

(150) R. Gunn. Dec., 1840. Derwent River, Tasmania (NSW)

— spec.: missing; labelled Herb. NSW; annotated t( Chara
fragilis Desv.” by ?.

(151) R. Gunn. Dec. 18, [18]40. Derwent [River] above New

Norfolk [Tasmania] (NSW) — spec.: small piece in slit
paper; annotated “ R. Gunn, Tas.” by ?.

(151a) R. C. Gunn. date? locality? (NSW) — spec.: intact;

labelled “ Ex Herb. Hook. — 7. Ch. fragilis”.

CHARA GYMNOPITYS A. Br.

(152) R. C. Gunn. date? Tasmania (NSW) — spec.: intact;

labelled “ [C.] gymnopitys A. Br.” by ?, “ Ex Herb.
Hook[er] ”, and “ Herb. Archer.”.

(153) R. Gunn. date ? Tasmania (NSW) — spec.: intact;

labelled “ R. Gunn ” in corner of sheet, with data on
another duplicate; annotated in broad script.

(154) R. Gunn 1568 [or 1560]. Jan. 20, 1843. Cimitiere PL,

George Town, Tasmania (NSW) — spec.: intact; label in
two scripts, partly burnt.

(155) R. Gunn 1573. Dec. 18, [18]40. Derwent River, Glen Leith,

Tasmania (NSW) — spec.: intact, good, fertile.

(156) R. Gunn 1568. Dec. 21, [18]44. South Esk [River], Perth,

Tasmania (NSW) — spec.: intact.

CHARA LEPTOPITYS A. Br.

(157) Coll. ? date? locality? (MEL?) — spec.: intact, good fertile

material; label lost. Note: adhering to scorched sheet

marked “ . . . [Ch] ara leptopitys ”, marked “ unicum ”,

and in heavy brown paper species cover of kind sent from
(MEL) .

194 R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived

the Armidale Fire

(158) R. C. Gunn, date ? Tasmania (NSW) — spec.: a loose

wad, rather scorched; labelled “ Ex Herb. Hook., Hab.
Tasmania annotated “ Chara leptopitys A. Br.” by ?,
and marked “ 4 Ch. leptopitys ” on the “ Herb. Archer ”
label.

CHARA MOLLUSCA A. Br.

(159) R. Gunn. Jan., 1841. Lake St. Clair, Tasmania (NSW) —

spec.: intact, small wad; annotated as “ Seen by J. Groves
(16-10-30) ”.

CHARA MYRIOPHYLLA F. Muell. ex A. Br.

(160) R. Gunn, date ? Rfiver] Derwent, Tasmania (NSW) —

spec.: intact, but scorched; annotated “ Chara myriophylla
F. v. M.”, and also as “ Seen by J. Groves 16-10-30 ”.

(161) R. Gunn 1572. Feb. 13, [18]45. Source of the Derwent,

Lake St. Clair [, Tasmania] (NSW) — spec.: largely intact,
includes one wad and three small bits; annotated as
“ growing in mud in source of Derwent . .

(162) R. Gunn, date ? Tas[mania] (NSW) — spec.: half burnt,

good material; label mostly burnt, but folder marked “ C.
myriophylla ” by Macdonald.

(163) R. Gunn 1560 [1568?]. Jan. 20, [18]43. Cimitiere Plains,

George Town, Tasmania (NSW) — spec.: largely intact,
a large wad; labelled on a separate paper as “ In brackish
water with Ruppia ” in a fine script.

(164) R. Gunn 1568 [or 1560?]. Oct. 23, [18]44. Brickhole,

Cimitiere PI. [Georgetown, Tasmania] (NSW) — spec.:
lost; label loose in folder with No. 165.

(165) R. Gunn 1568 [or 1560?]. Jan. 1, [18]45. Distillery Creek,

Launceston [Tasmania] (NSW) — spec.: slightly scorched.

(166) R. C. Gunn, date ? locality ? [doubtless Tasmania] (NSW)

— spec.: loose wad burnt at one end; labelled Herb. Archer
and “ Ex Herb. Hook. ”.

NITELLA GELATINOSA A. Br.

(167) R. C. Gunn, date ? locality ? (NSW) — spec.: one small

piece; labelled Herb. Archer and “ Ex Herb. Hook.”.

NITELLA GLOEOSTACHYS A. Br.

(168) R. Gunn 1566. Dec. 18, [18]40. Derwent [River], Glen

Leith [, Tasmania] (NSW) — spec.: intact, including a
loose wad (see No. 170).

(169) Coll . ? [R. Gunn ?]. Nov. 4, [18]44. Formosa [vicinity of

Cressy, Tasmania] (NSW) — spec.: intact. Note: after
fire, found in same folder as No. 168.

R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived 195

the Armidale Fire

(170) Coll. ? [R. Gunn ?]. March [May ?] 20, [18]42. S[outh] Esk

[River], Launceston [, Tasmania] (NSW) — spec.: missing;
label unattached, possibly belonging with the loose wad
in No. 168.

(171) R. C. Gunn, date ? locality ? [Tasmania] (NSW) — spec.:

large scraps with fertile heads; labelled Herb. Archer and
“ Ex Herb. Hook.”; annotated as var. major by Macdonald.

NITELLA GUNNII A. Br.

(172) R. Gunn. Dec. 21, [18]44. South Esk [River], Perth,

Tasmania (NSW) — spec.: intact, with dense globular

whorls; label partly burnt; annotated “ Nitella Gunnii ” in
large script.

NITELLA HOOKERI A. Br.

(173) R. Gunn. Jan. 4, [18]43. York Town, Tasmania (NSW)

— spec.: large dark wad, somewhat scorched.

(174) R. C. Gunn, date ? locality ? [Tasmania ?] (NSW) —

spec.: few small scraps on back of a blank Herb. Archer
label; two labels with conflicting data, one with “ Hab.
Tasmania. Coll. R. C. Gunn ” and the other “ Nitella
Hookeri var. Tasmanica ”. The previous data, obviously
cut away from one label, states “ Nitella Hookeri A. Br.,
Kerguelen Land ”. Note: the “ Kerguelen ” label probably
refers to an earlier collection. Critical examination of the
specimen is needed to determine which label is correct.

(175) R. C. Gunn, date? Tasmania (NSW) — spec.: half burnt,

mainly sterile scraps; labelled “ Ex Herb. Hook.”; annotated
“ Chara Hookeri ” by ?.

(176) R. C. Gunn 1567. Dec. 23, [18]45. Penciuite [a NE suburb

area of Launceston, Tasmania] (NSW) — spec.: partly

burnt, probably sterile.

NITELLA sp.

(177) Coll. ? [R. C. Gunn?]. Dec. 22 [25?], [18]44. Coquet [Loquis ?]

Rivulet, St. Patricks [River?l. Tas[mania] (NSW) —
spec.: adhering to scrap of paper partly burnt, label

partly burnt.

(178) Coll? [R. C. Gunn ?]. Dec. 2, [18]48. Poo’s of water,

Formosa [vicinity of Cressy, Tasmania] (NSW)— spec.:
three somewhat burnt sheets of which two are mixed
Chara and Nitella.

(179) Coll? [R. C. Gunn ?]. Feb. 1, [18]48. George Town Rivulet,

Tasmania (NSW) — spec.: large wad, scorched.

(180) R. Gunn. Sept. 30. [18]47. Tasmania (NSW) — spec.: few

small scraps of mixed Nitella or Chara and a phanerogam.

196 R. D. Wood and M. B. Williams: Australian Characece which Survived

the Armidale Fire

List of Collectors

W. Bauerlen, No. 71?; Ch. Weldon Birch, No. 27, 68, 143; D. Boyle, No. 30;
Rev. J. Bufton, No. 78; J. Cameron, No. 4; W. H. Cusack,* No. 20, 37 a, 76;
J. Drummond, No. 66, 139; J. P. Eckert, No. 141; W. V. Fitzgerald, No. 10;
G. French, No. 133, 134; W. P. Fullagar, No. 15?; Mrs. Gribble, No. 148; R.
C. Gunn, No. 150-180; Mrs. Martha Heal, No. 3; R. Helms, No. 56, 92; Miss

Landsborough, No. 145; El. Leary. No. 19, 21, 54, 90, 98, 120; Leichhardt, No.

149; Lewis, No. 73, 136; Dr. Ferdinand von Mueller, No. 1?, 2?, 6, 7, 8, 12?, 13?,

14?, 16?, 32, 36, 39, 51, 52, 55, 58?, 65, 70, 74, 93, 105, 106, 110, 127, 130, 131;

C. T. Musson, No. 80; C. W. Nyulasy, No. 24, 42?, 121?; A. Oldfield, No. 33,
75, 129, 146; E. Palmer, No. 41, 119; W. A. Persieh, No. 69, 147; L. Preiss,
No. 50, 132; F. M. Reader, No. 18, 45, 49, 100, 101, 108, 109, 115, 126; L.
Rodway, No. 123; A. Rudder, No. 125, Miss W. J. Smith, No. 89, Ch. Stuart,
No. 9?, 26?, 28, 29?, 35, 37, 38?, 43, 44, 46, 47?, 48?, 62, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 88, 91,
94, 95, 102, 103, 104, 111, 112?, 113, 114, 116, 117?, 124, 137, 138, 140, 142;

D. Sullivan, No. 77, 1 18; A. T. Vogan, No. 53, 144; C. Walter, No. 40; Miss
Warburton, No. 63; Th. Wier, No. 25; J. F. Wilcox, No. 86; C. Wilhelmi, No.
34; J. (also P.) Bracebridge Wilson, No. 5, 31?, 64, 122; Rev. Dr. W. Woolls,
No. 17, 23, 79, 135.

Literature Cited

BLAKE, S. T., 1955. Some pioneers in plant exploration and classification. Proc.
Roy. Soc. Queensland 66: rep. p. 1-19.

BRAUN, A., 1849. Charae Australes et Antarcticae, or characters and observations
on the Characece of Australia and the Southern circumpolar regions. Hook.
J. Bot. Ke w Gdn Misc. 1 : 193-203.

, 1852. Plantae Muellerianae. Linnaea 25: 704-709.

BURBIDGE, N. T., 1950. Some early Australian plant collections. Robert Helms
and the Elder Expedition collections. Australasian Herb. News 7: 10-14.
(mimeographed issue, available from author, C.S.I.R.O., Canberra, A.C.T ,
Australia) .

GROVES, J., and ALLEN, G. O., 1935. A review of the Queensland Charophyta.
Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland 46: 34-59, 3 fig.

NORDSTEDT, C. F. O., 1888. Einige Characeenbestimmungen. Hedwigia 27:
181-196, 2 PI.

, 1889. De Algis et Characeis. Lunds Univ. Arrskr. 25 (4) : 2-41.

WILLIAMS, Mary B., 1959. A revision of Nitella cristata A. Br. (Characeae) and
its allies. Pt. II. Taxonomy. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 84: 346-355.

WOOD, R. D., 1952. The Characeae, 1951. Bot. Rev. 18: 317-353.

ZANEVELD, J. S., 1940. The Charophyta of Malaysia and adjacent countries.
Blumea 4: 1-224, 20 fig.

Occasionally spelt “Cussack ,j on the labels.

SUPPLEMENTARY DESCRIPTIONS FOR TWO VICTORIAN

DESERT LICHENS

by

Rex B. Filson.*

Parmelia semiviridis (F. Muell. ex Nyl.) P. Bibby.

Writing in Muelleria Vol. I. No. 1 (page 60) the late P. N. S. Bibby
described this species and remarked “ ascus and spores wanting
Since Mr. Bibby’s contribution, good fruiting material was collected
by the present author at Rocket Lake, in the Sunset country of
north-western Victoria, and a description of the apothecia is as
follows:

Apothecia sessile constricted at the base, up to 2 mm. diam.,
deeply concave at first, becoming plane; Disk light brown to reddish-
brown; Margin elevated, crenulate, concolourous with the thallus;
Calyx very pronounced of vertical hyphae, 80-100 /x tall; Hypothecium
up to 80 ix thick in the centre; Hymenium 55-60 /x tall; Paraphyses
simple or branched, 4 \x diam.; Asci 40-45 x 10-12 /x; Ascospores
10 x 5 fx.

Colour reactions : K— , C— , KC— , P-f yellow becoming orange.

For distributional details see Bibby page 60.

Parmelia semiviridis, as usually found, is dry and rolled into small
balls with the undersurface outermost (see plate XI, fig. b.) . When
dampened, it soon flattens out resembling fig. a.

Parmelia amphixantha Mull. Arg.

Fruiting specimens of this dry-country lichen were recently
discovered in the Hattah Lakes District of north-western Victoria.
As far as known, this is the first occasion on which this widespread

* National Herbarium of Victoria.

197

198 Rex B. Filson: Supplementary Descriptions for Two Victorian Desert Lichens

lichen has been found in fruit. Dr. J. Muller of Argau, Switzerland
described the species in ‘ Lichenologische Beitrage No. 28 ’ from
specimens collected near Lake Albacutya, Victoria, by Charles French.
Dr. Muller’s type description, reprinted from Flora 71: 139, is as
follows:

1312. Parmelia amphixantha Mull. Arg., thallus gracilis, vix
mediocris, laciniatodivisus, utraque pagina albido-flavus; laciniae e
dichotomo pinnatipartitae, lacinulae patentes, bilobae aut bifidae,
priores 2-3 mm. latae, ultimae 1-1^ mm. latae, omnes subplanae,
subtus ob margines leviter recurvos concaviusculae, rhizinis
distantibus longis nigris v. subnigris laxissime adnatae, caeterum
nudae et undique laeves, intus albae. Apothecia ignota. — Similis
brasiliensi P. flavae Krplh. Lich. Warm. p. 373, sed divergenter
laciniata, subtus distanter et triplo longius rhizinosa et pagina inferior
haud piceo-nigra. — In Australiae orientalis prov. Victoria ad lacum
Albacutya: C. French.

This description can now be supplemented as follows:

Apothecia rara, in superficie thalli sessilia, ad basin constricta,
1-2 mm. diam. Discus concavus, undulatus, in colore ‘ Andorra ’
(teste Maerz & Paul) . Margo prominens, crenulatus, cum thallo
concolor. Hypothecium 40 /x crassum. Hymenium 50-55 n altum.
Paraphyses in duobus ramosi, ad apices expansi. Asci 10-18 x 35-40 n-
Ascosporae paulatim generatae, ellipsoideae, hyalinae, circiter 6 x 10 /x.

Thallus foliose forming rosettes on earth, up to 5 cm. diam.
Lobes dichotomously branched 1- 0-2-0 (-3-0) mm. wide. Upper
surface convex, matt, smooth or minutely rugulose with occasional
cracks on the older lobes, isidia and soredia absent, reed-green
(M&P) tips of the lobes brownish. Undersurface grading from reed-
green to dark-brown, sparsely rhizinate, rhizines dark-brown to black,
dull, simple or dichotomously branching. Upper Cortex 12-16 /x thick.
Algal layer discontinuous, cells 8-12 /<. diam. Medulla white,
compactly woven of hyphae 5 fx diam. Lower Cortex 20 ^ thick,
Rhizines 80 /x diam.

Apothecia very rare, sessile on the upper surface of the thallus,
constricted at the base, 1-2 mm. diam. Disk concave, undulate,
Andorra (M&P) Margin prominent, crenulate, concolorous with the
thallus. Calyx up to 40 ^ thick. Hypothecium 40 jx thick. Hymenium
50-55 ix high. Paraphyses dichotomously branched, expanded at the
apices. Epithecium light brownish. Asci 10-18 x 35-40 fx, 8-spored, an
occasional anomalous ascus with up to 12 spores. Ascospores poorly
developed, ellipsoidal, hyaline, about 6 x 10 fx.

Rex B. Filson: Supplementary Descriptions for Two Victorian Desert Lichens 199

Colour reactions : K— , C— , KC— , P+ yellow-orange, becoming
red-orange.

Castlemaine, F. Robbins 2-1943 (MEL 6300) ; Kulkyne National
Forest, R. V. Smith 26-9-1949 (MEL 10167) ; Gunbower Island, Murray
River, Rex Filson (6433) 14-6-1964 (MEL 10387) ; Hattah Lakes. Rex
Filson (7326) 14-6-1965 (MEL 10166).

NEW SOUTH WALES—

Nine miles south of Armidale, J. E. Begg 14-1-1952 (MEL 6212);
Echuca to Deniliquin road, 9 miles north of Moama, Rex Filson (5403)
12-10-1963 (MEL 10177); Parkes to Orange road, 16 miles east of
Parkes, Rex Filson (5496) 10-10-1963 (MEL 10176).

SOUTH AUSTRALIA—

Camp 7, west of Moolapinna Hill R. Helms (61) 23-6-1891 (MEL
6218); Ivy Cave, Nullarbor region, D. S. Kemsley 8-1-1952 (MEL
10180); 11 miles east of Koonalda H.S. J. H. Willis 18-10-1961
(MEL 10178); Yudnapinna R. W. Rogers (19) 11-2-1965 (MEL 10386).

WESTERN AUSTRALIA—

Camp 62 on the Ponton River, R. Helms (64) 27-9-1891 (MEL
6217); Fraser Range, R. Helms (3,44) 10-1891 (MEL 6211, 6214,
6216); Karolin, R. Helms (54) Dec . 1891 (MEL 6219); Banda road
north-west of Kalgoorlie, L. Smith 23-9-1951 (MEL 10179).

Parmelia amphixantha differs from P. semiviridis macroscopically
in having black rhizinae on the undersurface and in the fact that it
does not roll into small balls when dry. P. semiviridis is much more
robust in outward appearance and not as finely divided as P.
amphixantha which is illustrated on plate XII.

The author wishes to thank Mr. J. H. Willis, of the National
Herbarium Melbourne, for translating into Latin a description of the
apothecia of Parmelia amphixantha.

200 Rex B. Filson: Supplementary Descriptions for Two Victorian Desert Lichens

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Muller, J., 1888— Flora 71: 139.

Muller, J., 1892 — Hedwigia 31: 193.

Wainio, E. A., 1900 — Mem. Herb. Boissier No. 5, p. 7.

Zahlbruckner, A., 1930 — Cat. Lich. Univ. 6: 224.

Willis, J. H., 1951 — Mem. Nat. M us. Melb. 17: 64 (as P. congruens )
Bibby, P., 1955 — J. roy. Soc. W. Aust. 39: 29.

Explanation of Plate XI

Parmelia semiviridis (F. Muell. ex NyJ.) P. Bibby.

a. Portion of thallus in the flattened (dampened) state.

b. Portion of thallus in the rolled up (dry) state.

c. Portion of thallus showing apothecia.

d. Enlargement of apothecia.

e. Section through apothecium.

f. Enlarged section through apothecium.

g. Development of ascus.

h. Enlarged section through thallus.

i. Portion of older part of thallus showing lobules.

Explanation of Plate XII

Parmelia amphixantha Mull. Arg.

a. Thallus growing on surface of desert sand.

b. Enlargement of portion of thallus.

c. Showing the undersurface and rhizines.

d. Enlargement of rhizines.

e. Enlargement of apothecia.

f. Section through apothecium and thallus.

g. Enlarged section showing upper part of apothecium.

h. Development of ascus (top right showing an anomalous ascus, top left a partly

empty ascus with two mature spores).

i. Paraphyses.

j. Enlarged section through upper and lower part of thallus.

Rex B. Filson: Supplementary Descriptions for Two Victorian Desert Lichens 201

PLATE XI

202 Rex B. Filson : Supplementary Descriptions for Two Victorian Desert Lichens

PLATE XII

A BIBLIOGRAPHY OF “ BLACKFELLOWS’ BREAD ”,
Polyporus mylittae Cooke & Massee

by

J. H. Willis*

The densely compacted and agglutinated subterranean masses
formed by the mycelium of Polyporus mylittae are among the world’s
largest examples of fungal sclerotia. It is not uncommon for these
bodies to attain a diameter of 20-30 cm. and weights of 4 kilograms
or more. They have always been objects of curiosity to country folk
and scientist alike. The exceedingly hard perennial sclerotium is
dark, stone-like and finely wrinkled on the exterior, but in section it
appears creamy-white, coarsely and marmorately granular. Fructifica-
tions are rarely found; they may be induced, however, by keeping
fragments of a fresh sclerotium in a warm place. The mature
fruiting body is pileate (5-10 cm. wide), centrally stipitate, white or
tinged with pale yellow, smooth and soft to touch.

Although this remarkable endemic fungus is now known to occur
in temperate parts of all Australian States, it was apparently not
noted in literature before 1834 — 46 years after the initial settlement
— and the first account of a sporophore would seem to have been in
1892. Until that date its affinities were thought to have been with
the truffles (Tuberales ) , and Mylitta australis Berk. (1839) was the
name applied to it.

Habitat varies from the extreme of arid Mallee limestone tracts
to deep volcanic loams in mountain forests of high rainfall, and the
species is certainly more frequent in the latter environment. Perhaps
it is obligately associated with eucalypt roots, and thus independent
of soil type? Apparently it is of quite rare occurrence in Queensland,
South and Western Australia. Known localities for Polyporus
mylittae , culled from herbarium specimens, published records and
field notes, are as follows (localities being arranged from west to
east and from south to north, and collections in Melbourne Herbarium
being designated by the bracketed letters “ MEL ”) :

WESTERN AUSTRALIA (first recorded 1919) —

Denmark; Margaret River (both in Karri forest) .

SOUTH AUSTRALIA (first recorded 1904) —

Denial Bay; Myponga; Mypolonga district on Murray River.

VICTORIA (first recorded 1861) —

Lake Hindmarsh; Wimmera R.; Digby; Lake Condah; Nullawarre
near Childers Cove; Camperdown (photo, in MEL); Somerville-
Mern cks North-East Doncaster; Montrose; Dandenong Ranges at

* National Herbarium of Victoria.

203

204

J. H. Willis: A Bibliography of “ Blackfellows’ Bread ”

Fern Tree Gully, Kallista (MEL), Emerald & Cockatoo (MEL);
Beenak; Yarra Glen; Healesville (MEL); Warburton; Britannia Ck.;
Drouin; Noojee; Walhalla; near Tyers; Kardella near Korumburra;
Toongabbie; Rosedale; Sale & Maffra districts; Stockdale; Whitlands;
Beechworth (MEL) ; Yackandandah.

TASMANIA (first recorded 1834) —

Southport; Bellerive; Bothwell; Middle Arm on Tamar R.; Deloraine;
“ N.W. Coast ”; King Island.

NEW SOUTH WALES (first recorded 1851) —

Bombala; Wolumla, N. of Pambula; Braidwood; Sassafras; Barber’s
Ck. near Goulburn; Bundanoon and Robertson near Moss Vale;
Burragorang; Eastwood & Epping near Sydney; Mt. Wilson; Lithgow;
Bathhurst; Molong district; Mudgee; Lake Macquarie; Walcha; Coff’s
Harbour; Dorrigo; Oberon; Inverell; Wallangarra on Queensland
border.

QUEENSLAND (first recorded 1883) —

Toowoomba; Lamington National Park & Springbrook in far S.E.

NEW ZEALAND (first recorded 1965, presumably introduced with
eucalypt railway sleepers) —

Matapihi near Auckland.

The earliest note on this fungus (Backhouse, 1834) refers to its
use as an article of food by Tasmanian aborigines; but it is almost
incredible that such hard sclerotia could be eaten at all — in the young
fresh state they have somewhat the consistency of very rubbery
gristle, while dried examples are always as hard as horn. Native
tribesmen of the Camperdown district in western Victoria knew it as
“ Tandarook ”, a name now perpetuated in that of the old Curdie
homestead near the upper reaches of Curdie’s River.

No bibliography of literature concerning this fungus has been
published for more than 60 years (see McAlpine, 1904). In the
following chronological list of 75 references, prefixing asterisks (*)
indicate that an illustration accompanies the reference. The list is
believed to be fairly complete as to books and scientific journals, but
no search has been made of any newspaper files. Periodicals and
books are cited in Italic type:

1834.

BACKHOUSE, J. — On the roots and other indigenous esculents
of the Colony. Van Diemen’s Land Almanack [Apparently
the first mention of the fungus in literature — called “ Native
Bread ”].

1836.

HOOKER, W. J. — Compan. Bot. Mag. 2: 40 [A repetition of
Backhouse’s note of 1834, q.v.].

J. H. Willis: A Bibliography of “ Blackfellows’ Bread

205

1839

BERKELEY M J. — Contributions towards a flora of Van Diemen s
Land. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. 3: 325-26 [Original description
of the sclerotium, under the name Mylitta australis and
considered to be a member of the Tuberales ].

1841.

GUNN, R. C. — Remarks on the indigenous vegetable productions
of Tasmania available as food for man. Tasm. J. nat. Sci.
Agric. Statist, etc. 1: 48-49 [Short description of sclerote
and its mode of occurrence — virtually a re-publication of the
observations by Backhouse in 1834, q.v.].

1843.

BACKHOUSE, J. — Narrative of a Visit to the Australian Colonies.
Appendix D (“ Remarks on the indigenous vegetable
productions of Tasmania, available as food for man ) : xl
[A repetition of his observations in 1834 (q.v.), noting
“ Mylitta Australis (Native Bread) ” as a source of food for
Tasmanian aborigines].

1846.

BRETON, W. H. — Tasm. J. nat. Sci. Agric. Statist, etc. 2: 463
[Reference to a sclerote weighing 25^ lb.].

1848 (Dec.).

BERKELEY, M. J.—Gdnrs’ Chron. 1848: 829 [Brief note

concluding article on American “ Tuckahoe ”].

1850.

ANON. — Pap. roy. Soc. Tasm. (“ V.D.L.”) 1: 157, 174 [Brief
notes on specimens exhibited].

1851.

TULASNE, L. R.— Fungi Hypogaei 199 [A long description in
French of the sclerote, and Tulasne hints that the mycelium
is analogous to that of Polyporus tuberaster Fr. It is
recorded for the first time from New South Wales].

1854.

* CORDA, A. C. J. — Iconum Fungorum 6: 49-50, t. 9 fig. 93
[Long discussion of sclerote, with illustration of a section
and hyphae, under the name Mylitta australis].

1857.

BERKELEY, M. J. — Introduction to Cryptogamic Botany 254
(Note 250) [Edibility and uses of Mylitta australis].

206

J. H. Willis: A Bibliography of “ Blackfellows’ Bread ”

1859.

BERKELEY, M. J. — Fungi, in J. D. Hooker’s Flora Tasmaniae 2 :
277 [Record and brief comment].

1861.

MUELLER, F. J. H. — Aylyiu. Rep. Govt. Bot., Melbourne (Sixth
Systematic Index of Plants): 18 [First record for Victoria
of Mylitta australis ].

1873.

BERKELEY, M. J. — Australian Fungi. J. Linn. Soc. (Bot.) 13: 175
[Brief description of Mylitta australis var. minor which may
be, as suspected by Cleland & Cheel (1917), identical with
Polyporus minor -my littae Cleland & Cheel].

1878.

SMYTH, R. B. — The Aborigines of Victoria 1 (Vegetable Food) :
209 [Brief note on appearance of the “ native truffle ”].

1883 (Mar.).

COOKE, M. C. — Australian Fungi. Grevillea 11: 104 [Mylitta
australis recorded for four States — Tas., Vic., N.S.W., Qd.
(for first time)].

1884.

*SOUTHALL, W. — Note on a specimen of Mylitta australis. Year
Book of Pharmacy 524, with figure of transverse section;
also repeated in Pharm. J. ser. 3, 15: 210 (Sept. 1884)
[Maiden in 1893 considered this article to be “ the best that
has appeared on the subject ”].

1886.

TISDALL, H. T. — Fungi of North Gippsland, Part 2. Viet. Nat. 2:
109 [The first published reference to a fructification on
Mylitta australis, although Tisdall did not then realize its
significance].

1888.

BAILEY, F. M. — Synops. Qd Flor. Suppl. 2: 130 [Cook’s record
of 1883 repeated, with brief description of context of sclerote
— species known only from Toowoomba district].

1889.

MAIDEN, J. H. — The Useful Native Plants of Australia 46 [Brief
notes on character of sclerote and its use as food by
aborigines, under the name Mylitta australis].

1891.

COHN, F., and SCHROETER, J. — Untersuchungen liber Pachyma
und Mylitta. Abh. Naturw. Hamburg 11 2 13-14 [Description
of two pieces of sclerotia in Berlin Museum].

FISCHER, E .—Hedwigia 30: 61.

J. H. Willis: A Bibliography of “ Blackfellows’ Bread”

207

1892.

COOKE, M. C. — Handb. Aust. Fungi 249 [Short description of
sclerote and its distribution in four States].

COOKE, M. C. — A mystery solved. Gdnrs’ Chron. ser. 3, 12: 526
(Oct. 29) [The identity of Mylitta australis with a species of
Polyporus in the section Ovinus proved at last, by appearance
of a sporophore on a sclerotium].

COOKE, M. C., and MASSEE, G. — Australian Fungi. Grevillea 21:
37 (Dec.) [Original description of Polyporus mylittae — type
stated to be from South Australia, but the collection in Kew
was from Beechworth, Victoria — by J. W. Howard].

1893.

McALPINE, D. — Native Bread. Aust. J. Pharm. 8: 291-92 (Sept.)
[Various observations, bringing information on subject up-
to-date].

SACCARDO, P. A. — Mycetes aliquot Australienses. Hedwigia 32:
56 (Mar.) [An independent description of Polyporus mylittae,
but based upon material of P. portentosus from Western
Port, Vic.].

*MAIDEN, J. H. — Native Bread or Native Truffle (Polyporus
Mylittae C. et M.) . Agric. Gaz. N.S.W. 4: 909-912 (Dec.),
with 3 figs. [General discussion and resume of literature to
date].

1895.

SACCARDO, P. A. — Sylloge Fungorum 11 (Suppl. Univers.) : 83
[Description in Latin].

McALPINE, D. — Systematic Arrangement of Australian Fungi
40-41 (n. 691) [Listed with distribution and very brief

description].

1902.

*BAKER, R. T. — Contributions to a knowledge of the flora of
Australia, Part IV. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 27: 542-44, tt.
22-23 [Discussion of development of sporophores on a
sclerote from Lithgow, N.S.W., with two good photographs].

1904.

TISDALL, H. T. — Notes on the Native Bread, Polyporus mylittae.
Viet. Nat. 21: 56—59 (Aug.) [Article of general interest
summarizing personal observations].

McALPINE, D. — Bibliography of the Fungus Polyporus mylittae
Cooke and Massee. Viet. Nat. 21: 59-60 (Aug.).

*McALPINE, D. — Native or Blackfellows’ Bread. J. Dep. Agric.
Viet. 2: 1012-1020 (Dec.), with 5 photographic figs.

[Comprehensive paper on history, nature, edible qualities,
chemistry, fructification, origin of sclerotium, technical

208

J. H. Willis: A Bibliography of “ Black fellow s’ Bread ”

description and literature to date, accompanied by two plates
of sclerotia (all sizes) and three of fully developed
sporophores].

ANON. — Trans, roy. Soc. S. Aust. 28: 304 (Dec.) [Note on exhibit
by A. H. C. Zietz of a sclerote from Myponga — the first
undoubted record of Polyporus mylittae for South Australia].

1907.

O’CONNOR, D. — Mushrooms or Truffles? Qd agric. J. 19: 70
(Aug.) [Sizes and weights given for two sclerotia,
presumably from Queensland].

1908.

MAIDEN, J. H. — Records of Victorian Botanists. Viet. Nat. 25:
105 (Nov.) [Note on aboriginal name for fungus in Camper-
down district, viz “ Tandarook ”].

1911.

EWART, A. J. — Fruiting of “ Blackfellow’s Bread ” ( Polyporus
Mylittae Cooke). Proc. roy. Soc. Viet, new ser. 24: 59-60
[Discussion on conditions necessary for fructification].

LLOYD, C. G. — Synopsis of the Section Ovinus of Polyporus.
My cological Writings of C. G. Lloyd 3: 76, 92 (Oct.)
[Short notes on P. mylittae].

1912.

LLOYD, C. G. — Synopsis of the Stipitate Polyporoids. Myco-
logical Writings of C. G. Lloyd 3: 167 (Mar.) [Brief

mention of Polyporus mylittae].

LLOYD, C. G. — Mycological Notes No. 38. l.c. 4: 518 (Nov.)
[Comment on Ewart’s article of 1911 (q.v.)].

1913.

BAILEY, F. M. — Compr. Cat. Qd Plants 728 [Polyporus mylittae
listed as “ Stone Fungus ”].

1915.

LLOYD, C. G. — Letter No. 58. Mycological Writings of C. G.
Lloyd 4: 5 (July) [Description of specimen of Polyporus
mylittae from E. Cheel, N.S.W., with note that species
should be moved from Section Ovinus to Sect. Lignosus].

LLOYD, C. G. — Mycological Notes No. 69 Mycological Writings
figs. 728-732 (Dec.) [Notes, with 6 photographs of fruiting
material from E. Cheel, N.S.W.].

1917.

CLELAND, J. B., and CHEEL, E. — Notes on Australian Fungi,
No. IV. Polyporus, Fomes and Hexagona. J. roy. Soc. N.S.W.
51: 493 [Note on P. mylittae, also original description of the

J. H. Willis: A Bibliography of “ Blackfellows’ Bread ”

209

related sclerotiferous P. minor-mylittae which G. H.
Cunningham, 1965, considers to be inseparable from P.
mylittae].

1919.

PITCHER, F.— Viet. Nat. 35: 147 (Feb.) [Note on exhibit of
young sclerotes at Field Nats’. Club Viet. References to
previous exhibits will be found in Viet. Nat. 33: 111 (Dec.
1916) and 35: 45 (July 1918)].

CURRIE, C. C. (Miss)— Viet. Nat. 36: 112 (Dec.) [Note on
exhibit of specimen from Lardner, Vic.].

*CLELAND, J. B., and CHEEL, E. — Australian Fungi: Notes and
Descriptions, No. 2 — The sclerotia-forming Polypores of
Australia. Trans, roy. Soc. S. Aust. 43: 11-14, tt. 1-2
[Discussion, with lists of collections of both Polyporus
mylittae and P. minor-mylittae in Australian museums and
herbaria, accompanied by colour plate and two photographs
of P. mylittae which is recorded as Western Australian for
the first time, but without locality data].

1921.

HERBERT, D. A. — Contributions to the Flora of W.A., No. 2.
J. roy. Soc. W. Aust. 7: 70 [Second record of P. mylittae for
Western Australia — specimen from Denmark where “ fairly
often ploughed up ”].

1922.

*LEACH, J. A. — Australian Nature Studies 133, t. 52 fig. 7
[Paragraph and line-drawing of P. mylittae].

PESCOTT, E. E.— Viet. Nat. 38: 104 (Feb.) [Note on exhibit of
fructification at Field Nats’. Club].

1923.

BARNARD, F. G. A. — Polyporus mylittae. Viet. Nat. 39: 151,
159-160 (Mar.) [Note on exhibit, personal observations on
various collections, and discussion or origin of the first
sporophores to be examined — the roles of H. T. Tisdall and
Miss F. M. Campbell in elucidating the nature of the fungus].

LLOYD, C. G. — Mycological Notes No. 69. Mycological Writings
of C. G. Lloyd 7: 1216 (July) [Intimation that Saccardo’s
independent description of Polyporus mylittae, in 1893, was
actually based on a Western Port specimen of P.
eucalyptorum (i.e. P. portentosus ) in his herbarium at Padua,
Italy]. '

1924.

* LLOYD, C. G. — Mycological Notes No. 71. Mycological Writings
of C. G. Lloyd 7: 1260, fig. 2752 (Jan.) [Note and photograph
of a fruiting specimen of P. mylittae in Kew Herbarium —
from Ferntree Gully, Vic.].

210

J. H. Willis: A Bibliography of “ Blackfellows’ Bread”

1925.

ROLFE, R. T. & F. W. — The Romance of the Fungus World 178
[Brief note on “ native bread ” of the Australians].

HARDY, A. D. — Friends and foes of the forester. Gum Tree 8:
11 (June) [Brief mention].

1931.

*STUART-DOVE, H. — On the sporophore of the Native Bread
(Polyporus mylitta) . Pap. roy. Soc. Tasm. 1930: 94-95, t. 4
(Mar.) [Account of developing sporophore, during 25 days,
on a fresh sclerote from N.W. Coast, Tas., with two
photographs].

FRENCH, C., DALEY, C., & PITCHER, F.— Viet. Nat. 48: 2
(May) [Notes on exhibits of various specimens at meeting
of Field Nats’. Club Viet.]

1934.

* WILLIS, J. H. — “ Beef-steak ”, “Punk” and “Blackfellows’
Bread”. Viet. Nat. 50: 301, tt. 46-47, fig. 2 [Descriptive
paragraph on Polyporus mylittae, with two photographs and
a line-drawing].

1935 (June).

*CLELAND, J. B. — Toadstools and Mushrooms and other Larger
Fungi of South Australia. Part 2: 209, t. 9 [Full descriptions
of Polyporus mylittae and P. minor-mylittae, with reproduced
watercolour study of both species].

1941.

* WILLIS, J. H .—Victorian Fungi 62-63, t. 12 & fig. 13 [Brief
note on “ Blackfellows’ Bread ”, with photograph and line-
drawing of fruiting sclerotes].

1942.

BARRETT, C. L. — From a Bush Hut 102 [Conversational account
of a sclerote].

1943.

AINSWORTH, G. C., and BISBY, G. R.— A Dictionary of the Fungi
242 [Mention of Polyporus mylittae as a species of peculiar
interest]. Edition 5 in 1963 (p. 54, under “blackfellows’
bread ”) .

1948 (Apr.).

*MORRISON, P. C. — “ Blackfellows’ Bread ”. Wild Life , Melb.
10: 180 [Note and two photographs of sclerote].

J. H. Willis: A Bibliography of “ Blackfellows’ Bread ”

211

1949 (May).

MORRISON, P. C. — “ Blackfellows’ Bread”. Wild Life , Melb. 11:
227-28 [Notes on use for food by aborigines, from Karl
Glance’s literary researches].

1950.

* WILLIS, J. H. — Victorian Toadstools and Mushrooms 62-63,

t. 12 & fig. 13 [Details as for Willis 1941 (q.v.)].
CUNNINGHAM, G. H. — Australian Polyporaceae in Herbaria of
Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, and British Museum of Natural
History. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 75: 233 (Sept.) [Note that
only sclerotia are present at Kew].

1951.

* WILLIS, J. H.— Fungus friends and foes. Aust. Junior Encycl.

2: 719 [Brief note, with photograph of sclerotium].

1952 (Mar.).

STEWART, H. C. E. — Research on the fungus “ Blackfellow’s
Bread”. Viet. Nat. 68: 190 [Request for fresh sclerotia and
fruiting bodies for Plant & Soils Laboratory of C.S.I.R.O.,
Brisbane].

1957 (June).

* WILLIS, J. H. — Victorian Toadstools and Mushrooms ed. 2:

70 & 73, with two illustrations [Details as for Willis 1941 &
1950 (q.v.)].

1958.

WILLIS, J. H.— Fungi. Aust. Encycl. 4: 232 (Mar.) [Brief note].

*DANIELL, Thelma C.— “ Fascinating fungi ” in Your Garden
II 4 : 50 & 52 (Apr.) [Colour photo, of sclerote and brief

remarks].

1959 (Dec.).

STAHL, W.— “ Blackfellows’ Bread ”, an interesting fungus
( Polyporus mylittae ) . News Lett. Inst. For. Aust. 2 5 : 23-24.

1963 (Dec.).

*WILLIS, J. H. — Victorian Toadstools and Mushrooms ed. 3:
70 & 73, with two illustrations [Details as for Willis 1941,
1950 & 1957 (q.v.)]

1965 (Dec.).

*CUNNINGHAM, G. H— Polyporaceae of New Zealand. N.Z.
Dep. sci. industr. Res. Bull. 164: 81—82, fig. 12 [Detailed
description of sporophore, with notes on several collections
and line drawing of a New Zealand occurrence — presumably
introduced — in ballast of a railway track near Auckland.
Polyporus minor -mylittae Cleland & Cheel is relegated to
synonymy under P. mylittae].

3198/66.— 4

212

J. H. Willis: A Bibliography of “ Blackfellow’s’ Bread ”

PLATE XIII

Polyporus mylittae Cooke & Massee.

A. Small fructifications on sclerote — Photo.: late E. E. Pescott.

B. Hymenial and upper surfaces of large fructifications on sclerote — Photo.: late

H, T. Reeves.

A BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE “ GHOST FUNGUS ”,
Pleurotus nidiformis (Berk.) Sacc.

by

J. H. Willis.*

Throughout temperate Australia, in all but the more arid parts,
occurs a large white-spored agaric that is well known for the
luminescence of its fruiting bodies. The toughly fleshy sporophores
(about 2-6 inches wide) are borne in dense clusters up to 1 foot
broad — always against the base (or dead stump) of a tree. Individual
pilei are smooth, sometimes lobed and shell-like, with excentric,
distorted or lateral stipes and rather distant, long-decurrent, often
somewhat creamy gills. In early stages they often display sooty
purplish or bronze-brown colourations that may pale to suffusions of
mauve, pink or yellow on a whitish ground, as the pileus expands.
Mature specimens are sometimes almost entirely white, lacking the
characteristic tints. The pronounced odour is pleasant and bread-
like. Luminosity of the gills is at first so bright that one may read
newsprint held close to a sporophore, and in cool weather the light
will last for about a week with gradually diminishing intensity.

Eucalypts are the usual hosts, but this fungus has also been
found in association with Leptospermum, Banksia and Grevillea
species; in June 1965t it appeared at the base of a living Plane Tree
(Platanus acerifolia ) outside the Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne.
Fruiting bodies may be found after good rains at almost any season,
although chiefly during autumn and winter. In Victoria they have
been observed in such diverse habitats as Wyperfeld and Mount
Buffalo National Parks, the former mallee tract with an annual
rainfall of only 13 inches and the latter subalpine area (at ± 4,600
feet) with more than 60 inches.

The earliest account of an Australian occurrence, but without
any botanical name, would seem to have been in a letter to Sir
William Hooker by James Drummond of Toodyay, W.A., on 2 July
1841. This was published in Hooker’s London Journal of Botany
(1842). Drummond had found the agaric growing on the “stump
of a Banksia tree near the jetty at Perth ”, and had seen it for the
first time about 6-7 years previously; when he showed a glowing
specimen to some aborigines, at night, they were afraid, crying
“ Chinga! ” (i.e. spirit) . The following year (1843) Hooker published
Drummond’s notes on a further occurrence near the Vasse River
(far south-west') and in 1844 Rev. M. J. Berkeley described one of
Drummond’s collections under the name Agaricus nidiformis. There-
after, during the next 30 years, Berkeley described what are almost
certainly environmental forms of the same toadstool — from Western
Australia, Tasmania and Victoria — under four other names, viz. A.
lampas (1845), A. phosphorus (3 848), A. candescens and A. illuminans

* National Herbarium of Victoria. f And again in May 1966.

213

214

J. H. Willis: A Bibliography of the “Ghost Fungus ”

(both 1873). P. A. Saccardo (1887) was the first to refer these five
entities to the genus Pleurotus, Berkeley having regarded the latter
as a sugbenus under Agaricus.

Subsequent workers have variously synonymized one or more of
the names, and Bresadola (1928) went as far as to express the belief
that all Australian fungi under the names P. lampas, P . candescens,
P. illuminans and P. phosphorus were conspecific with European
P. olearius (DC. ex Fr.) Gillet, of which Saccardo had remarked
(1887, p. 346): “ Lamellarum phosphorescentia maxime insignis et

antiquitus celebratus ”. Pleurotus nidiformis (syn. P. lampas &c.) is
certainly congeneric (and perhaps conspecific) with P. olearius which
Dr. Rolf Singer (1962) has placed in V. Fayod’s genus Omphalotus
(1889) — having subgloboid spores ( not cylindric as in a true
Pleurotus) and a less irregular trama. Members of Pleurotus are
edible, non-luminous and have a creamy spore-print, whereas
Omphalotus is reputedly poisonous, always luminescent and with
pure white spore-print. Singer (1962) admits but “one ‘ linnaeon ’
which should be divided into several races (geographical and/or
ecological) ”. O. olearius (DC. ex Fr.) Singer of southern Europe
appears mostly to be cyathiform and umbilicate, red-brown or blackish
at first, then yellowish with the gills yellowish or rhubarb-coloured.
Until Australian material can be carefully compared in a living state
with Omphalotus olearius, one would be ill-advised to make the
combination “ O. nidiformis ”, and at present it seems desirable to
retain for our ‘ Ghost Fungus ’ the familiar name Pleurotus nidiformis,
even if strictly incorrect on modern taxonomic grounds.

In the following bibliography, references apd comments in
parenthesis have been arranged chronologically:

1815.

CANDOLLE, Augustin P. de — Flore Franqaise 6: 44-45

[Description in French of Agaricus olearius, with remarks
on its great variability of form, the stipe being lateral,
excentric or rarely central].

1840.

GARDNER, George, and BERKELEY, M. J. — Description of a
new phosphorescent species of Agaricus. J. Bot., Lond. 2:
426-28 [A. gardneri described, the type from rotting palm
fronds in Goyaz Province, Brazil].

1842.

DRUMMOND, J. — Letter of 2 July 1841, reproduced in Lond.
J. Bot. 1: 216-17 [First account of luminous fungus in
Australia, on a Banksia at Perth, before any name had been
applied. Drummond had observed, 6-7 years previously,
luminescent agarics growing on tree-stumps in Western
Australia].

J. H. Willis: A Bibliography of the “Ghost Fungus

215

1843.

DRUMMOND, J. — Letter of 26 June 1842, reproduced in Lond.
J. Bot. 2: 173 [Report of a further occurrence of luminous
toadstools, on dead trunk of Eucalyptus occidentalis near the
Vasse River, W.A.].

1844.

BERKELEY, M. J. — Decades of Fungi (I). Lond. J. Bot. 3: 185
[Original description of Agaricus nidiformis, from a gigantic,
terrestrial, cup-shaped specimen 16 inches broad, said to
come from “ Swan River ”. Berkeley remarks: “ Allied to
Ag. ostreatus, but a far more magnificent species; when fresh
it must be one of the finest of the genus ”.].

1845.

BERKELEY, M. J. — Decades of Fungi (III— VII) . Lond. J. Bot.
4: 44 [Original description of Agaricus lampas, based on J.
Drummond’s collection n. 109 from “stems of sickly but
living plants of Grevillea Drummondii Preiss near the roots ”.
The author states that it is “ allied to Ag. nidiformis Berk.,
which is also a phosphorescent species ”.].

1848.

BERKELEY, M. J. — Decades of Fungi (XX) . Lond. J. Bot. 7: 572
[Original description of Agaricus phosphorus from “ roots of
trees ” in Tasmania, but without more precise locality.
Berkeley states: “ It is certainly distinct from the two

phosphorescent Australian species, A. nidiformis and A.
lampas , described in my first Century ”.]

TULASNE, L. R. — Sur la phosphorescence spontanee de
r Agaricus olearius DC. &c. Ann. Sci. nat. ser. 3, 9: 338-362,
t. 20 [The “ Champignon de l’Olivier ”, Agaricus olearius, is
fully described in French and sundry explanations for the
cause of luminosity reviewed. According to various previous
writers, this agaric has been found on Carpinus, Castanea,
Ficus, Populus, Quercus, Robinia, Syringa and Viburnum
species].

1873.

BERKELEY, M. J. — Australian fungi, received principally from
Baron F. von Mueller and Dr. R. Schomburgk. J. Linn. Soc.
(Bot.) 13: 157 [Original descriptions of Agaricus illuminans
from “ Australia ” and A. candescens from dead wood at
Melbourne, Vic., the epithets being ascribed to F. Mueller.
Under A. candescens, Berkeley observes: “ Very near A.

lampas Berk., Swan River (= A. noctilucus Berk., Tasmania),
but has thinner gills. I cannot, from the dry specimens,
distinguish A. pyrogenus Mull, from YarraYarra, Victoria. . .

216

J. H. Willis: A Bibliography of the “Ghost Fungus”

or A. luminans Mull., Melbourne A. loctilucus is a ‘ nomen
nudum ’, having no nomenclatural standing, and this is the
first time that a luminous fungus is recorded for Victoria].

1885.

TISDALL, H. T. — Fungi of country east of Mt. Baw-Baw. Viet.
Nat. 1: 171 (Mar.) [Description of a colony of sporophores
under the name Agaricus lampas ].

r887.

SACCARDO, P. A. — Sylloge Fungorum 5: 346, 352, 357-58 [Latin
descriptions are given of Pleurotus olearius , P. gardneri,
P. illuminans, P. nidiformis , P. lampas, P. candescens and P.
phosphorus and new combinations under the genus Pleurotus
are effected for all but the first species].

1892.

COOKE, M. C. — Handbook of Australian Fungi 31-32 [Agaricus
gardneri, A. illuminans, A. lampas and A. candescens are
listed as phosphorescent and briefly described. The Brazilian
A. gardneri is now attributed also to Queensland on “ half
putrid fronds of palms ” — the first luminous toadstool to be
recorded for that State. Cooke fails to say that A. phosphorus
is luminous too, and he mis-spells the epithet as
“ phosphoreus ” in which he has been followed by some
subsequent writers. Distribution of A. illuminans is extended
from Victoria to New South Wales and Queensland].

1895.

McALPINE, D. — Systematic Arrangement of Australian Fungi
10-13 [Pleurotus candescens, P. gardneri, P. illuminans, P.
lampas and P. phosphorus are listed as phosphorescent and
very briefly described. P. nidiformis is also listed, as for
W.A. only].

1901.

McALPINE, D. — Phosphorescent fungi in Australia. Proc. Linn.
Soc. N.S.W. 25: 548-558 [The six entities listed in 1895,
q.v., are all retained as distinct species; the cause of
phosphorescence is discussed and a bibliography given.
Pleurotus candescens is described in detail, its variability
being stressed].

1904.

BAGE, Freda — Notes on phosphorescence in plants and animals.
Viet. Nat. 21: 93-104 [References are made, p. 94, to
Agaricus olearius in Italy and to the abundance of Pleurotus
candescens against tea-tree trunks on the Mornington
Peninsula, Vic. A bibliography of 38 authors concludes the
paper].

J. H. Willis: A Bibliography of the “Ghost Fungus”

217

1907.

EWART, A. J. — Notes on the phosphorescence of Agaricus
( Pleurotus ) candescens. Viet. Nat. 23: 154, 174 [Discussion
on chemistry].

1913.

BAILEY, F. M. — Comprehensive Catalogue of Queensland Plants
717 [Agaricus illuminans is retained as a distinct species for
Queensland, but A. gardneri is now dropped from the list of
fungi — see Cooke, 1892].

1919.

WHITE, C. T. — Luminous fungi. Qd Agric. J. new ser. 12: 33-34,
t. 3 [Brief discussion on Australian species and a good
photograph of Pleurotus lampas].

WILLIAMSON, H. B. — Viet. Nat. 36: 2 (May) [Remark on
exhibit of fresh luminous example of Pleurotus candescens
from Clayton, Vic. Also, on p. 3, note on exhibit by Miss
G. Nokes of large specimen from Sandringham].

1928.

BRESADOLA, J. — Iconographia mycologica 6: 285 [The belief is
expressed that Australian fungi under the names Pleurotus
lampas, P. candescens, P. illuminans and P. phosphorus are
nothing more than P. olearius of southern Europe].

1934.

CLELAND, J. B. — Toadstools and Mushrooms and other Larger
Fungi of South Australia 1: 88—89 [Detailed botanical

description of Pleurotus lampas (Berk.) Sacc. which is given
an Australia-wide distribution. P. candescens and P.
phosphorus are cited as “ probable synonyms ” and P nidi -
formis as a “ doubtful synonym ”].

WILLIS, J. H. — The Agaricaceae or “ Gilled Fungi”. Viet. Nat
50: 293 (April) [Popular description of Pleurotus nidiformis ].

1937.

HAMILiON, A. G. Bush Rambles: 146-147 [Popular description
ot toadstool and its light, without mention of a botanical
name].

1939.

OPPERMAN, A. E. — Wild Life, Melb. 1: 30 (June) [Photo with
brief note]

GREVIS-JAMES, F. W. — Wild Life, Melb. 1: 19 (Aug.) [Illustra-
tion of glowing sporophore reflected in a mirror].

1941.

WILLIS, J. H. Victorian Fungi 47—48 [Popular description under
name Pleurotus lampas].

218

J. H. Willis: A Bibliography of the “Ghost Fungus”

1946.

GREVIS-JAMES, F. W. — Wild Life, Melb. 8: 128 [Same illustra-
tion as that reproduced in Aug. 1939 (q.v.)].

1948.

WASSINK, E. C. — Observations on the luminescence in fungi, I,
including a critical review of the species mentioned as
luminescent in literature. Rec. Trav. bot. neerl. 41: 150-211,
t. 1, fig. 12 [A very full account of luminous fungi in general,
with 123 literary references. On p. 171, it is concluded that
Australian populations constitute a geographical variant of
Pleurotus olearius ].

1950.

FOOT, Allan — Wild Life, Melb. 12: 481, 504-506 [Popular account
of Pleurotus lampas with three excellent photos., including
one made by its own light — with exposure of one hour].

WILLIS, J. H. — Victorian Toadstools and Mushrooms 47-48
[Popular account under the name Pleurotus lampas].

1953.

WILLIS, J. H. — The Archipelago of the Recherche. Aust. geogr.
Soc. Rep., Part 3 (Plants) : 33 [Pleurotus lampas is synony-
mized under P. nidiformis].

1956.

LAMBERTON, J. A. — Chemical constituents of the luminescent
fungus Pleurotus lampas Berk. Aust. J. Chem. 9 3 : 433-36
(Discussion of a chemical examination made on luminous
and young non-luminous sporophores, and suggestion that
luminosity may be due to luciferin-like substances) .

1957 (June).

WILLIS, J. H. — Victorian Toadstools and Mushrooms, ed. 2:
53-54 [Popular account of Pleurotus nidiformis].

1958.

WILLIS, J. H.— Aust. Encycl. 4: 232 [Note on luminosity of
Pleurotus nidiformis].

1962.

SINGER, Rolf — The Agaricales in Modern Taxonomy, ed. 2:
224-26 [Discussion on genus Omphalotus Fayod, to which
Pleurotus olearius is transferred; and suggestion that
Australian and other luminous agarics, hitherto assigned to
Pleurotus, may be “ geographical and/or ecological races ”
of O. olearius].

1963.

STEWARD, R. L. — Pleurotus lampas near Marysville. Walka-
bout 29~: 22 (July) [Photograph only].

WILLIS, J. H. — Victorian Toadstools and Mushrooms, ed. 3: 53-54
(Dec.). [Details as for Willis 1957 (q.v.)].

NOTES ON THE DEVELOPMENT AND STRUCTURE OF THE

“ BASKET FUNGUS ”,

Clathrus gracilis (Berk.) Schlechtendal.

by

E. J. Semmens.*

The following observations were made on living material at Ararat,
Victoria, during the writer’s residence there in June 1918, and they
may still be of some interest after almost half a century.

In the early stages the periderm of Clathrus is filled by a thick
jelly-like mass, rather firm in texture. This is intersected and divided
up into compartments by lines of hyphal threads forming a series
of membranous division-walls. The central mass becomes cellular
in structure and brownish, still permeated with the jelly. The hyphal
divisions give rise to the framework of the sporophore which in the
early stages and before expansion is attached along the division-lines
to the hyphal threads. At the base of the sporophore the tubes are
narrower and pass into the jelly-mass communicating with the hyphal
threads of the periderm which here pass into the jelly-mass to a
greater extent than in other parts. The framework of the sporophore,
which in early stages is surrounded with a thin membrane much
resembling the mesentery surrounding the intestines, becomes more
loosely attached to the division-lines as the plant matures; and the
jelly at the upper portion of the volva disappears, leaving only the
thin periderm which soon ruptures under the pressure exerted by the
now free sporophore. The jelly-mass has lost its firm consistency
and become more liquid, especially in the centre of the sporophore
where it serves as a medium to hold the spores to the receptacle.
The sporophore is tubular in section through its arms and 1, 2, or 3
tubes may be seen in the section; these are filled with the jelly in
the early stages but are empty later on. The hyphal membrane
forming the partitions between the sections of jelly, when examined
microscopically, exhibits a structure composed of numerous inter-
lacing, branching and anastomosing threads often articulated. The
clear colorless jelly, under the microscope, displays also some
branching threads; these end in clubs or irregular masses which
often give rise to much curved filaments. The clubs are often
applied to one another at their tips. Clamp connections are often
present. In the membrane forming the divisions between the
compartments are numerous small crystals which do not extinguish
when viewed with crossed nicols. The jelly has a peculiar and
penetrating smell — somewhat resembling that of formalin or
iodoform.

* Creswick, Vic. (Retired Principal, Victorian School of Forestry).

219

220

E. J. Semmens: Notes on the Development and Structure
of the “ Basket Fungus ”

PLATE XIV'.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

E. J. Semmens: Notes on the Development and Structure
of the “ Basket Fungus ”

221

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV.

Clathrus gracilis (Berk.) Schlechtendal

Mature plant, before rupture of the volva.

Volva commencing to split.

Sporophore expanding, portion of volva broken away.
Sporophore almost free from volva.

Remains of volva.

Early stage of sporophore showing attachment to base.

Section at early stage showing cut ends of sporophore arms.
Early stage with sporophore removed showing jelly segments.
Later stage, sporophore removed, jelly thinning at the top.
a Portion of volva showing segments of jelly,
b Single segment with its membranous hyphal walls,
c Branching hypha from membranous division,
d Club shaped hyphae from jelly, applied at their tips,
e Hypha with thickened end.
f Hyphae ending in rough masses,
g Hypha giving rise to a curved filament,
h Clamp connections.

FURTHER CORDYCEPS COLLECTIONS IN AUSTRALIA

by

J. H. Willis.*

In Muelleria I 2 : 74: 85 (Dec. 1959), I cited the 117 collections of
Cordyceps (“ Vegetable Caterpillar ” fungi) known to me in various
Australian herbaria and representative of 15 different species. Since
then nineteen additional collections have been noted. These, together
with four more literary references to the genus, are listed hereunder,
and the pagination accords with the place they would have occupied
in the former article:

Page 75.

C. coxii Olliff

Other collections — Near heads of Little Moleside Ck., N. from
Johnstone’s Swamp, far S.W. Vic. (A. C. Beauglehole, n.
6148, June 1964— Herb. A.C.B. & MEL).

Page 77.

C. gunnii (Berk.) Berk.

Victoria — Pomonal (I. R. McCann, Apr. 1961 — MEL);
Powelltown (H. T. Reeves, May 1963 — MEL); Alexandra
(G. A. Crichton, May 1963 — MEL).

Tasmania — Between Loop Road and Gentle Annie, S. King
Island (Paul Barnett, May 1966 — MEL).

Page 78.

C. hawkesii (G. R. Gray) Cooke.

Victoria — Near Killara (D. C. Grey, June 1961 — MEL); Rubicon
River (G. A. Crichton, July 1962 — Mainz University,
Germany) ; Big River near Eildon Reservoir (G. A. Crichton,
Sept. 1962 — MEL) ; near Cowwarr, 24 miles N.W. of Sale
(Mrs. P. Andrews, July 1966 — MEL).

Page 80.

C. meneristitis F. Muell. & Berk.

Other collections — 2 miles S.E. of Stawell, Vic. (N.S. Bennett,
May 1960 — MEL); Daylesford, Vic. (J. H. Willis, July 1937
— MEL); Mt. Nebo, Q’land — new to State (A. B. Cribb, Nov.
1961 — Herb. A. B. Cribb, Brisbane).

Page 81.

C. robertsii (Hook.) Berk.

Victoria — near Cowarr, 24 miles N.W. of Sale (Mrs. P.
Andrews, July 1966 — MEL) .

* National Herbarium of Victoria.

223

224

J. H. Willis: Further Cordyceps Collections in Australia

Page 82.

C. scottiana OllifF

Victoria — Erskine River near Lome (G. Beaton & A. C.
Beauglehole, Sept. 1966 — MEL).

Page 83.

C. taylori (Berk.) Sacc.

Victoria — Sherbrooke Forest in Dandenong Ranges (Miss
M. K. Doery, Oct. 1960 — MEL) ; Korumburra (W. Johnstone,
1896 — MEL); Thorpdale (W. Cornthwaite, 1896 — MEL).

Page 85.

C. ?sp. nov. [AfF. C. barnesii Thwaites ex Berk. & Broome (of
Ceylon) , but with different spores and uniquely banded stipe]

Single specimen from forest above Rubicon Power Station
near Thornton, Vic. (G. Beaton, Oct. 1962. — MEL); Port
Campbell National Park, Vic. (G. Beaton, Sept. 1966).

LITERATURE RELATING TO AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF CORDYCEPS
Page 85.

BULLER, W. L., 1895. Note on the Vegetable Caterpillar
( Cordiceps robertsii) . Trans. N.Z. Inst. 27: 155-56, t. 8.

Page 86.

FRENCH, C., 1909. Handbook of the Destructive Insects of
Victoria, Part 4: 72-75, t. 71 (col).

WILLIS, J. H., 1958. Fungi. Aust. Encycl. 4: 233 (illust.) .
WILLIS, J. H., 1963. Victorian Toadstools and Mushrooms ed.
3: 83-86, t. 16, fig. 17.

BIBLIOGRAPHIA HUNTIANA

Botanists from all parts of the world are co-operating in a venture
in international botanical bibliography which is centred at the Rachel
McMasters Miller Hunt Botanical Library in Pittsburgh, Penn-
sylvania, U.S.A.

The Library itself was the gift to the Carnegie Institute of
Technology, in 1961, of Mrs. Rachel Hunt whose remarkable private
collection of botanical works of the nineteenth century and earlier,
botanical prints and paintings, autograph letters and manuscripts of

Bibliographia Huntiana

225

18th and 19th century botanists, as well as engraved portraits of some
three hundred nineteenth century botanists, form the nucleus of the
Library’s holdings. These are being continuously supplemented. A
Curator of botanical portraits is building up a repository of photo-
graphs of botanists from earliest times to the present day, and in
particular those who are authors of published works and of binary
and tertiary nomenclatural combinations. Biographical data on each
botanist is being assembled with the assistance of institutes and
herbaria abroad, while the manuscript collection of drafts and
correspondence of botanists continues to grow. A volume of hand-
writing facsimiles of taxonomic botanists is contemplated as an aid
to present-day identification of notes so often encountered in the
older collections of herbarium specimens.

Most ambitious, however, is the Library’s project to publish an
18-volume work of international bibliographical reference covering all
botanical books, and horticultural books dealing primarily with plants,
published in the years from 1730 to 1840 — a period that begins with
Linneaus and ends on the edge of the great proliferation of botanical
studies and specialization of the second half of last century. This
vast encyclopaedic work, Bibliographia Huntiana will contain some
18,000 titles and will provide a brief biographical summary of each
author with a note of references to him in contemporary literature
and to reviews of his works, also a list of his published articles.

The identification of each work is being submitted to searching
bibliographical scholarship. Each book will be collated and an
account given of its plates and illustrations (with a biographical note
on the illustrator) . The title page itself will be photographically
reproduced. Notes will also be supplied on the date of publication
of reviews and announcements, and, in the case of rare copies, on
the book’s location. With the aid of a computer and a large staff of
botanists and bibliographers, Bibliographia Huntiana will, it is
estimated, be ready for publication from 1970.

Both the international bibliography and the Library’s continuing
work in historical botany have commanded the interest and
collaboration of botanists throughout the world. It is hoped that
Australian botanists will also lend their support. The Basser Library
at the Australian Academy of Science will make reproductions of its
cards on Australian botanists and botanical visitors to the country
from 1788 to the present day, also from those held in its Biographical
Index of Australian scientists in Canberra, and will act as a guide to
photographic collections. Dr. George H. Lawrence, Director of the
Rachel Hunt Library, will, however, appreciate hearing from any
individual or institution who can offer material or information, and
will cordially welcome any itinerant Australian scholar who can find
time to visit this very beautiful specialist Library.

— Ann Mozley,

Lisle, Illinois, U.S.A.

TORTULA PAGORUM IN AUSTRALIA

by

D. G. Catcheside.*

The moss, Tortula pagorum (Milde) De Not., is widely spread in
the northern hemisphere and, though sporophytes are quite unknown,
it is readily identifiable by the gemmae which resemble very small
leaves, fusiform in shape, and also by the prominent semicircular
papillae on both surfaces of the upper cells of the leaves. In 1952
and 1953 it was found in two localities in South Australia and also
in Western Australia (Willis, 1954). These appear to be the first
records from the southern hemisphere though, as will be seen, there
were collections of this species made much earlier, but ascribed to
Tortula baileyi Broth.

Recently, the type of T. baileyi , collected by F. M. Bailey, and
eight other specimens from New South Wales and Lord Howe Island,
collected by W. W. Watts and identified by Brotherus as T. baileyi ,
have been examined. It had been thought possible that T. baileyi
might be synonymous with T. pagorum and that the latter species was
fertile in the southern hemisphere, just as is T. papillosa. However,
it is quite clear that T. baileyi is a distinct species, readily separable
by several vegetative characters. The leaf is different in shape, being
obovate lingulate, and relatively more widened above. T. baileyi also
has fewer cells in the lamina between the nerve and the margin,
especially in the upper part where T. baileyi has only about three-
quarters as many cells across the leaf as occur in T. pagorum .* The
cells in the upper part of the leaf are larger, being 17-20 ^ in T.
baileyi compared with about 12 ^ in T. pagorum , and the upper
surface of the cells is smooth. The cells on the under surface of the
nerve have elevated papillae, in the form of hollow cones or rounded
frusta, similar to those of T. papillosa , whereas the cells on the under
surface of the nerve of T. pagorum are smooth. The under surfaces
of the cells of the upper part of the lamina of T. baileyi , especially
near to the nerve, also bear conical papillae, usually one to a cell.
Towards the edge of the leaf, the papillae become progressively
lower. The upper and lower surfaces of the upper cells of T. pagorum
bear three or four semicircular papillae and these papillae are present
also on the cells on the upper surface of the nerve. The leaf-like
gemmae are scarce in T. baileyi compared with the situation usual
in T. pagorum , but this difference is probably of no significance, since
the abundance varies in T. pagorum.

m Department
Canberra.

of Genetics, John Curtin School of Medical Research, Australian National University,

227

228

D. G. Catcheside: Tortula Pagorum in Australia

Barkman (1963) treats T. pagorum as a variety of T. laevipila
(Brid.) Schwaegr., but gives it the later name of var. propagulifera
Lindb. He also shows that there are other varieties (of T. laevipila)
with leafy gemmae, differing in the presence or absence of
differentiated marginal cells of the leaf and in features of the gemmae.
In those gemmiferous varieties with unbordered leaves, as all Australian
specimens are, the apical cells of the gemmae are truncate and
papillose in var. pagorum (Milde) Husnot (= var. propagulifera
Lindb.) , but acute and smooth in var. w achteri Barkm. The gemmae
of Australian specimens usually have a conical terminal cell, acute
and with a small apical papilla. However, on some gemmae the
apical cell is bent to one side and on a few it is truncate, bearing two
papillae. It seems best to treat the Australian plants as the species
T. pagorum.

All of the specimens gathered by Watts in New South Wales and
Lord Howe Island are definitely T. pagorum. All have the relatively
small, rather obscure cells and the three or four prominent semi-
circular papillae on both surfaces of each cell. None of them have
sporophytes. The range of T. pagorum in the southern hemisphere is
therefore wider than originally suspected. The habitat is usually on
trees, but the specimens from Lord Howe Island grew on rocks. A
note by Watts in the packet of his number 269 states “ Characteristic
brood-bodies found, after long search, on enclosed. The hair-point is
very long, sometimes as long as the leaf. Grows on rocks. In
N.S.W. T. baileyi sometimes grows in rock-crevices, but mostly on
trees. W.W.W.”. The gemmae are, in fact, quite scarce on this
specimen and, indeed, the abundance does vary amongst the
Australian specimens of T. pagorum. Sometimes the gemmae are
extremely abundant, forming a dense cluster at the end of a branch.
In other cases, smaller bunches are present in the axils of leaves near
the apex of the stem. In a few specimens, they are very scarce.
This may represent a seasonal variation, with a minimum from July
to September, but the specimens are too few to support any reliable
conclusions.

The presence of T. pagorum in Australia is not incompatible with
it being an adventive species, rather than a native. The abundant
gemmae must provide an efficient means of dispersal and it is difficult
to conclude that any of the localities are beyond the chance of
introduction. It will be interesting to discover whether this moss
tends to become more widely spread in the future, just as various
introduced species have increased significantly of recent years in
Britain and elsewhere. Also, T. baileyi should be sought, since no
specimen, apart from the type, appears to have been seen.
Descriptions of these two species follow, together with the known
occurrences:

D. G. Catcheside: Tortilla Pagorum in Australia

229

Tortula baileyi Broth. Ofv. Finska Vet. Soc. Fork. 33: 97 (1890).

Dioicous, in dense, small, soft tufts on trees, olive green in colour;
stems up to 4 mm. high, densely leafy, with numerous gemmae at
apex; leaves incurved and closely appressed when dry, erect-
spreading when moist, carinate concave, panduriform, round at apex,
with a long hair; leaf about 2 mm. long, 0-7 to 0-9 mm. wide at base,
widening above to 0-9 to 11 mm., pellucid; back of nerve and lamina
with elevated conical papillae, usually one per cell; margin plane
throughout, entire, not bordered; nerve yellow-brown, 65 /x wide at
base, produced into a long, smooth, hyaline hair; basal cells shortly
rectangular, chlorophyllose, longer and empty towards the nerve,
upper cells strongly chlorophyllose, roundish, 17-20 /x diameter, the
walls thickened at the angles; cells smooth above. Perichaetial bracts
congested in a somewhat exserted cylinder, sheathing, hyaline,
delicate, shortly pointed or muticous, obtuse, nerve slender; seta
short, to 8 mm. high, erect, 0-3 mm. thick at base, pale red brown,
apex paler, smooth, strongly twisted to the right when dry; theca
3-5 mm. long, oblong-cylindrical, erect or slightly curved, not
shiny, thick walled, brown, mouth not constricted; annulus double,
persistent; peristome simple 115 mm. long, lower third tubular, tube
whitish, papillose, teeth pale purple, twice twisted, papillose;
operculum narrowly conical, about 1-7 mm. long, pale, erect or
somewhat curved, acute; calyptra cucullate, entire at base, pale, apex
brown, smooth, half covering the theca. Male plant unknown.
Gemmae linear-lanceolate, apex hyaline, cuspidate, cells in four rows,
strongly papillose, chlorophyllous, produced at apex of stem and in
axils of upper leaves.

South Australia: Adelaide, stem of tree, F. M. Bailey 472, 1888
(TYPE) .

Tortula pagorum (Milde) De Not. Epil Briol. Ital. 542 (1869).

Dioicous, densely tufted in small to extensive mats or cushions,
usually on trees, but rarely on rocks, clear green, becoming darker
when dry, often with a reddish tinge; stems densely leafy, up to
10 mm. high, but usually less than 5 mm., radiculose at base; leaves
incurved and closely appressed when dry, not crisped, but often
slightly twisted, erect-spreading when moist, oblong obovate,
Ungulate or panduriform, concave above, 2-0 to 2-5 mm. long
(including the hair) , about 1 mm. wide, rounded, truncate or rarely
retuse at apex; margin plane, not bordered, rarely slightly inflexed,
strongly papillose-crenate; nerve pale red, thick, smooth on the back,
excurrent as smooth or rarely somewhat roughened, hyaline or
coloured hair, up to 1 mm. long, very conspicuous in dry plants; cells
on back of nerve smooth; nerve in cross section showing two median
guide cells, two ventral cells of nearly equal size, and a larger dorsal
stereid group; basal cells hyaline, with yellow walls, the cross walls
often thickened, rectangular towards the nerve, shorter towards the

230

D. G. Catcheside: Tortula Pagorum in Australia

margins; cells of upper three-quarters of leaf much more densely
chlorophyllose, roundish-quadrate to hexagonal, isodiametric, about
12 fx in diameter, papillose with numerous high, crescent-shaped or
sometimes circular papillae, about four to each cell. Sporophyte
unknown. Gemmae lanceolate to elliptic and ovate, densely papillose
or verrucose, leaf-like, 200-250 ^ x 80-100 fx, with a smooth or faintly
papillose hyaline apical spine bearing a terminal papilla, but some-
times truncate and bearing two papillae, produced at apex of stem
and in axils of the upper leaves.

Collections known from Australia

SOUTH AUSTRALIA: on tree, Granite Island, Victor Harbour

D. G. Catcheside 52.305, 8 Nov. 1952; Melrose, on base of red gum
by Willochra Creek, D. G. Catcheside 53. 162, 22 Aug. 1953; Parawirra,
on tree, D. R. Michell, May 1965; North Terrace, Adelaide, on shaded
elm trunks outside University, J. H. Willis , 4 Aug. 1966; Stuart
Highway 24 m. N.W. of Port Augusta, on trunk of Acacia sowdenii,
J. H. Willis, 3 Aug. 1966.

WESTERN AUSTRALIA: South end of Wongan Hills, about 100
miles N.E. of Perth, Rica Erickson, June 1953 (Willis, 1954).

NEW SOUTH WALES: on tree, Reserve, East Maitland, W. W.
Watts 4644, 6 Dec. 1900; on fig tree, Reserve, East Maitland,
W. W. Watts 4645, 6 Dec. 1900; prostrate tree, Errowal, nr. Nowra,
W. W. Watts 6250, 21 May, 1903; tree, The Island, Mayfield, nr.
Nowra, W. W. Watts, 23 May 1903; tree off Grenfell Road, 7 m. from
Young, W. W. Watts 6939, 17 Aug. 1903; on tree, Tubbul-road, 15 m.
from Young, W. W. Watts 6964, Sept. 1903.

VICTORIA: on trunks of bull mallee and moonah, Djerriwarrh

Creek at Western Highway bridge, D. J. Carr, Oct. 1955; on butt of
old red gum, near Shrine of Remembrance, Melbourne, J. H. Willis,
2 Sept. 1960; 20 m. west of Mildura, on base of eucalypt, D. G.
Catcheside 64.106, 22 Dec. 1964.

LORD HOWE ISLAND: on rocks, Northern Hills, W. W. Watts
249 (b) and 269, July 1911.

References

Barkman, J. J., 1963. A contribution to the taxonomy of the Tortula
laevigata-T . pagorum complex. Rev. Bryol. Lich. 32: 183-192.

Brotherus, V. F., 1890. Tortula haileyi Broth. Ofv. Finska Vet. Soc.
Forh 33: 97.

Willis, J. H., 1954. Mosses new to Western Australia. Victorian
Naturalist 71: 8-12.

Acknowledgment

I am grateful to the Director of the Botanical Museum, University
of Helsinki, for the loan of specimens from the Brotherus Herbarium.

A COLLECTION OF PLANTS FROM THE VICTORIAN PYRENEES

IN 1840

by

J. H. Willis.*

There are so few records of any plant collecting in Victoria before
the arrival of Ferdinand Mueller (August 1852) that additional
evidence of prior collectors holds a special interest. Leschenault,
Brown, Mitchell, Gunn, Robertson, Adamson and La Trobe all played
some part in the earlier botanical investigation of the colony. To
these seven names must now be added that of George Augustus
Robinson, better known for his valuable conciliatory and humanitarian
labours among the dwindling aboriginal tribes of Tasmania during
the 1830’s. Robinson came to Melbourne in 1839 and for the next
ten years (until December 1849) he was Chief Protector of Aborigines
for the Port Phillip District of New South Wales. Returning to
England in 1853, after an absence of nearly 30 years, he died in Bath
at the age of 78 on 18 October 1866.

Thanks to the generosity of a prominent historian, Mr. Philip L.
Brown, Melbourne Herbarium was the fortunate donee, on 22 Septem-
ber 1964, of a small box containing botanical specimens with the
following note:

“ Picked by G. A. Robinson, Australia, in Feb. 1840t
(on the Pyrenees).”

Mr. Brown obtained this box in March 1939 from Mrs. Prescott,
housekeeper to Arthur P. Robinson, who was the last surviving son
of the collector, and who had recently died at Combe Down, Bath, on
28 February 1939. The plant collection had remained for 86 years
in an old stone house with Robinson’s other natural history and
ethnological gatherings from Australia. Unfortunately the contents
were in rather poor condition and somewhat fragmentary; however,
they were worth mounting as herbarium specimens, if only for their
historic interest.

None of the specimens had been determined, but they are referable
to 16 species of phanerogams, most of which are widespread in
south-eastern Australia, viz.:

1. Acrotriche prostrata F. Muell.

2. Agropyron scabrum (Labill.) Pal.

Beauv.

3. Epilobium cinereum A. Rich.

(non E. junceum Spreng.)

4. Eryngium rostratum Cav.

5. Gompholobium huegelii Benth. in

Endl. et al.

6. Gypsophila australis (Schlech-

tendal) A. Gray.

7. Helichrysum bracteatum (Vent.)

Andr.

* National Herbarium of Victoria.

t Mr. P. L. Brown considers that the date of collection is more likely to have been July/Aug.,
1841, when Robinson is known to have been on the Pyrenees.

8. Helichrysum semipapposum

(Labill.) DC.

9. Helipterum anthemoides (Sieber ex

Spreng.) DC.

10. Lobelia gibbosa Labill.

11. Pimelea curviflora R. Br.

12. Pimelea linifolia Sm.

13. Poa australis R.Br. (sens, lat.)

14. Rumex dumosus A.Cunn. ex Meissn.

15. Themeda australis (R.Br.) Stapf

16. W ahlenbergia ?communis R. Carolin

231

232 J. H. Willis: A Collection of plants from the Victorian Pyrenees in 1840

It is not known from what part of the Pyrenees Range (about
50 miles long) G. A. Robinson picked his few specimens; nevertheless
they certainly constitute the earliest preserved sample of the flora in
this mountain region. Major T. L. Mitchell, on 10 July 1836, had
crossed from Carapooee to Beazley’s Bridge on the Avon River,
skirting the Pyrenees just south of St. Arnaud, and climbing a high
hill at the northern extremity of the Range (whence he obtained a
distant prospect of the Grampians) ; but he made no botanical
collections in this area. Only two species of the Robinson plants,
Nos. 12 and 15, were commented on or collected anywhere in Victoria
by Mitchell, while the four species numbered 2, 4, 7, and 11 are the
only ones on the list known to have been collected at Wando Vale
(near Casterton) by J. G. Robertson during the 1840’s. The remainder
may well be the first samples of those species ever taken in Western
Victoria. Number 1 ( Acrotriche prostrata) would undoubtedly have
come from higher cooler forests of this Range, whereas it is equally
certain that Nos. 4 and 14 grew on open plains at the foot of the hills.

Although the much more spectacular, and botanically rewarding,
Grampians ranges have been the subject of considerable floristic
literature, astonishingly little has ever been written about the vegeta-
tion of the Pyrenees. One isolated paper of generally descriptive
character and limited scientific value is J. W. Audas’s “ An Eastertide
in the Victorian Pyrenees ”, published in the Victorian Naturalist 29:
51-58 (Aug. 1912).

TRISTANIA LACTIFLUA or T. LACTIFLORA ?

In Muelleria P: 91 (Dec. 1959) I gave reasons for changing the
spelling of the epithet in Tristania lactiflua F. Muell. Fragm. Phyt.
Aust. 1: 82 (1858) to “ lactiflora ” — the form subsequently used by
F. Mueller in both editions of his Systematic Census of Australian
Plants (1882 and 1889). It now appears that such a change was
unwarranted and that the original rendering, as lactiflua, should be
reinstated. I had overlooked a vital statement in Mueller’s diagnosis,
viz. “ ramuli fractura lacte acri amaro scatent ”, which is convincing
evidence that he deliberately chose the epithet lactiflua in reference
to the acrid latex oozing from broken branches of this tropical tree.
Why Mueller should have adopted lactiflora (“ milky-flowered ”), 30
years later, is rather puzzling; it may have been considered more
appropriate or euphonious, or the original spelling may later have
been accidentally misconstrued by its author.

Mr. L. A. S. Johnson (at the Royal Botanic Gardens and National
Herbarium, Sydney) has noted that a milky sap often exudes from
young broken branches of Tristania conferta, the commonly planted
Brush Box, and he kindly drew the writer’s attention to the oversight
(mentioned above) in connection with T. lactiflua.

— J. H. Willis.

THE LATE RALEIGH ADELBERT BLACK (1880-1963)

AND HIS PRIVATE HERBARIUM

by

J. H. Willis.*

Biographical Details.

On 2 July 1963 a long life of devoted service to botanical science
in south-eastern Australia closed with the death of Mr. Raleigh A.
Black, latterly of Mont Albert, Victoria. He was the second son of
the second marriage of Reverend Joseph Black, M.A., D.D., a
Theological Tutor at Aberdeen. Dr. Black migrated from Scotland
to Hobart where he became a co-founder of the Tasmanian University
in January 1890, sat on the Senate thereof, and was Principal of the
Presbyterian Glebe Ladies’ College. There were also four daughters
in the family.

Raleigh, who was born on 11 March 1880, had a serious fall from
a swing when three years of age and suffered some cranial damage.
Although physically active enough, he became a “ difficult ” child at
home and at school — disobedient, openly rebellious and of a generally
incorrigible disposition. At the age of eight, he began complaining of
headaches whenever he was given any kind of learning to do; the
distraught parents eventually had him examined by their family
doctor. The apparent cause of the headaches and delinquency was
diagnosed by the doctor who gave hope of a gradual improvement,
provided that the boy could be taken from school and put to some
trade where he could use his muscles.

Thus, when about twelve years old, R. A. Black began work as a
“ printer’s devil ” with the printing section of the Tasmanian News —
an evening newspaper that lapsed in 1911. He first laboured in the
grimy engine room, then at bookbinding, and finally as a type-setter
in the compositor’s room. The life, if rough, was congenial and
doubtless served to shape his later interest in the origin of words.
His first important position was a clerical one in the Treasury
Department and, while in his teens, Black paid £1 to the New York
Institute of Science for a course of memory training. As a result, he
was able to perform such feats as reading out a jumbled series of
100 figures and then, an hour later, to repeat them all in reverse order.
It is sadly ironical that his chief handicap, during the last few years
of life, should have been loss of memory.

Black evinced an early interest in natural history: he made a
collection of Tasmanian beetles and achieved some reputation as an
entomolgist. The Under-Treasurer came to know of this and asked
if he would be prepared to undertake a survey of every orchard in
Tasmania, in order to determine the incidence of San Jose Scale
which was then causing concern in the Island. Working in association
with Arthur Mills Lea, the Government Entomologist (who transferred

* National Herbarium of Victoria.

233

234 J. H. Willis: The late R. A. Black ( 1880-1963) and his private Herbarium

to Adelaide Museum in 1911), Black travelled constantly for three
months and carried through the San Jose Scale investigation before
he was 21. Soon afterwards he obtained a permanent appointment
with the Council of Agriculture (later the Agricultural and Stock
Department) .

About this time (1900) he wished also to improve his knowledge
of plant life; so, carefully polishing several sovereigns, he offered them
to the honorary Government Botanist, Leonard Rodway, with a
request to be given some tuition in botany. Mr. Rodway returned
the money, saying that he would be glad to teach young Black all
that he knew about the Tasmanian flora. Henceforth, botany became
his all-consuming interest; and eventually the pupil outstripped his
master in several avenues, forming his own herbarium collection and
beginning to publish the results of his independent researches. Over
the years he brought out a number of pamphlets dealing with weed
problems — e.g. Onion Grass (Agric. & Stock Dep. Bulletin n. 93, in
1920) — and he conducted growth experiments with pasture grasses
at Campbelltown during 1920-21. His personal association with
Rodway lasted for 26 years, and contact was maintained by corres-
pondence up to the time of Rodway’s death in 1936. Gratitude to his
old mentor is manifest in a fine Appreciation — “ Leonard Rodway,
C.M.G., L.D.S., L.R.C.S. (London) etc. Late Tasmanian Government
Botanist ” — published in Australasian Herbarium News n. 6: 1-5

(Apr. 1949), n. 8: 3-8 (Apr. 1951).

Raleigh Black was elected a member of the Royal Society of
Tasmania on 18 March 1912, but resigned on 20 December 1926 upon
departure from the State. He was also a member of the Royal
Geographical Society (London) , an original member and later
treasurer of the Tasmanian Field Naturalists’ Club (founded at Hobart
in 1904) and an enthusiastic mountaineer. He helped to establish a
Mountain Club which functioned for five years (July 1911-July 1916) ,
meetings being held at the home of a close friend, Ernest Rodway,
son of the Government Botanist and treasurer of the Club. The
exigencies of World War I were chiefly responsible for dissolution
of this worthy organization; but, during its short life, members climbed
or visited such far-flung objectives as the Hartz Mountains, Adamson’s
Peak, Lake Petrarch, Mt. Field East, Mt. Olympus, Frenchman’s Cap,
The Thumbs, Mt. Roland, Mt. Barrow and Ben Lomond, as well as
many summits nearer Hobart. Everywhere he went, Black continued
to gather botanical specimens and to build up one of the most repre-
sentative collections of Tasmanian plants in existence.

On 20 September 1917 he married Elsie Thorby Noakes, daughter
of Agnes and Edward Thorby Noakes who was a pharmaceutical
chemist and dentist. The Blacks’ home was later blessed with two
sons and a daughter.

With an inventive turn of mind, he had aided the departmental
Poultry Expert, Robert J. Terry, in perfecting an incubator to hatch
out chickens, and he also devised a wine bottle that could not be

J. H. Willis: The late R. A. Black (1880-1963) and his private Herbarium 235

refilled (nor the contents contaminated) . In the Hobart Mercury of
6 June 1914, there appeared an account of another invention by
Black: a disease-proof drinking trough for stock and other animals,
one that was highly commended in Melbourne by Dr. J. H. L.
Cumpston, Director of Quarantine.

After 26 years as a public servant, Black found himself burdened
simultaneously with the following offices: Acting Director of the

Agricultural and Stock Department, Assistant Government Entomolo-
gist, Registrar of Stock Brands, Inspector under the “ Vegetation
Diseases Act ”, “ Codlin Moth Act ”, “ Hay and Chaff Act ” and four
other kindred Acts, Customs Officer under the “ Federal Commerce
Act ”, Federal Deputy Chief Quarantine Officer for animals and Chief
Quarantine Officer for Plants — but with no Government emoluments
other than his normal salary for a single position! He was conscious
also of departmental jealousies, coupled with some political pressure,
and it was a relief when an unexpected opportunity came for him to
leave Tasmania.

Thus, toward the end of March 1926, Raleigh moved with his
young family to Sydney where he was employed as manager and
private secretary to Colonel Bjelke-Petersen, head of the large School
of Physical Culture. Colonel Petersen linked up his new manager
with the “ Millions ” Club so that he could get in touch with leading
businessmen, the legal and medical professions, etc. It was an excit-
ing life, and the regular physical exercises at the School proved of
immense benefit. Later, Black was responsible for the introduction
of fencing into the curriculum, became very proficient in the art
himself and, as Fencing Master, taught the classical Austrian type of
duelling.

With scientific leanings as strong as ever, he lost no time in taking
membership with the Naturalists’ Society of New South Wales, and
from about the middle of 1927 until October 1931 he was secretary to
this body. His first contribution to the Society’s journal, The
Australian Naturalist, was a note on four species of Tasmanian berries
(Vol. 7: 1-3. June 1927) and several other papers on a wide variety
of subjects appeared over the next three years.

With t ^ le onset g re at financial depression, Black came to

Melbourne late in 1931 and worked for “Pivot Superphosphates”
(Phosphate Co-operative Company of Australia Ltd.) as a country
traveller. His beat was the whole north-eastern portion of Victoria
and adjoining districts of the Upper Murray in New South Wales.
1 his itinerant occupation afforded excellent opportunities for botanical
collecting, and he concentrated mainly on grasses, sedges and rushes.

he present writer accompanied him by car for a memorable week
in ^ an ua r y 19£8 visiting Seymour, Yea, Mansfield, Whitfield, Myrtle-
rord, Mt. Buffalo, Bright and the alpine road from Harrietville to
Omeo (across Mts. St. Bernard and Hotham) . Among the plant
material collected then were specimens of 75 species that the writer

236 J. H. Willis: The late R. A. Black (1880-1963) and his private Herbarium

had not previously seen in a living state, and one rare sedge proved
to be new to science — it was described the following year by E. Nelmes
(Kew Herbarium) under the name Carex raleighii , in Black’s honour,
and just a decade later (Jan. 1948) the discoverer himself found it
again at The Steppes in central Tasmania (between Lake Sorell and
the Great Lake) . Invariably cheerful and friendly of approach, he
made an admirable travelling companion and was a good conversa-
tionalist too — full of anecdotes and astonishingly catholic in his tastes
which ranged from botany to mountaineering, sport, animal husbandry,
chemistry, poetry, philology, classical and colonial history and
theology.

Raleigh Black’s work on the Gramine os and Cyperacece brought
him into contact with leading specialists, e.g. S. T. Blake at Brisbane,
Joyce W. Vickery at Sydney, C. E. Hubbard and E. Nelmes at Kew
(England) , Agnes Chase and Jason Swallen at Washington (D.C.) ,
to all of whom he donated specimens. He retired from the “ Pivot ”
Phosphate Co-operative Company on 11 July 1945, and thereafter
concentrated on herbarium and laboratory work at home.

About this time he became increasingly absorbed in the
physiological processes of woody plants, particularly that of water
movement through the vessels. He conducted endless experiments
with solutes, pressure gauges and thermometers, and during 1945 he
completed two mss.: on the “ Cause of the Ascent of Water in

Plants ” and the “ Function of Bordered Pits ”. Black believed that
previously published theories were untenable and that he had
discovered the true explanations. He submitted his lengthy reports
to plant physiologists in the various Australian Universities, and
was disappointed by the lukewarm, if not sceptical or even derisive,
reception accorded them. It was generally felt that, apart from undue
verbosity and a vagueness of terminology, the theses were based upon
too many assumptions and were variously unsound from the mathe-
matical and physical standpoints. Another preoccupation was with
two more inventions for which he sought patent rights: a dripless
spout (for teapots, jugs, flasks, saucepans, etc.) and a self-sealing
paint-brush holder . The writer saw models of both, and they certainly
justified the claims made by their inventor. After World War II he
re-visited his native State on several occasions, and established a
“ Dripless Spout ” Syndicate with several businessmen in Hobart.
He was in Tasmania for nine weeks during the period 18 April-
21 June 1947, first travelling along the north coast to Woolnorth
Point and Cape Grim in the extreme N.W. of the Island. Again, in
the summer of 1948 (Jan.-Feb.) he spent another eight weeks
botanizing in central and southern Tasmania. As a result of the latter
expedition he wrote an informative article “ Wild Berries of
Tasmania ” for the Tasmanian Naturalist, published in its new ser.
1 n. 3: 1-7 (May 1948) and 1 n. 4: 1-8 (May 1949).

R. A. Black was always a deeply religious man, with strong
Christian convictions, but he was also tolerant of others who thought
differently and was receptive to new insights or revelations. As a

J. H. Willis: The late R. A. Black (1880-1963) and his private Herbarium 237

Presbyterian Elder he regularly attended worship at St. Stephen’s
Church in Surrey Hills. Toward the end of 1951 he surprised old
associates by joining the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter Day Saints
(Mormon fraternity) wherein he found solace and for which he helped
to establish a mission Sunday School at Mont Albert. For the next
six years he was engrossed in genealogical researches and paid scant
attention to botany, but he remained an enthusiastic member of the
Royal Historical Society of Victoria. After the transfer of all his
plant collections to Melbourne Herbarium in August 1957, his old
interest revived and he often visited the City to work at these
specimens; but, within three more years, failing memory had rendered
such visits impossible. It was pathetic to perceive the helplessness
of a mind once so alert and retentive.

Raleigh Adelbert Black,

7 Mar. 1957 (at age of 77).

Photo : by courtesy Thorby H. Black

In his heyday Raleigh Black was a thickset, erect and commanding
figure, a little more than 12 stone in weight. His brown, bespectacled
eyes and smiling face beamed good humour, and he was courteous
to a fault; one instinctively felt glad to meet him. This remarkable,
largely self-taught and many-sided man was undoubtedly the most
important collector of Tasmanian vascular flora during the first half
of the present century.

The Raleigh A. Black Herbarium.

In October 1952 Mr. Black estimated that his private collection
of dried plants numbered approximately 15,000 specimens (9,000
mounted numbers and about 6,000 unmounted duplicates) . The great

238 J. H. Willis: The late R. A. Black (1880-1963) and his private Herbarium

majority of species are Tasmanian; but many others are from the
S.E. Australian mainland (eastern and northern Victoria and New
South Wales) , including introduced weeds and some garden plants.
A smaller percentage are donations from Central Australia, the
Kimberleys, Britain, Belgium, Canada and a few other parts of
America. No cryptogams, other than ferns and clubmosses, are
included.

Following the return from war service in Australia of Canadian
botanist, Dr. Bernard Boivin who had inspected Black’s “ Hortus
siccus ”, negotiations for its eventual disposal were begun on
12 November 1946 with Professor Elmer D. Merrill of the Arnold
Arboretum, Massachusetts (U.S.A.) . An offer was also sought from
Sir Edward Salisbury, Director of the Royal Botanic Gardens at Kew;
but it was felt that, if possible, the collection ought to remain in
Australia. Overtures were later made with Canberra and Hobart,
but Black’s high valuation drew little response. Finally, on 3 August
1957, this notable collection was purchased for the National Herbarium
of Victoria at a price of £300.

Specimens have been well selected, all items are meticulously
and neatly annotated, and there is an accompanying card index to
species by which the position of any collection in a box can be
quickly found through a system of reference numbers. Systematic
arrangement of material followed that of L. Rodway’s Tasmanian
Flora (1903). In addition to dried botanical specimens, the collection
includes a mounted set of sections (transverse, radial and tangential)
of Tasmanian timbers, carefully prepared through the years in Mr.
Black’s workshop.

The information, brought together in this account, was obtained
by conversations that the writer had with R. A. Black over a period
of 25 years’ friendship, through his various published articles, and
from records left with his herbarium. The writer is also grateful to
Mr. Thorby H. Black (elder son) for checking certain facts regarding
his late father and for kindly perusing the ms. before it went to press.

BOOK REVIEWS AND NOTICES

by

J. H. Willis.

1. Know Your Trees and Shrubs (A Southern Hemisphere Garden

Book).

By Richmond E. Harrison and Charles R. Harrison. 11" x
8f". Pp. 199, colour plates 582. R. E. Harrison & Co.,
Palmerston North, N.Z., 1965. Price $9 Aust.

The present volume (printed by Kyodo Co., Tokyo, Japan) complements its
author’s very popular Handbook of Trees and Shrubs for the Southern Hemisphere,
but is larger and grander in every way. It is in effect a gallery of colour
photographs, first assembled at his nursery as a horticultural guide to clients and
for professional use, but now attractively offered to a much wider public. The
582 reproductions are arranged alphabetically, by genus, each item being
accompanied by very brief notes on its main features of interest. It would have
been helpful to include the countries of origin for every species (or genus, as the
case may be), yet this information appears against relatively few plates. About
one fifth (119 species) of the whole are Australian subjects, gratifyingly
portrayed; yet one is surprised to find only four species of Acacia and four of
Eucalyptus — the two largest genera in the Commonwealth — , whereas the much
smaller genus Banksia is represented by no less than twelve beautiful studies.
Perhaps wattles and gum-trees were deemed to have been adequately covered
already in other pictorial works of reference. No Australian conifere figure
among plates 562-582, despite the excellence and adaptability of such pines
as Araucaria bidwillii , Callitris columellaris and C. oblonga. By far the largest
part of southern hemisphere lands lie in South America (some 5f million square
miles), and one might reasonably expect a large share of pictures to exemplify
the almost boundless horticultural potentialities of this rich floristic region,
certainly more than the 28 provided which may indicate how relatively few South
American subjects are available in New Zealand gardens.

The suite of 16 South African proteas (Nos. 440-455) is magnificent, likewise
the renderings of 22 camellias (Nos. 562-582), while Arbutus unedo (32) and
Euonymus europaeus (241) are an artistic joy; but, among such a galaxy of
exquisite forms and colours, it is difficult to single out any portrait for special
praise. Choice of material to be photographed is not invariably good, however,
and plate 540 ( Telopea oreades) does little justice to the noble Gippsland
Waratah — its foliage had been so chewed by insects that not a single leaf remains
intact. A few plates are “ off-centre ”, with resultant blurring of detail, e.g. the
Ceanothus and Caryopteris portraits on page 47. Number 8 is certainly not
Acacia hakeoides, as labelled, but resembles either A. dodonaeifolia or A.
ixiophylla. Also, No. 432 can hardly represent Prostanthera nivea which habitually
shows elongated branches and linear leaves; the plant figured is quite unfamiliar
to the reviewer. Plate 543 ought to appear over its correct botanical name
Crinodendron hookerianum. A little more care should have been devoted to
accurate spelling of names. For instance, there are three errors in the titles to
the four plates on page 151: lanceclata, Trichinum and semidicandra should read
lanceolata , Trichinium and semidecandra respectively. On page 58 Crotalaria
“ agitiflora ” should read agatiflora, while Cratoegus is spelt in three different
ways! Merianthus is an error for Marianthus on page 111. Nevertheless, these
few blemishes detract little from the general high quality and usefulness of Know
Your Trees and Shrubs, which is excellent value for the price; it warrants a place
in every botanical and horticultural library of Australasia.

2. How to Know Western Australian Wiidflowers — Part III.

By W. E. Blackall and B. J. Grieve. 8^" x 5£". Pp. 459-595,
i — Ixxviii, colour plates 20-30. University of Western
Australia Press, Perth, 1965. Price $5 Aust.

239

240

J. H. Willis: Book Reviews and Notices

After a lapse of nine years since appearance of Part II in the series “ How to
Know W. A. Wildflowers ”, it is a pleasure to receive and acclaim Part III which
covers the Englerian sequence of families from Onagraceoe to Lamiacece (or
Labiatce ). Only the section Solanacece to Composite (excluding Goodeniacece
already treated in Part II) now requires to be done. In format the new part follows
its predecessor closely; but the paper is thicker, the drawings if anything more
elaborate and the price considerably higher — as one would anticipate from ever-
rising publication costs and the provision of twice as many colour plates. This is
a laudable achievement and will be indispensable to anyone attempting the
identification of Western Australia’s native flowers. The amount of individual
research necessary for Professor Grieve to present in illustrative detail such
extremely difficult groups as the Epacridacece and Verbenacece calls for high
praise. Infinite pains have been taken to avoid errors in the spelling of names.
Colour reproductions are generally faithful and clear enough, although the floral
indefiniteness of Leucopogon australis (plate 23) and Teucrium myriocladum
(plate 29) teach us little about these species. The well known Woolly Foxglove,
Pityrodia axillaris, is described (p. 570) as having flowers “ pink to claret red
Personally, the reviewer is acquainted only with a pale pink to lavender-hued
form (as admirably depicted by Edgar Dell in C. A. Gardner’s Wildflowers of
Western Australia, p. 130 1959) and has never seen the vivid “ Persian rose ”
plant painted for the frontispiece and dust jacket by Margaret Stones.

3. Descriptive Catalogue of West Australian Plants.

Edited by J. S. Beard. 8^" x 5£". Pp. 122, colour plates 16.
Society for Growing Australian Plants (Printed by
Surrey Beatty & Sons, Chipping Norton, N.S.W.) , 1965.
Price $1.20 Aust.

It is somewhat ironical that Western Australia, containing the richest and
perhaps most interesting flora of the Commonwealth, should have remained until
recently the State most poorly endowed with floristic handbooks. After Bentham's
comprehensive Flora Australiensis (1863-78), more than half a century elapsed
until C. A. Gardner published his Enumeratio Plantarum Australice Occidentalis
in 1931 — a bare list of names (but with authorities and places of publication) for
all vascular plants known from the West at that date. Then, in 1954, came
Blackall and Grieves’ monumental “ How to Know ” series, which still continues.
Merely to write out a new census, incorporating all those additions and changes
to nomenclature during three dozen years since the Enumeratio, would be no
mean effort; but, to add notes on habit, habitat and distribution for each item,
would pose a staggering task. Yet this has been accomplished in quite a slender
brochure, issued by the King’s Park Board, and its editor (Dr. John S. Beard)
must be complimented upon such a notable achievement. Arrangement of plant
families follows the Englerian system, but genera and species are both listed
alphabetically for convenience. A botanist may be excused for wondering why
the genera Alyogyne, Hibiscus, Gossypium and Notoxylinon have been transferred
from the family Malvacece to Bombacacece. Ferns, grasses and sedges have been
omitted — but no statement to this effect is made in the introductory paragraph on
page 1. Even without these groups, the list runs to some 5,000 species.

Nothing short of a miracle could eliminate all mistakes from a compilation of
this magnitude. Errors in spelling are remarkably few; but there are some serious
omissions, e.g.:

Page 2 (3rd column at foot of map) — The abbreviation “e” for Eyre
District should be added.

Page 16 — Add the extraordinary subterranean orchid, Rhizanthella gardneri
Rogers.

Page 27 — Add the endoparasite Pilostyles hamiltonii C. A. Gardn.

Page 29 — Add Roycea pycnophylloides C. A. Gardn. and R. spinescens
C. A. Gardn.

J. H. Willis: Book Review’s and Notices

241

Page 40 — Add Acacia merinthophora Pritzel.

Page 98 and 99 — Add at least 7 species of Eremophila.

Page 99 — Add Myoporum platycarpum R. Br.

Page 113 — Add 3 species of Pithocarpa.

Page 114 — Add Sonchus megalocarpus (Hook.f.) J. M. Black and Stuartina
muelleri Sond. ex Schlechtendal.

Several other entries call for deletion, as being either synonyms or wrongly
recorded for the West. Although it is clearly stated on page 1 that introduced
species of all kinds have been omitted, one finds about a dozen weeds that are
indubitable introductions, e.g. Amaranthus albus, A. viridis , Nasturtium officinale,
Diplotaxis tenuifolia, Convolvulus arvensis &c.

The book is enhanced by supplementary notes on the establishment of a
“ native garden ”, recommended plants for various needs, and propagation
techniques. A resplendent cover-photo of Red-and-green Kangaroo Paw is
impressive enough, but most of the other 37 colour prints (inserted throughout
the text) suffer from a smudginess for which the original photographers are
certainly not to blame. The picture opposite page 34, purporting to represent a
Carpobrotus, looks much more like Disphyma australe . Until some kind of a
State flora is published for Western Australia — and the possibility seems quite
remote — this present Descriptive Catalogue will fill a useful role indeed and, at
such a very modest price, it will be in great demand by lovers and growers of the
Western flora.

4. Supplement to J. M. Black’s Flora of South Australia.

By Hansjoerg Eichler. 9£" x 6". Pp. 385. Government
Printer, Adelaide, 1965. Price $1.60 Aust.

One would have thought that, after the revised and much enlarged edition
of Black’s Flora of South Australia (1943-57), very little must remain to be
corrected or added to the nomenclature of vascular plants in that State. But
“science marches on”, and how far such an assumption was from the truth can
be gauged by the size of Dr. Eichler’s monumental supplement — equivalent in
thickness to one half of the complete Floral As stated in his Preface, the purpose
of the new book is to “ add information ... on the systematics, distribution
and nomenclature of the vascular plants occurring wild in South Australia ”. This
objective has been consummated in a most businesslike, detailed and accurate
production that r ill be invaluable to botanists all over Australia (and beyond) for
a long time to come. The author goes through Black’s Flora (second edition),
page by page, and makes every necessary amendment, special attention being given
to correct author citations. Previous unsatisfactory keys for genera in the Pinacece,
Loranthacece, Ranunculacece, Oxalidacece, Onagracece, Solanacece &c., are replaced
by entirely new ones, and a detailed key to Bassia forms an addendum. These
changes result from recent revisional studies by specialists in the groups concerned.
A full Index to Scientific Names rounds off this extremely critical book. Dr.
Eichler has been a stickler for the adoption of original spellings, but some
workers will doubtless dispute his replacement of the long-familiar Lagenophora
by Lagenifera Cass, and Brachycome by Brachyscome Cass.. The creation (on
page 332) by Dr. Loutfy Boulos, Cairo, of a new genus, E mbergeria, to
accommodate the native Dune Thistle (Sonchus megalocarpus ) is open to question;
the only characters leaf texture and achene size — by which Embergeria is said
to differ from Sonchus hardly impress one as being generically significant.

5. Growing Australian Plants.

By Noel Lothian and Ivan Holliday. 8^" x 5j". Pp. 166,
colour reproductions 32 (on 8 plates). Rigby Ltd.!
Adelaide, 1964. Price $3.75 Aust.

An encouraging sign is the avidity for printed guides by increasing numbers of
Australian home-gardeners who attempt the cultivation of our indigenous plants.
Their efforts will doubtless be aided by the small volume now under review; but

242

J. H. Willis: Book Reviews and Notices

it is felt that a more definitive title would have been “ Growing Australian Trees
and Shrubs at Adelaide The authors are preoccupied, almost entirely, with the
suitability or various woody species for the Adelaide environment, where
predominantly calcareous soils and not particularly favourable climatic factors
have a restrictive influence. However. Chapter 9 does mention a handful of
herbaceous plants, while the succeeding nine pages give the essentials of
propagation techniques and general garden planning. Chapters 2 to 8 (inclusive)
set out the physical conditions obtaining in seven widespread types of country,
ranging from the Mallee to Alpine Regions and Sub-tropical Rain Forest. Plants
typical of each region are arranged alphabetically, with descriptive notes and
some indication of distribution. To list (in Chapter 4) such trees as Eucalyptus
cinerea, Exocarpos cupressiformis and Hakea laurina as typical of “ Temperate
Rain Forests ” is surely misleading, and it is hard to understand just why
Brachychiton acerifolius (page 135) should be classified under “ Monsoonal
Trees ”, extending as it does from Illawarra district (N.S.W.) only into southern
Queensland. Macadamia integrifolia and M. tetraphylla are the two best cropping
species of Queensland Nut, yet neither is mentioned in the notes on this important
genus (p. 131). References to Nothofagus (p. 47) and Bauer a (p. 61) imply that
only two species of each are known to occur in the Australian region, ignoring
the existence of third members — deciduous N. gunnii on Tasmanian mountains, and
B. capitata of the Hawkesbury sandstone country, N.S.W.

Obsolete names are retained for several entities, e.g. Podocarpus alpina instead
of P. lawrencei and Richea gunnii instead of R. continentis on page 124. Altogether,
it would appear that the authors did not avail themselves of current botanical
literature. Consistent mis-spellings are exemplified by “Calythrix” (pp. 115 &
159), “ Drymis ” (pp. 122 & 160), Hakea “ buckulenta ” (pp. 105 & 162),
Helichrysum “ thysoideum ” (pp. 123 & 162) and Hibbertia “ ascicularis ” (pp.
80 & 162). Colour plates are fairly true to form and register, although some-
times with subject-matter too distant or crowded. No one would recognize
Ewartia nubigena from the plate facing page 7, which offers us a globular green
cushion. For a book of only 166 pages, costing 3.75 dollars, there are an
inordinate number of mistakes.

6. South Australian National Parks and Wild Life Reserves.

Edited by Bernard C. Cotton. 9^" x 6". Pp. 190, plates 16
(5 in colour), text figs. 57. Government Printer,
Adelaide, 3rd. ed. 1934. No price.

This valuable handbook, now in its third edition, is a mine of information on
the history, geology and biological facets of South Australia’s permanent reserves,
especially the small National Park areas on the Mt. Lofty Ranges. It is in the
nature of a symposium by various acknowledged specialists, is well put together
and attractively printed on art paper, and the many excellent photographic
illustrations are a delight. Of particular interest to a botanist are the chapters on
general vegetation, orchids (with good line drawings for every species), trees and
fungi. Professor Sir John Cleland provides a full census to the plants of the
Mt. Lofty Ranges. Two of the five colour plates are from paintings by Miss
Alison Ashby — Grevillea lavandulacea and Banksia marginata — and the cover
design is a pleasing watercolour reproduction of a gum-lined creek. As stated in
a contemporary review for the South Australian Naturalist (Sept. 1964) by C. T.
James: “This book should be on the shelves of all South Australians interested

in the natural history of their State. Doubtless many visitors will be led by it

to greater horizons of enjoyment and interest.” Copies may be obtained from the
South Australian Museum, Immigration Publicity and Tourist Bureau at Adelaide,
or from either of the Belair and Para Wirra National Parks.

J. H. Willis: Book Reviews and Notices

243

7. The Vegetation of Wyperfeld National Park.

By J. Ros. Garnet. 8£" x 5£". Pp. 95, half-tone photographs
23, line drawings of species 100. Field Naturalists Club
of Victoria, Melbourne, 1965. Price $1.50 Aust.

Any pioneering venture to stimulate interest in, and appreciation of, our
native flora is praiseworthy, and high marks must go to the publication cited
above. Never before has there been a separate book or booklet on the vegetation
of a Victorian State Park; but Mr. Ros. Garnet’s account of the plant-life at
Wyperfeld — Victoria’s largest National Park, of 139,760 acres — sets a commend-
able standard for similar surveys of other State reserves for flora and fauna.
After his introductory remarks, the author limns in those background features
(gum-fringed watercourses, box flats, claypans, sandhills and intervening troughs)
that immediately impress the visitor, then goes on to describe in popular vein the
principal formations and ecological communities involved. A brief history of
botanical exploration in Wyperfeld district precedes the more utilitarian part of
the handbook, viz. a series of line sketches for 100 species that are conspicuous
in the reserve. More than one quarter of the whole indigenous vascular flora is
covered by these helpful drawings which include all 14 Acacia species and
seven of the ten eucalypts. An accompanying check-list gives, in systematic order,
the names of every native and introduced plant known to date from the Park,
their accepted vernaculars, the habitats, the collectors and times of initial records.
An index to scientific and common names and a folding map complete the
brochure. Such information really provides a good cross-section of mallee
vegetation in general.

With the exception of Desert Heath-myrtle (p. 15), half-tone photographs
are clear and attractive; but the cover-picture in colour, featuring Calytrix
tetragona is not nearly so arresting as N. Chaffer’s flamboyant study of Waitzia
acuminata that appeared on the cover of the N.S.W. Bank’s staff journal
“ Etruscan ” for Sept.-Dee. 1962, to herald a fascinating, article on Wyperfeld by
A. H. Chisholm. If there be any fault to find with the present book, it lies in
the rather flimsy paper cover and stapling — unsuitable for much handling by an
inquirer in the field — but that was not the author’s responsibility, and a firm
board cover would have increased the cost materially. Copies may be obtained
from the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria, National Herbarium, South Yarra.

8. Gardening for Australians (Penguin Handbook AU 14).

By R. T. M. Pescott. 7" x 4^". Pp. 231, plates 59, text figs. 8.
Penguin Books Pty. Ltd., Ringwood, Vic., 1965. Price
$1.25 Aust.

There is no dearth of larger, expensive tomes on the principles and practices
of gardening in Australia; but real need exists for authoritative books of digest-
or pocket-size. R. T. M. Pescott’s admirable Penguin Handbook (AU 14) will
surely help to satisfy such a demand. Its 231 pages are packed with well-arranged
useful information for the amateur (and not so amateur) gardener. Naturally
there is a strong bias toward horticulture in temperate latitudes, but only a
small fraction of Australia’s population lives and gardens in the tropics. The 59
half-tone photographs are very largely drawn from subject-matter in the Royal
Botanic Gardens, Melbourne, of which Mr. Pescott is Director; they are of good
quality and arranged in four groups through the text. The reader is guided
logically through the developmental stages of a typical home garden — from his
selection of a suitable site, through a consideration of local soils, manurial
requirements and equipment for various purposes, to the actual garden lay-out,
planting and subsequent maintenance. Instruction is given on such special features
as rockeries, pools, trellises, lawns, hedges and the modernization of old gardens.

Recommendations of appropriate plants are given for both the “ changing
garden” (annuals, bulbs, border and potted plants) and the “fixed garden”
(trees, shrubs and perennial climbers), and the whole survey is topped off with a
list of references for additional reading. If there be any significant omissions,
they are the author’s silence on the subjects of mulching which is so important
in drier localities — both for conservation of soil moisture and as a deterrent to

3198/66.— 5

244

J. H. Willis: Book Reviews and Notices

weeds — and of pest control. Perhaps the latter subject is too vast to be grappled
with in a book of such small dimension, but it would have been useful to learn
how one should set about dealing with such frequent enemies as aggressive
weeds, snails, eel-worms, earwigs, caterpillars, pear slugs, thrips, aphids, scales,
leaf-curl, die-back, sooty mould and the various kinds of chloroses.

9. Shrubs and Trees for Australian Gardens.

By Ernest E. Lord. 9£" x 7". Pp. 462, half-tone photos 135,
colour plates 15. Lothian Publishing Co. Pty. Ltd.,
Melbourne, 4th ed. 1964. Price $14.70 Aust.

Mr. E. E. Lord’s thick volume really qualifies for the status of an encyclopaedia
on woody plants amenable to Australian horticulture, and it is by far the most
comprehensive and up-to-date work of its kind. No introduction to the gardening
public is needed, except a reminder that this fourth edition has been completely
revised and much enlarged. There is a 50 per cent, increase in the number of
species and varieties described — from 2,335 items in 1956 to 3,524 in the present
book. Together with synonyms and common names, the index now contains a
total of 6,651 entries, justifying the author’s confidence that “ virtually every
garden grown variety of shrub and tree likely to be met with is here referred to
and can be quickly traced through the comprehensive index system ”. Once again,
inose unrivalled pictures of the late Herbert T. Reeves (misquoted as “ H. W.
Reeves ” on introductory page No. v) form the bulk of the illustrative material,
and Professor J. S. Turner has contributed a very informative 9-page foreword on
“ The Living Plant ”. To use a familiar cliche, Lord’s handbook is a “ must ” for
every horticultural bookshelf worth consulting.

10. The Native Orchids of Tasmania.

By M. J. Firth. 8^" x 5£". Pp. 90, illust. to 80 species (half-
tones and line drawings). Printed by C. L. Richmond &
Sons Pty. Ltd., Devonport, Tas., 1965. Price $3.25 Aust.

Every State except Queensland and Tasmania has had a popular guide to those
ever-intriguing wildflowers the orchids. A strongly bound little volume,
representing the fruit of 30 years’ investigation, now fills this need in the latter
region. Author M. John Firth is a horticultural officer in the Tasmanian
Department of Agriculture, an enthusiastic naturalist and, above all, a keen lover
of orchids. He has provided keys and ample descriptions to the 128 species of
Ochidacea? known for the Island State, all but two kinds being terrestrial. Notes
on habitat, distribution and flowering times are given, and the chapter-titles
(e.g. “ Mayflies, Mosquitoes and Gnats ”, as in Rica Erickson’s Orchids of the
West) serve to awaken curiosity. The key to Prasophyllum, that difficult genus
of leek-orchids, is accompanied by drawings of the flowers (with analytical
dissections) for all species — the work of Leo Cady, Kiama, N.S.W. Critical
enlargements of column structure are also an aid to identification with Thelymitra
species (the colourful sun-orchids). A greenhood motif adorns the frontispiece
and dust-jacket. This excellent “ book for the beginner ” will be welcomed by an
even larger circle of botanists, and should enjoy a steady sab in Tasmania for
years to come. Fortunately, a similar work on Victorian orchids (by Miss C. E.
Gray) has just appeared.

11. The Endemic Flora of Tasmania (First Monograph).

By Margaret Stones (colour plates) and Winifred M. Curtis
(ecological text). 18" x 13". Pp. approx. 36, colour
plates of approx. 40 plants. The Ariel Press, London,
1966. Price $39.38 Aust. (-f postage 50 cents).

A much more ambitious, one might say “ de luxe ”, project is the preparation
of a series of five monographs on the endemic flowers and conifers of Tasmania.
It is intended to depict in natural size about 200 subjects drawn from life by the

J. H. Willis: Book Reviews and Notices

245

talented artist Margaret Stones. Dr. Winifred M. Curtis (University of Tasmania)
is to supplement these magnificent colour plates with a botanical and ecological
text, and the work will be sponsored by Lord Talbot de Malahide. The reputations
of both delineator and botanist guarantee a superlative production, and
subscriptions are now invited for Monograph Number One which it is hoped to
publish later this year.

12. The Plants of the Australian Capital Territory (Technical Paper
No. 21, Division of Plant Industry, C.S.I.R.O.).

By Nancy T. Burbidge and M. Gray. 9^" x 7". Pp. 136.

Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research
Organization, Melbourne, 1965. No Price.

A comprehensive work on the plant-life of the A.C.T. has long been a
desideratum, and even a bare list of species does not seem to have been printed
since 1919. Until publication of the illustrated handbook (now in course of
preparation), Dr. Nancy Burbidge’s “Synoptic account” of the flora will be most
welcome. Her present contribution takes the form of a series of keys, first to
plant families and then to included genera under which the principal species are
mentioned, with brief notes on habitat. The 24 local species of Acacia and 21
of Eucalyptus are not specified; but both genera are covered in the author’s
separate illustrated booklets, The Wattles and The Gum Trees of the Australian
Capital Territory (issued in 1961 and 1963 respectively). The key for ferns was
contributed by Mr. Max Gray, and that for the larger fleshy fungi by Dr. C. J.
Shepherd. It may appear unnecessarily ambitious to attempt any coverage of
mosses and fungal growths in a work of this kind. The former group, however, is
not very large in the A.C.T. (about 84 species) and has been rather well collected.
Several mis-spellings appear among moss names, e.g.: Sphagnum “secundum’
instead of S. subsecundum, “ Andrcea ” for Andrecea and Bartramia “ papillosa ”
for B. papillata. Strangely enough, no species of the large genus Barbula is on
record yet for the Canberra region. As to fungi, the submission of such a simple
key (to a few “genera”) now amounts almost to naivete. The all-important
criteria for delimiting genera (hyphal structure, spore ornamentation, cystidia and
chemical reactions) are not even mentioned. Until the vast fungal flora of
Australia becomes much better known, it seems premature to give regional lists of
genera; so often the names used by older workers, with traditional concepts, have
little meaning in the light of modern subdivisions and re-classifications. Some
reference to former floristic writings on the A.C.T. would have been helpful,
particularly to that of R. H. Cambage — “Notes on the Native Flora of New
South Wales. Part X The Federal Capital Territory ” in Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.
43: 673-711 (Mar. 1919), which contains a full check-list of the indigenous
vascular flora.

13. Taxonomy and Nomenclature of Eucalypts (Leaflet No. 92,
Forestry and Timber Bureau).

By R. D. Johnston and Rosemary Marryatt. 9^" x 6". Pp.
24. Commonwealth Government Printer, Canberra
1965. No price.

In the 30 odd years since publication of W. F. Blakely’s Key to the Eucalypts
many new species have been described and revisional studies by various specialists
have resulted in critical re-appraisal of certain taxa. Some groups have been
further subdivided, some fused, and other “ species ” of Blakely recognized as
natural hybrids or clinal phases. The large number of name changes involved is
making it increasingly difficult, if not bewildering, for the forester, nurseryman
and non-specialising botanist to name their eucalypts with any certainty
Fortunately, all the taxonomic and nomenclatural changes published since
Blakely s Key have now been brought together in the slim pamphlet cited above
Tins very useful collation lists alphabetically all species of Eucalyptus (together
with infraspecific taxa) now accepted; their corresponding Blakely numbers
appear at the left-hand margin, while on the right-hand side are relevant remarks
on status and previous treatments of taxa.

246

J. H. Willis: Book Reviews and Notices

14. The Thelephoraceae of Australia and New Zealand (Bulletin No.

145, New Zealand Department of Scientific and Industrial
Research).

By G. H. Cunningham. 11" x 8^". Pp. 359, half-tone plates
5, text figs. 200. Wellington, N.Z., 1963 — posthumous.
Price $8.12 Aust.

Comprehensive monographs on large groups of fungi are all too infrequent in
the Australian region. Dr. G. H. Cunningham’s account of the family Thele-
phoracece in Australia and New Zealand was particularly welcome, but it is
regrettable that this fine publication should have appeared eight months after the
author died (18 July 1962). Great credit is due to the staff members of the Plant
Diseases and Fruit Research Divisions, D.S.I.R., Auckland, who attended to the
proof reading and completed the index for this book. One new genus and 20
new species are among the 261 species described in detail, and for each of them
the type locality, world distribution, habitat and known range in Australasia
(chiefly New Zealand) are given.

A most important feature is the series of 200 superb line drawings that serve
to illustrate the hymenial and subhymenial structure of nearly all species at high
magnification. Thus can be seen at a glance the spore details, basidia,
paraphyses, setae, cystidia, fascicles, metuloids, hyphal vescicles and other
microscopic organs of diagnostic value for various genera and species — all from
the late Dr. Cunningham’s pen. Some of these sections are startlingly beautiful,
if complicated, objects. For instance, the fasciculate fan-like setae of Hymenochcete
dictator, the parasol-shaped cystidia in Tubulicrinis umbracula and the fantastic
turret-like fascicles of Mycobonia disciformis belie the often drab and uninteresting
macroscopic appearance of these pliant or encrusting “ leather fungi ”, bark
fungi ” &c. Excellently printed, the Thelephoracece is furnished with a 6-page
glossary, and it will be essential to a mycological library.

15. Polyporaceae of New Zealand (Bulletin No. 164, New Zealand

Department of Scientific and Industrial Research) .

By G. H. Cunningham. 11" x 8J". Pp. 304, half-tone plates
7, text figs. 59. Wellington, N.Z., 1965 — posthumous.
Price $8.75 Aust.

This excellent companion volume to Dr. Cunningham’s Thelephoracece follows
closely the size and format of its predecessor but is not nearly so comprehensively
illustrated. It was prepared from a manuscript virtually completed by the
author before his death, and the immense amount of editorial work again reflects
high credit on those dedicated members of the D.S.I.R. (particularly Miss Joan
M. Dingley, Plant Diseases Division) who saw it through the press. The title
is perhaps a little misleading, for the monograph covers not only polypores
occurring in New Zealand but those of the whole South-west Pacific, including
Australia, New Guinea and Fiji. There are full descriptions to 242 species, with
synonymies, distributional data and informative comments. The number of
species known for all Australian States is 206 (113 being Victorian), and for
New Zealand 143; only 5 species are recorded from Pacific islands but not
from Australia or New Zealand. Three genera ( Flabellophora , Dendrochaete
and Metuloidea) and 13 species are published as new; but it is regrettable that
Dendrochaete must immediately lapse into synonymy, duplicating as it does
the circumscription of Echinochaete D. A. Reid that was recently published
in Kew Bulletin 17: 283 (1963).

Dr. Cunningham has made a brave attempt to define genera more naturally
than has been done in the past, and his classification — largely by hyphal
systems, hyphal colour and spore-wall features — differs radically from that of
previous workers in Australia. For instance, the 21 species of Polyporus, as
presented in J. B. Cleland’s Toadstools and Mushrooms and other Larger Fungi
of South Australia Part 2: pp. 206-217 (June 1935), are variously assigned to

J. H. Willis: Book Reviews and Notices

247

the following nine genera: Polyporus sens strict. (6 spp.) Dictyopanus (1),

Tyromyces (2), Coltricia (2), Grifola (2), Piptoporus (2), Inonotus (2),
Phellinus (1), Fuscoporia (1). It will surprise many mycologists to find that
no true Fomes inhabits the Australian region; most of the species, previously
so called, are referred by Cunningham to Phellinus.

It had been Dr. Cunningham’s cherished hope to visit Australia and study
our Polyporaceae in the field, but unfortunately his wish was never realized.
He worked solely from dried Australian material, and his diagnoses sometimes
fail to bring out the subtle characters observable only in living material. Thus
Osmoporus decipiens, of dead Casuarina wood, is noteworthy for the pinkish-
glaucous bloom on its pore surface — a feature omitted from the description of
this attractive bracket-fungus on p. 248 of the monograph.

Despite a multiplication of genera (now 32) and numerous unfamiliar
combinations thereunder, this long-awaited work gives a valuable survey of an
appallingly difficult subject. The Polyporaceae are far more interesting and
diverse than Thelephoroid fungi, and, thanks to the late Dr. Cunningham’s genius,
one can now reliably identify most S.W. Pacific species and be in a favourable
position to evaluate any new records of the future. A formidable list of 322
“ rejected and unknown species ” is accompanied by annotations on pp. 264-283,
serving to emphasize the utter confusion that has plagued nomenclature of
Polyporaceae until quite recent times. The only previous publication embracing
polypores of the whole Commonwealth was M. C. Cooke’s Handbook of
Australian Fungi (1892), a work described by C. G. Lloyd in his Myths of
Mycology (Dec. 1917) as “ perhaps the worst textbook on fungi that was ever
published”. Accepted names and synonyms (in Italics) are indexed at the end
of the new book, in the form of alphabetical^ arranged specific epithets
followed by appropriate genus. It is thus a simple matter to trace the origin
and place of publication of any name mentioned in the text.

16. The Alpine Ranunculi of New Zealand (Bulletin No. 165, New
Zealand Department of Scientific and Industrial Research).

By F. J. F. Fisher. 11" x 8^". Pp. 191, figs. 130 (drawings,
maps and 7 half-tone photos.). Government Printer,
Wellington, N.Z., 1965. Price $8.75 Aust.

Although this work concerns only the 14 alpine representatives of New
Zealand’s 36 indigenous species of Ranunculus, it is one of the best and most
attractively printed botanical monographs yet to appear in Australasia. Dr.
Fulton Fisher has made an intensive study, both in field and laboratory, of his
chosen subject over a number of years, and the method of presentation is a
model for similar projects in the future. The five chapters deal with introductory
techniques and approaches, distribution and variability, patterns of variation,
phylogeny, and finally a taxonomic revision. Far more space is devoted to
ecological, morphological and evolutionary considerations than to classical
taxonomy. Some conclusions are not very clearly expressed and seem to verge
on the esoteric; for example (p 98) : “ it is believed that there are few obstacles
to the reconciliation of the disjunct levels of the taxonomic hierarchy with the
smoothly progressive sequence of phases of evolutionary divergence”. Copious
line-drawings and portraits illustrate every species, and intergrading leaf-shapes
are shown for many hybrids; these are the work of a competent botanical artist,
Mr. K. R. West, A particularly pleasing feature is the fine series of coloured
maps to indicate distribution patterns, all land above 4,000 feet being shown i.i
grey against white. Drawings of leaf-shapes and other anatomical characters
have been delicately superimposed in black on the empty spaces of certain maps
which are all large enough to pin-point occurrences very accurately. This worthv
treatise concludes with a 3-page list of literary references.

248

J. H. Willis: Book Reviews and Notices

17. Trees of Victoria — an illustrated field guide.

By L. F. Costermans. 5^" x 4±". Pp. 80, central map,
photographs 26, and line drawings throughout. Privately
published, Melbourne, Aug. 1966. Price 50c Aust.

The late Dr. R. T. Patton’s 48-page booklet, Know your own Trees (1942),
served a very useful purpose as a popular introduction to Victoria’s eucalypts;
but it lacked sufficient illustrations and has been out of print for many years.
In H. Oakman’s “ Jacaranda Pocket Guide”, Some Trees of Australia (reprinted
1965), only ten of the 64 species described are indigenous to Victoria; so the
book is virtually useless to residents there. A growing demand by Victorian
naturalists, bush-walkers, schools, youth and other organizations for a simple
yet reliable pocket-book to native trees (occurring commonly in various parts
of the State) has now been satisfied.

As Dr. David Ashton remarks in his Foreword to Trees of Victoria , “ here
is a booklet which can be thoroughly recommended ”. The present reviewer
concurs, and is amazed at the amount of meaty information so attractively
offered in this excellent little brochure. For each one of the chosen six dozen
trees there is a succinct but adequate description together with clear line
drawing of essential features, and the illustrations accompanying every eucalypt
species include a distribution map, profile-sketch of tree, both adult and juvenile
leaves, mature buds and fruits. In its firm glossy cover, contrasting a wet and
a dryish forest scene, the book is wonderfully good value for 50 cents; it is
certain to sell quickly. The painstaking author must be complimented on the
high quality and usefulness of his achievement.

18. The Lichens and Mosses of Mac.Robertson Land (A.N.A.R.E.

Scientific Reports B (2) — Publication No. 82).

By R. B. Filson. 10" x T\". Approx. 170 pp. including 40
plates in line and colour, 40 figures (embracing maps) .
Antarctic Division, Department of External Affairs,
Melbourne, 1966. Price $9.00 Aust.

This work, on sale last February, promises to be the most attractive
publication yet issued by the Antarctic Division. The land flora of Antarctica
is extremely limited, that of Mac.Robertson Land in the Australian Sector
consisting of a few hardy cryptogams most of which are saxicolous lichens;
but it is important that these be made known to the scientific world. Mr. Rex
Filson, who spent a year at Mawson (and several months on Macquarie Island),
has handled the lichen flora and only two known mosses in a masterful way,
describing in microscopic detail all species discovered in the Sector to date,
listing all known collections and providing a set of superb colour drawings that
create a high standard for illustrative cryptogamic work in Australasia; six of
the 26 lichen species — half belonging to Buellia — and one of the two mosses
are published as new.

The cost is not excessive for such a project in a field of verv limited appeal.
One must congratulate both publisher and printer on their excellent presentation
and superior materials used for the book.

MUELLERIA

VOLUME 1

DATES OF PUBLICATION

No. 1, pages 1- 64 — distributed 22 February 1956

„ 2, „ 65-114—

„ 3, „ 115-257—

15 December 1959
15 July 1967

249

GENERAL INDEX

VOLUME I. (1956-1967)

Where the name of a taxon is merely mentioned in the text or cited in
synonymy, then page numbers are in thinner type. Where an illustration appears
in this volume, the name of the plant is followed by an asterisk (*).

Abies columbaria, 64
Acacia

lineata, 114
flexifolia, 114
diffusa, 121, 123
lucasii, 159
phasmoides*, 121-123
Acomis, 161
Acrotriche, 140
prostrata, 231, 232
Adansonia
digitata, 61
gregorii, 61-63
Agaricus

candescens, 213-217
illuminans, 213-217
lampas, 213-216
nidiformis, 213, 215
phosphorus, 213-216
Agropyron scabrum, 231
Apalochlamys
billardierii, 160
spectabilis, 160
Aphodius howitti, 74
Apocynacece, 101, 142
Araucaria

columnaris, 64
excels a, 64
heterophylla, 64
Aster

frostii, 24, 31
microphyllus, 25
phlogopappus, 32, 33
vernicosus, 31
Aston, Helen I: Aquatic

Angiosperms — Records of four in-
troduced species new to Victoria,
169-174

Astroloma, 140
Baeckea

gunniana, 139-140
guriniana var. latifolia, 139-140
utilis var. latifolia, 139
Banhsia

canei, 118 - 120 , 142
integrifolia, 118, 120
marginata, 118, 120
Baobab. A bibliography of the
Australian, 61-63

“ Basket Fungus Notes on the
development and structure of
the, 219-221
Bedfordia salicina, 163
Beni, Gerhard: New species and

varieties of Ptilotus R.Br.
(Amaranthaceae) , 102-108

Bertya findlayi, 159

Bibbya muelleri, 91, 92

Bibbya. Reduction of the lichen genus,

91-92

Bibby, P.N.S.: A remarkable lichen
from Central Australia, 60
Bibliographia Huntiana, 224-225
Bignoniaceae, 150

Black*, Raleigh Adelbert (1880-1963),
and his private herbarium. The
late, 233-238

“ Blackfellows’ Bread ”, A biblio-
graphy of, 203-212
Book Reviews and Notices —

Beard (editor), Descriptive cata-
logue of West Australian plants,
240-241

Blackall & Grieve, How to know
West Australian wildflowers, 239 -
240

Burbidge & Gray, The Plants of the
Australian Capital Territory, 245
Costermans, Trees of Victoria — an
illustrated field guide, 248
Cotton (editor), South Australian
national parks and wild life
reserves, 242

Cunningham, Polyporaceae of New
Zealand, 246-247

Cunningham, The Thelophoraceae of
Australia and New Zealand, 246
Eichler, Supplement to J. M. Black’s
Flora of South Australia, 241
Filson, The Lichens and Mosses of
Mac. Robertson Land (Antarctica),
248

Firth, Native orchids of Tasmania,

244

Fisher, The alpine Ranunculi of New
Zealand, 247

Garnet, Vegetation of Wyperfeld
National Park, 243
Harrison & Harrison, Know your
trees and shrubs (a southern
hemisphere garden book), 239
Johnson & Marryat, Taxonomy and
nomenclature of Eucalypts, 245
Lord, Shrubs and trees for Australian
gardens (ed. 4). 244
Lothian & Holliday, Growing
Australian Plants, 241-242
Pescott, Gardening for Australians,
243-244

Stones & Curtis. The endemic flora
of Tasmania, 244-245
Boronia anemonifolia var. variabilis,

128-129

251

Bossiaea folios a, 142
Brachycome. Two new Australian
species of, 111-113
Brachycome
ciliaris, 112

ciliaris var. lanuginosa, 112
curvicarpa, 111
dimorphocarpa* , 112-113, 174
tetrapterocarpa* , 111, 174
Brachyloma, 140

Brown’s (Robert) Bass Strait journal
of April/May 1802, 46-50
Brown’s (Robert) collectings in
Victoria, 51-54

Brown’s (Robert) 48 species from
Middle Island (Recherche Archi-
pelago), 99-101
Burtonia scabra, 126

Cacalia salicina, 163
Caladenia
arenaria, 45
concolor, 45

patersonii var. concolor, 45
Calea spectabilis, 160
Callitris
glauca, 64
huegelii, 64
preissii, 64, 99
robusta, 64

Calomeria amaranthoides, 161
Calotis suffruticosa, Reinstatement of,

109-110

Calotis

lappulacea, 109
suffruticosa* , .109, 110
Cameron, A. K. : The Eucalyptus

species of Cavanilles, 34^42
Car ex raleighii, 236
Cassinia

complanata, 160, 162
punctulata, 162
spectabilis, 160
uncata, 160, 162

Catcheside, D. G. : Tortula pagorum

in Australia, 227-230
Cavanilles. The Eucalyptus species of,

34-42

Centrolepidaceae, 99
Centropappus brunonis, 162
Chara

australis, 177

batrachioides, 178, 180, 181
behriana, 178
contraria, 178
dichopitys, 178
fragilis, 178, 179, 193
gymnopitys, 179-181, 193
gymnopus, 181
hookeri, 181
inconspicua, 181, 183
leptopitys, 181, 193-194
leptosperma, 181-182
macropogon, 182, 184
microphylla, 182
mollusca, 194

muelleri, 182
myriophylla, 182, 194
preissii, 182-183
psilopitys, 183
scoparia, 183
submollusca, 176
subtilis, 181, 183
succincta, 183

Characeae (Australian) which sur-
vived the Armidale Fire, 175-196
Chenopodiaceae, 100
Chlamysporum juncifolium, 45
Chondropsis semiviridis, 60
Choristemon, 140
Clathrus gracilis *, 219-221
Clavaria larvarum, 81, 82
Compositae 99, 101, 156
Compositae. Systematic notes on
Victorian, 24-33
Comptosia —
carculum, 8, 14
cuneata, 10, 14, 16

Conifers. Recent changes in the
nomenclature of three Australian,

64

Cordvceps. Australian species of the
fungal genus, 67-89
Cordvceps collections in Australia.

Further, 223-224
Cordyceps
aemonce, 76
aphodii, 72, 73, 74, 85
australis, 74
?bicephala, 71, 73, 74
brittlebankii, 72, 73, 75
consumpta, 77
coxii, 72, 73, 75, 223
craigii , 77 78

cranstounii* 69. 72, 73, 76, 79, 88
dovei, 72, 73, 76
entomorrhiza, 71, 80, 85
entomorrhiza var. “ menesteridis ”,
71, 79

furcata, 72, 73, 77
glaziowii, 80
gracilioides, 71, 79, 80
gracilis, 72, 79, 80, 82
gunnii*, 69-71, 73, 77, 78, 89, 223
hawkesii*, 69, 71, 72, 73, 78, 79, 89,
223

henleyce, 72, 83
heteropoda , 82, 83
hillii, 77, 78
huegelii, 81, 82
larvarum, 76, 81, 82
melbourniensis, 83, 85
meneristitis, 71, 72, 73, 79, 80, 83,
90, 223

menesteridis, 71, 79, 80, 90
militaris, 72, 73, 80
pieli, 72, 78, 79

robertsii*, 69, 70, 72, 73, 76, 79, 81,
82, 84, 85, 87, 223
scottiana, 72, 73, 82, 224
selkirkii, 72, 76, 81, 82
sobolifera , 68

252

taylori, 67, 71, 72, 73, 82, 83, 84, 85,

224

trictence, 72, 83, 85
unilateralis subsp. australis, 74
?. sp. nov. (aff. C. barnesii ), 224
sp. (aff. C. entomorrhiza) , 85
Court, A. B.: A new species of

Pestalotiopsis (Fungi Imperfecti)
on Pittosporum bicolor, 43-44
Court, A. B.: Studies in Mimosaceae
—Part I, 114

Court, A. B. & Willis, J. H.— see Willis,
J. H.

Crassulaceae, 98
Cupressaceae, 99
Cupressus columnaris, 64
Cyathodes, 140

Daviesia
corymbosa, 124
corymbosa var. laxiflora, 123
mimosoides, 124
mimosoides var. laxiflora, 123
Davis, Gwenda L.: Reinstatement of
Calotis suffruticosa Domin (Com-
posite), 109-110

Davis, Gwenda L. : Two new Austra-
lian species of Brachycome Cass.
(Composite), 111-113
Dilleniacee, 100

Dillwynia capitata var. uliginosa, 124
Diplopappus passerinoides, 31
Dombeya excelsa, 64

Elm. Notes on the growth of an
English, 54
Epacridacee, 101, 140
Epacris impressa, 125
Epilobium cinereum, 231
Eria. Artificial key to the genus in
Australia, 21

Eria (Orchidacee) . A new species of,

21-23

Eria

johnsonii*, 21-23
irukandjiana, 23
Erickson, Rica, & Willis, J. H.:

New species and varieties of
Stylidium from Western Australia,
7-20

Eriostemon trinerve, 136, 137
Eryngium rostratum, 231
Eucalypts, 245

Eucalyptus species of Cavanilles. The,

34-42

Eucalvptus. Typification of Eight
Victorian Species Names in, 165-
168

Eucalyptus

amygdalina , 38, 134, 135, 166
behriana, 165
blakelyi, 132-133
bosistoana, 165
botryoides, 35, 41
camaldulensis, 133, 134
capitellata, 37, 42

coolabah, 134
corymbosa, 35, 41
corymbosus, 35, 41
crebra, 40-42
fasciculosa, 166
glaucescens, 142
gracilis, 166
gummijera, 35, 41
haemastoma, 40
kybeanensis, 142
largiflorens, 134, 166
leucoxylon, 167
melliodora, 133
micrantha, 38-42
microtheca, 134
muelleriana, 167
obliqua, 37, 42
oxypoma, 133-134
pauciflora, 142
platypodos, 35, 41
racemosus

[=E. racemosa]*, 38, 39-42
regnans, 167
risdonii, 135

risdonii , var. elata, 134, 135
robusta, 36, 41
rostratus, 36, 37, 41
salicifolius, 38, 42
saligna, 38, 42
simmondsii, 135
tasmanica, 134, 135
tenuiramis, 134-135
tereticornis, 133

Eucla district, W. A. Notes on the
vegetation of, 92-96
Euphorbiacee, 100
Euphrasia
alpina, 148
alsa, 148
antarctica, 148
crassiuscula, 147
gibbsiae, 147, 148
gibbsiae, forma comber i, 147, 148
gibbsiae forma subglabrifolia, 147,
148

glacialis, 147

glacialis var. eglandulosa, 146-147
gunnii, 148
milliganii, 148
scabra var. alsa, 148
scabra var. caudata, 149-150
striata, 148
Eurybia
glutescens, 31
gunniana, 32, 33
subrepanda, 32
Eutassia heterophylla, 64

Filson, Rex B.: Supplementary des-

criptions for two Victorian desert
lichens, 197-202

Franco, Joao do Amaral — see Morris,
P. F. (p. 64)

Frankeniaceae, 100
Fraxinus velutina, 54
Frenela huegelii, 64

253

Galactia

benthamiana, 128
megalophylla, 128
Gentianaceae, 101

“ Ghost Fungus A bibliography of
the, 213-218

Gompholobium huegelii, 231
Goodenia

affinis, 152-153
geniculata, 153

geniculata , var. primulacea, 153
glauca, 152
havilandii, 152
lineata, 151-152
pinnatifida, 152
primulacea, 153
Goodeniaceae, 101, 151
Grammes, 98, 236
Grevillea

jephcottii, 117-118
lanigera, 118
Gypsophila australis , 231

Haeckeria

cassiniiformis, 161, 162
ozothamnoides, 161, 162
pholidota, 162
punctulata, 162
Helichrysum —
acuminatum, 157
bracteatum, 157, 228
dealbatum, 158
ericetum, 159
ledifolium, 159
rogersianum, 158, 159
semipapposum, 231
Helipterum anthemoides, 231
Heteronyx, 75
Hovea

longifolia forma aspera, 127
longifolia var. montana, 127
purpurea var. montana, 127
rosmarinifolia, 127
rosmarinifolia var. villosa, 127
Humea

cassiniacea, 161
cassiniiformis, 161, 162
elegans, 161

ozothamnoides, 161, 162
pholidota, 162
punctulata, 162

Hunt Trevor E.: A new species of

Eria (Orchidaceae) , 21-23
Hymenostilbe melanopoda, 74

Iridomyrmex, 14
Isaria

cicadae, 68, 69
japonic a, 68
melanopus, 74
oncoperae, 90
sinclairii, 68
suffruticosa, 68
surmatodes, 68
Isoetaceae, 98, 155

Labiatae, 144

Lamprolobium megalophyllum, 128
Lamprothamnium macropogon, 184
Lecidea bullata, 92
Lentibulariaceae, 151
Lepidium praetervisum, 157
Lepispilus spp., 80

Leptospermum. New Cultivar in, 168
Leptospermum

flavescens, 136, 137
glaucescens, 136, 138
myrtifolium, 136-138
nitidum ‘ Copper Sheen’, 168
sericeum, 136, 137
trinerve, 136, 137
Leucopogon
clelandii , 140
fraseri, 141
gelidus, 140

lanceolatus var. gelidus, 140
neurophyllus, 141
pilibundus, 141
piliferus, 141
riparius, 141

Levenhookia leptantha, 12, 13
Lichen from arid Australia. A remark-
able, 60
Lichens, 248

Lichens. Supplementary descriptions
for two Victorian desert, 197-202
L ilaea scilloides, 169
Lissanthe, 140
Lobelia gibbosa, 231
Lobeliaceae, 98, 101
Loranthaceae, 99
Ludwigia palustris, 170-171
Lyonsia

brownii, 142
reticulata, 143
straminea, 142, 143

Madotheca cranfordii, 90
Malvaceae, 100, 131
Melaleuca

brevifolia, 139
neglecta, 138-139
or aria, 138, 139
Melichrus, 140
Meneristes laticollis, 80, 90
Mentha

diemenica, 144

diemenica var. serpyllifolia, 144
gracilis, 144

gracilis var. serpyllifolia, 144
serpyllifolia, 144
Mimosaccae, 100, 121
Mimosaceae — Part I. Studies in, 114
Monotoca, 140

rotundifolia, 141-142, 159
Morris, P. F.: Notes on the growth of
an English elm, 54

Morris, P. F.: Recent changes in the
nomenclature of three Australian
conifers, 64

Mosses, 99, 227-230, 248

254

Mozley Ann: Bibliographia Huntiana,

224-225

Muscology in Victoria. The present
position of, 55-59
Mylitta australis , 203, 205, 206
Myoporaceae, 101

Myriophyllum brasiliense, 171-173
Myrtaceae, 98, 101, 132

Nitella

acuminata, 184

aemula, 185

b if or mis, 185

congesta, 185

conglobata, 185

conglobata var. Ihotzkyi, 185

cristata, 185-187

diffusa, 187

dregeana, 192

gelatinosa, 188-189, 194

gloeostachys, 189, 194-195

gunnii, 189, 195

hookeri, 176, 195

hyalina, 189

interrupta, 189-190

leonhardii, 189

leptostachys, 190

Ihotzkyi, 190

microphylla, 190

myriotricha, 176

polycephala, 190

polygyra, 191

pseudoflabellata, 176

remota, 191

sonderi, 191

stuartii, 191

subtilissima, 191

tasmanica, 191-192

tricuspis, 192

tumida, 192

sp., 192, 195

Olearia —

allenderce, 156-157

axillaris, 30, 31

decurrens, 32

exilifolia, 24, 30, 31

flavescens, 32

floribunda, 24, 29

floribunda var. lanuginosa, 29

frostii, 24, 31

glutinosa, 31

gunniana, 32, 33

gunniana var. flavescens, 32, 33

hookeri var. ?microcephala, 26

lepidophylla, 29

passerinoides, 24, 31

phlogopappa, 24, 32, 33

phlogopappa var. flavescens, 32, 33

phlogopappa var. subrepanda, 32, 33

quercifolia, 24, 32

ramulosa, 24-30

— var. intermedia, 28

— var. longisetosa, 28

— var. microcephala, 26

— var. microphylla, 25

— var. rigida, 28, 157

— var. stricta, 27

— var. tomentosa, 29

revoluta, 30

rugosa, 156
stellulata, 33, 156
stellulata var. frostii, 31
stricta, 24, 27
subrepanda, 32
toppii, 24, 31

“ Omphalotus nidiformis ”, 214
Omphalotus olearius, 214
Orchids, 244
Othnonius batesii, 85
Oxycanus diremptus, 76, 87-89
Oxycanus spp., 77, 78, 81
Oxylobium alpestre, 142
Ozothamnus pholidotus , 162

Pandorea jasminoides, 150
Papilionaceag, 100, 123
Parmelia

amphixantha* , 197-199
hypoxantha, 60
hypoxantha var. major, 60
semiviridis* , 60, 197
Parmeliopsis semiviridis, 60
Parsonsia
brownii, 142
straminea, 143
Pentachondra, 140
mucronata, 141
Pestalotia, 43

Pestalotiopsis (Fungi Imperfecti) on
Pittosporum bicolor. A new species

of, 43-44

Pestalotiopsis pittospori* , 44
Phthiria albocapitis, 16
Phytolaccaceae, 100
Pimelea

curviflora, 231
drupacea, 157
linifolia, 231
Pinus columbaria, 64
Pithocarpa, 161

Pittosporum bicolor. A new species of
Pestalotiopsis (Fungi Imperfecti)
on, 43

Platanus acerifolia, 213
PLATES

Jessep, Alexander William, 4

I — Stylidium bolgartense, S.

asteroideum & S. rubri-

calyx, spp. nov., 18

II — Stylidium periscelianthum,

S. rhipidium & S. exo-

glossum, spp. nov., 19

III — Stylidium zeicolor & S.

xanthopis, spp. nov., 20

IV — Eria johnsonii, sp. nov.

[= E. irukandjiana St.

Cloud], 22

V — Eucalyptus racemosa Cav.,

39

255

VI — Pestalotiopsis pittospori, sp.

nov., 44

VII — Cordyceps robertsii (Hook.)

Berk., 87

VIII — Cordyceps cranstounii Olliff,

88

IX — Cordyceps gunnii (Berk.)

Berk. & C. ?hawkesii (G.

R. Gray) Cooke, 89

X — Acacia phasmoides sp. nov.,

122

XI — Parmelia semiviridis (F.

Muell. ex Nyl.) P. Bibby,

201

XII — Parmelia amphixantha Mull.

Arg., 202

XIII — Polyporus mylittce Cooke &

Massee, 212

XIV — Clathrus gracilis (Berk.)

Schlechtendal, 220

Platylobium obtusangulum var. spinu-

losum, 126-127
Pleurotus

candescens, 214, 216, 217
illuminans, 214, 216, 217
lampas, 214, 216-218
nidiformis, 213, 214, 216-218
olearius, 214, 216-218
phosphorus, 214, 216, 217
Poa

australis, 231
fax, 45
lepida, 45
Polyporaceae, 246
Polyporus mylittce*, 203, 207-211
Porella

cranfordii, 90
crawfordii, 90
Pottiaceas, 99
Primulaceae, 101
Prostanthera

cruciflora, 144-145
lasianthos, 125
Proteaceae, 99, 117

Ptilotus R.Br. (Amaranthaceae) . New

species and varieties of, 102-108
Ptilotus

appendiculatus* , 102-103
axillaris, 103
carinatus*, 104-105
dissitiflorus var. longifolius, 107
fasciculatus, 103
helipteroides* , 106, 107
lanatus var. glabrobracteatus* , 107
lanatus var. lanatus*, 108
pseudohelipteroides* , 105-107
stirlingii var. pumilus, 108
Pultenaea

angustifolia, 124, 125

angustifolia var. viscosa, 125-126

mollis, 124-125

scabra , 125

subumbellata, 124

vrolandii, 126

williamsoniana, 125-126

Ranunculaceae, 121
Ranunculus, 247
lappaceus, 121
pachycarpus, 121

Recherche Archipelago, W. A. Plants
of the, 97-101
Rhamnaceae, 100, 129
Rhyssonotus nebulosus , 82
Rubiaceae, 98
Rumex dumosus, 231
Rutaceae, 100, 128

Sagittaria graminea var. w eatherbiana,

173

Santalaceae, 120
Santalum lanceolatum, 120
Sap'ndaceae, 100
Scaevola

brookeana, 91
brooksiana, 91
Scrophulariaceae, 146
Scyphophorus, 60

Semmens, E. J.: Notes on the

development and structure of the
“ Basket Fungus ”, Clathrus gra-
cilis (Berk.) Schlechtendal, 219-
221
Senecio

bedfordi, 163
brunonianus, 162
brunonis, 162-163
centropappus, 162
huntii, 163
reinoldii, 163
stewartice, 163
Sida

ammophila, 131-132
c orrugata, 132
fibulifera, 131, 132
petrophila, 132
trichopoda, 131, 132
virgata, 132
Siphula muelleri, 92
Skewes, Coryl I. & Willis J. H. — see
Willis, J. H.

Solanaceae, 101
Sphaeria
forbesii, 81
gunnii, 70, 77, 79
hawkesii, 71, 78
huegelii, 81

innominata, 70, 83, 84
militaris, 80
robertsii, 81, 82
taylori, 72, 83, 84
Spyridium

nitidum, 129, 130
spathulatum, 129-130
spathulatum var. microphyllum, 129,
130

tridentatum, 130
Stackhousiaceae, 100
Stilbum formicarum, 71, 74
Stylidiaceae, 99, 101, 153
Stylidium from Western Australia.
New species and varieties of, 7-20

256

Stylidium
adpressum, 7

adpressum var. patens, 16
asteroideum*, 8 , 17-18
beaugleholei, 153-155
bolgartense*, 7 , 10, 17-18
brachyphyllum, 153-155
breviscapum, 13, 15
despectum, 11, 12, 13
emarginatum, 10
exoglossum* , 11 , 17 , 19
inundatum, 153, 154, 155
lineatum, 15, 16
periscelianthum* , 10 , 17 , 19
petiolare, 7-11, 13
pulchellum, 10
repens, 7, 13, 15
repens var. diplectroglossum, 15
rhipidium*, 11 , 17 , 19 , 153, 155
rubricalyx* , 9 , 17-18
sacculatum*, 13-14
scandens, 13, 15
trichopodum, 13, 15
verticillatum, 13, 15
xanthopis* , 12 , 17 , 20
zeicolor*, 7, 15 , 17 , 20
Styphelia, 140
clelandii, 140
gelida, 140
mucronata, 141
neurophylla, 141
pilibunda, 141
pilifera, 141
riparia, 141

Thelephoraceas, 99, 246
Themeda australis, 231
Thymelaeaceae, 101
Thysanotus
junceus, 45
juncifolius, 45

Tolypella glomerata, 178, 193
Toninia bullata, 91, 92
Tortula pagorum in Australia, 227 -
230
Tortula

baileyi, 227, 228, 229
Icevipila, 228

Icevipila var. pagorum, 228
IcevipHa var. propagulifera , 228
Icevipila var. wachteri, 228
pagorum, 227, 228, 229
papillosa, 99, 227
Trictena spp., 78, 83
Tristania
conferta, 232
lactiflora, 91 , 232
lactiflua, 91 , 232
Trochocarpa, 140
Ulmus procera, 54
Utricularia violacea, 151 , 155
Wahlenbergia ?communis, 231
Westringia
glabra, 145, 146
glabra var. bacchi, 145 , 146
glabra var. wnlliamsonii, 145 , 146

rigida, 145
senifolia, 146
violacea, 145, 146
violacea var. bacchi, 145, 146
williamsonii, 145, 146
Williams, Mary B . — see Wood, R. D.
Willis, J. H.: A bibliography of the

Australian boabab ( Andansonia
gregorii), 61-63

Willis, J. H.: A bibliography of

“ Blackfellows’ Bread ”, Polyporus
mylittce Cooke & Massee, 203-212
Willis, J. H.: A bibliography of the

“ Ghost Fungus ”, Pleurotus nidi-
formis (Berk.) Sacc., 213-218
Willis, J. H.: A Collection of Plants
from the Victorian Pyrenees in
1840, 231-232

Willis, J. H.: Australian species of

the fungal genus Cordyceps, 67-

89

Willis, J. H.: Further Cordyceps

collections in Australia, 223-224
Willis, J. H.: Notes on the vegetation
of the Eucla district, W. A., 92-96
Willis, J. H.: New cultivar in Leptos-
permum (L. nitidum ‘ Copper
Sheen’), 168

Willis, J. H,: Orthography of certain
specific epithets, 90-91
Willis, J. H.: Plants of the Recherche
Archipelago, W. A. 97-101
Willis, J. H.: Reduction of the lichen
genus Bibbya, 91-92
Willis, J. H.: Robert Brown’s collect-
ings in Victoria, 51-54
Willis, J. H.: Systematic notes on the
indigenous Australian flora, 1 17 —
163

Willis, J. H.: Systematic notes on

Victorian Composite, 24-33
Willis, J. H.: The late Raleigh

Adelbert Black (1880-1963) and
his private herbarium, 233-238
Willis, J. H.: The present position of
Muscology in Victoria (a centen-
nial review), 55-59
Will's, J. H.: Tristania lactiflua or

T. lactiflora ?, 232

Willis, J, H.: Typification of eight

Victorian species names in Euca-
lyptus, 165-168

Willis, J. H., & Court, A. B.: Changes
in the nomenclature of three

Victorian monocotyledons, 45
Willis, J. H., & Erickson, Rica — see

Erickson, Rica

Willis, J. H., & Skewes, Coryl I:

Robert Brown’s Bass Strait
journal of April/May 1802, 46-50
Wood, R, D., & Williams, Mary B.:
Australian Characeae which sur-
vived the Armidale Fire, 175-196
Zygophyllaceae, 100

By Authority: A. C. Brooks, Government Printer, Melbourne.

' *

t'\ :

■ *